Home

Operation Manual CLI

image

Contents

1. no lacp iu SLOT port priority PORTS Command Mode Function lacp port priority PORTS lt 1 65535 gt Bridge Sets the LACP priority of member port PORTS CXU port number 1 65535 port priority no lacp port priority PORTS Clears port priority of selected member port of CXU lacp iu SLOT port priority PORTS lt 1 65535 gt Bridge Sets the LACP priority of member port SLOT IU slot number PORTS port number s Slot Port 1 65535 sets port priority Clears port priority of selected IU member ports i The LACP priority of a member port is basically configured to 32768 After clearing the priority the member port returns to this default configuration 24 3 10 Checking LACP Configuration To check the LACP configuration use the following commands 238 Id 0900d8058020266d Operation Manual CLI Link Aggregation show lacp port show lacp port PORTS show lacp iu SLOT aggregator show lacp iu SLOT aggregator AGGREGATIONS show lacp iu SLOT port show lacp iu SLOT port PORT Command Mode Function show lacp aggregator Privileged Shows aggregator information of CXU Confi show lacp aggregator AGGREGATIONS Ed Shows aggregator information of the selected CXU aggregator AGGREGATORS Select aggregator number s 0 1 Shows the information of member ports of CXU Shows the information of appropriated member port of CXU Shows aggrega
2. Id 0900d80580203028 231 IP Anti Spoofing Operation Manual CLI 23 IP Anti Spoofing IP anti spoofing can be used at the subscriber ports to control the IP traffic in the upstream direction Only IP packets should be accepted which come in from valid IP source addresses All other packets have to be discarded IP anti spoofing for incoming IP packets is enabled if it was set for both the VLAN and the port 23 1 Global Enabling of IP Anti Spoofing fi IP anti spoofing may be only enabled if the CXU runs in enhanced MAC mode Command Mode Function ip antispoofing global enable disable Bridge Sets the global antispoofing flag enable or disable 23 2 Enabling IP Anti Spoofing for Port Command Mode Function bridgeport PORTS antispoofing enable disable Bridge Bridge port IP anti spoofing configuration PORTS slot port ONU ID ONT slot ONT port enable disables IP anti spoofing 23 3 Checking the Status Command Mode Function show ip antispoofing global show ip antispoofing bridgeport Bridge Displays global status of IP anti spoofing Displays port status of IP anti spoofing 23 4 Configuring an IP Anti Spoofing VLAN Profile In VLANs which are entered into the IP anti spoofing VLAN profile packets with allowed IP addresses only will be accepted and forwarded In the other VLANs all packets are
3. 186 Id 0900d80580214302 Operation Manual CLI IGMP IGMP Provider Configuring of Providers 19 3 IGMP provider are required to use proxy functionality on the OLT Use the following commands to create an IGMP provider and to modify its parameters Command Mode Function igmp provider 1 16 A B C D NAME lt 1 4093 gt igmp provider A B C D NAME lt 1 4093 gt Config no igmp provider 1 16 all Creates an IGMP provider 1 16 provider index A B C D IGMP proxy IP address NAME name of IGMP provider 1 4093 multicast VLAN ID Deletes specified or all IGMP provider s 1 16 provider index all all providers default igmp query parameter 1 255 recent default lt 1 65535 gt recent default lt 1 255 gt recent default lt 1 65535 gt default lt 1 255 gt default lt 1 65535 gt default lt 1 255 gt default lt 1 65535 gt default on off default lt 1 16 gt Config Sets provider s query parameters 1 255 Robustness value recent does not change robustness default 2 1 65535 Query interval value recent does not change query interval default 125 1 255 Response interval 0 1 sec recent does not change response interval default 100 1 65535 startup query interval sec 1 255 startup query count default 2 1 65535 last member query interval default
4. Command Mode Function igmp enable disable Config Enables default disables global IGMP igmp traffic max joined groups lt 1 5000 gt Config Sets maximum number of subscribers that can join a multicast group in the system 1 5000 maximum joined MC groups Use the following commands to verify the global IGMP configuration 184 Id 0900d80580214302 Operation Manual CLI IGMP Command Mode Function show igmp Config Displays IGMP status show igmp traffic max joined groups Config Displays max number of subscribers that can join MC groups in system 19 2 IGMP RFC Profile Overview Query Parameters In the hiX 5750 R2 0 RFC profiles are used to modify the preset IGMP query parame ters In order to configure IGMP queries the following options can be set Robustness value allows tuning for the expected packet loss on a subnet If a subnet is expected to be lossy the robustness variable may be increased IGMP is robust to robustness variable 1 packet losses The robustness variable MUST NOT be zero and SHOULD NOT be one Query Interval in seconds sets the frequency at which IGMP host query packets downstream are transmitted on the interface Response Interval in seconds sets max response time inserted into the periodic general queries When the subscriber host doesn t respond to IGMP query mes sages it is unsubscribed from the multicast group It must be less than the query i
5. Configure Network Entity Titles NET for the Routing Process Command Mode Function net NET Router Adds a Network Entity Title NET for the instance NET define the area addresses for the IS IS area XX 2000CYYYY YYYY Y YYY 00 XX XXXX Area Address YYYY YYYY YYYY System ID Use the no parameter to remove the NET fi Up to parameter max area adresses number of NETs can be specified Command Mode Function Router Specifies the number of max area addresses 3 254 max addresses range The no parameter set the number to the default value 3 max area addresses lt 3 254 gt Enabling IS IS Routing on the Interface Enter into Interface configuration mode and specify the interfaces that should be actively routing IS IS Command Mode Function Enables an IS IS IPv4 routing process on the interface This command is mandatory to IS IS configuration WORD existing or new routing instance tag e g symbolic router name Disable IS IS routing on the interface with the no command To clear the database unconfigure the IS IS routing instance ip router isis WORD Interface 21 4 2 Extended Router Configuration Level for the Routing Instance Dynamic Hostname Exchange Id 0900d80580212815 215 IP Routing Operation Manual CLI e LSP Parameter e Summary Address Domain Password Level for the Routing Instance By default the first instance i
6. DSCP DSCP value 0 to 63 Id 0900d80580204604 243 Rules Operation Manual CLI Command Mode Function action cos lt 0 7 gt action cos lt 0 7 gt overwrite Rule Changes 802 1p class of service 0 7 enter CoS value Overwrites 802 1p COS field in the packet action cos same as tos overwrite Changes 802 1p class of service same as tos same as IP ToS precedence bits no action cos overwrite overwrites 802 1p COS field in the packet Deletes changes of 802 1p class of service action ip prec lt 0 7 gt Rule Changes ToS precedence bits in the packet no action ip prec 0 7 ToS precedence value action ip precsame as cos action bandwidth BANDWIDTH 802 1p CoS value Rule Determines maximum allowed bandwidth no action bandwidth BANDWIDTH value in Mbps action vlan lt 1 4094 gt Rule Specifies matched packet VLAN ID no action vian 1 4094 VLAN ID value action copy to cpu Rule Copies to CXU no action copy to cpu no action untag action counter Rule Rule action counter no action counter action untag Rule Rule action untag Configuring of No Match Actions Command Mode Function no action deny Rule No deny access no no action deny no action allow permit Rule No permit access no no action allow permit no action redirect
7. liliis 48 Checking the Operating Values of System 0000 e ee eeee 49 Displaying the Running Time of System 0 0000 e eee eee 49 Checking the CPW Load ic secretia Sa rareuaas cb REESE RN aes 49 Displaying Consumption Ratio of System Memory Lss 50 Displaying the Fan Status c 2 sccscahia dp Rb BER RE 50 Displaying Running Processes 000 ccc eee eee 50 Checking the System Access 0 0 cee eee 50 Checking the Network Connection liliis eee eee 51 Tracing Packet ROUTES uius tbe EE EE s dat Seen eos aed 51 Checking Telnet User i i i2 piod eR RE Rex UR PS RE REI ES 51 Displaying Hosts Accessing the System 00 0c cee eee eee 52 Operation Environment Jnd cee cio rano re tb doe terse 52 Setting the Output Condition of Terminal Screen 055 52 Gonfiguring Login Bare occ oim edes bea sioda Ert erbe Sa 52 System Properties i co iine Gitte stoke SERE pe ERE ogee 54 Setting the Host Name llllllssllsese sns 54 Configuring of System Date and Time lille 54 Configuring the Time Zone liliis eres 54 Synchronizing the Glok rica 5o nE eub eer tee hve bee RAE So 55 AGIS qs E preterm e oaeeuvene mun e E Mb dab Ee DD DES d 56 Configuring an Alarm Severity Profile llle 56 Checking the Alarm Severity Configuration llli sls 56 Displaying the Occured Alarms liliis 58 Configuring the GPON Alarm T
8. 27 5 Mapping a Subscriber Port to IRL Profile The mapping of a dedicated port to an existing IRL profile actives the input rate limiting for this port In order to map an IRL profile use the following command Commands Mode Function irl create ifmap PORT PROFILNAME Creates a new IRL port PORT subscriber port number PROFILENAME enter profile name The port must be already exists and should be a subscriber port The NE rejects not created ports and ports which have a wrong type However offline configuration is of course possible e g if the concerned IU is currently not plugged in An example for creating IRL interface map SWITCH config irl create ifmapi 1 1 Profile 001 SWITCH config irl create ifmapi 4 1 Profile 001 SWITCH config irl create ifmap2 2 1 Profile 003 SWITCH config irl create ifmap2 4 1 Profile 003 SWITCH config The mapping can be deleted in order to stop IRL Commands Mode Function irl delete ifmap PORT Config Deletes an existing port from IRL profile PORT subscriber port name Notes 1 The irl create ifmap command and the irl delete ifmap command are processed immediately Afterwards there is no need to execute the irl apply command 2 One and the same IRL profile can be used for any number of ports residing on the same or different IUs 3 When an IRL profile is referenced the first time it will be automatically loaded from CXU to that IU which owns the
9. Command Mode Function show onu card config state ADDRESS Config Displays state of configuration for a specified MDU ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port ONU ID ONU slot d 0900d80580257da6 77 Ports Operation Manual CLI 10 Ports Ports can be configured in Configuration mode and Bridge configuration mode Execute the bridge command to change the system prompt from SWITCH config to SW TCH bridge The port configuration is described in following sections General Configuration Traffic Management Port Statistics Payload Counters GPON Port Configuration Ethernet Port Configuration E1 DS1 Port Configuration and Test Checking Port Configuration Performance Monitoring 10 1 General Configuration Command Mode Function port PORTS enable disable test Bridge Enables disables a port PORTS OLT slot GPON port ONU ID ONU slot ONU port test configures a port as test port port PORTS alarm severity profile lt 1 10 gt Configures port specific alarm severity profile index 1 10 profile index port PORTS description LINE Port specific description LINE text max number of characters is 100 clear port PORTS description Clears specific description Command Mode Function port gpon I eth I pots etds1lI I xdsl catv ces PORTS Bridge Enables disables a port enable disable test PORT
10. Deletes a user dial mapping table entry Verifying the SIP User Dialplan Mappings To verify SIP user dial mapping table use the following command Command Mode Function show voip sip user dialplan mapping table Exec Shows the user dialplan mapping table Config 12 8 5 SIP Performance Monitoring Configuring of PM Thresholds To configure VoIP SIP performance thresholds use the following commands Command Mode Function create voip performance sip agent pm threshold 2 16 RXINVITEREQ RXIVITREQRETRANS RXNONIVITEREQ RXNONINVITEREQRETRANS RXRESP RXRESPRTRANS SEVERITY modify voip performance sip agent pm threshold 1 16 RXINVITEREQ RXIVITREQRETRANS RXNONIVITEREQ RXNONINVITEREQRETRANS RXRESP RXRESPRTRANS SEVERITY delete voip performance sip agent init pm threshold 2 16 Config Creates threshold table for SIP agent performance monitoring 2 16 table index RXINVITEREQ threshold for ReceivelnviteReq RXIVITREQRETRANS threshold for ReceivelnviteReqRetrans RXNONIVITEREQ threshold for ReceiveNonInviteReq RXNONINVITEREQRETRANS threshold for ReceiveNonlnvit eReqRetrans RXRESP threshold for ReceiveResp RXRESPRTRANS threshold for ReceiveRespretrans SEVERITY pointer to alarm severity alarm Modifies threshold table for SIP agent performance monitoring 1 16 table index Deletes threshold table for SIP agent performance monitoring
11. Operation Manual CLI Voice over IP 12 8 Session Initiation Protocol SIP 12 8 1 SIP Profiles This section describes the following SIP profile tables e Feature Access Codes Profile Application Service Profile Dial Plan Profile Feature Access Codes Profile The feature access codes define administrable feature access codes for the VoIP sub scribers A table entry can be referenced by the VoIP Voice CTP object One default profile always exists To configure the feature access profile table use the following commands Command Mode Function create voip sip feature access codes profile table entry LINE modify voip sip feature access codes profile table entry profile name NDEX LINE delete voip sip feature access codes profile table entry INDEX Config Create the feature access codes profile table LINE descriptive name for profile handling Size 0 64 Modifies the profile name INDEX index of profile LINE descriptive name for profile handling Deletes the feature access codes profile table To modify entries of feature access profile table use the following commands Command Mode Function modify voip sip feature access codes profile table entry cancel call waiting NDEX LINE modify voip sip feature access codes profile table entry call hold NDEX LINE modify voip sip feature access codes profile table entry call park NDEX
12. create pm object lt 1 6 gt lt 1 4294967295 gt lt 1 3 gt lt 1 96 gt lt 1 16 gt Config create pm object gem port gal ethernet onu tcont ponpptp lt 1 4294967295 gt olt ont no lt 1 96 gt 1 16 delete pm object lt 1 1024 gt modify pm object lt 1 1024 gt 112 1 96 1 16 Creates a PM object 1 6 type of PM object 1 GEM port 2 not used 3 GAL Ethernet 4 ONU 5 T CONT 6 PonPptp 1 4294967295 type index of PM object GEM Port GAL Ethernet GEM port index ONU phys index TCONT TCont Index PON Pptp Interface index 1 3 endpoint of PM object 1 ONT 2 OLT 3 no endpoint If the PM data are collected for the managed entities GEM port GAL Ethernet this attribute is used to select between monitoring points that are located at ONT or OLT If the PM data are collected for the managed entities ONU T CONT or PonPptp this attribute is don t care 1 96 history entry size The default value is 1 and means at least one history entry is desired In case of PM object creation the number of 15 min entries is set and the number of 24 h entries is always 1 1 16 index of threshold profile Creates a PM object of specified type gem port 1 GEM Port gal ethernet 3 GAL Ethernet onu 4 ONU tcont 5 TCONT ponpptp 6 PON Pptp 1 4294967295 type index of PM object GEM Port GAL Ethernet GEM port index ONU phys index TCONT TCont Index PON Pptp I
13. modify voip sip user data table user password ADDRESS LINE modify voip sip user data table addr user password ADDRESS LINE Mode Function Modifies SIP user data table IF INDEX interface index POTS PPTP ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port ONT ID port number POTS port number 1 to max PTR pointer to SIP agent config data table PWD pointer to authentication security method table OxFFFF no user name Password TME voice mail server subscription time sec A PTR pointer to application service profile table OXFFFF no application services profile is available FC PTR pointer to access code table OxFFFF no feature access code table is available REL TMR release timer sec 0 use internal default ROH PTR receive off hook condition time sec Config Modifies SIP user identification part LINE user identification part of the address of records This can take the form of an alphanumeric string or the directory number used to reference the user in the network Modifies SIP display name LINE customer ID used for outgoing SIP messages display attribute in ASCII string format Size 0 25 Modifies SIP voice mail server SIP URI LINE IP address or URI of the SIP voice mail server for SIP signaling messages Modifies SIP user name LINE a SIP user name used for authentication Modifies SIP user password LINE a SIP user password used for authentication Verifying SIP User D
14. vlans 1 50 8002 080006261d2f 8002 080006261d2f bridge id designated root root port 0 0 path cost Oport 0 1 forward delay 15 s MST02 max hops 20 port id state designated root 1001 forwarding role designated 8002 080006261d2f path cost 5000 Id 0900d80580203028 Operation Manual CLI Spanning Tree designated bridge 8002 080006261d2 message age timer 0 0 designated port 1001 forward delay timer 0 00 designated cost 0 flags P2P SWITCH bridge 22 5 BPDU Configuration BPDU is a transmission message used in order to configure and maintain the configu ration of STP RSTP MSTP Switches using STP exchange their information BDPU to find the best path An MSTP BPDU is general an STP BPDU extended with additional MST data The MSTP part of BPDU does not rest if it is out of the region Hello time Hello time decides an interval time when a switch transmits BPDU It can be config ured from 1 to 10 seconds The default is 2 seconds Max Age Root switch transmits new information every time based on information from another switches However if there are many switches on network it takes lots of time to transmit BDPUs And if the network status is changed while transmitting BDPU this information is useless To get rid of useless information Max age is identified in each information Forward Delay Switches find location of another switches connec
15. xdsl line config profile PROFILE pwr mgmt l2rate lt 8000 1024000 gt Bridge Configures the power management L2 rate PROFILE enter the profile name 8000 1024000 L2 rate value in bps Loop Length and Burst Mode Command Mode Function xdsl line config profile PROFILE up pbo kl lt 0 1280 gt Bridge Configures the upstream electrical loop length expressed in dB at 1 MHz on xDSL line PROFILE enter the profile name 0 1280 value insteps of 0 1 dB 0 0 GB 1280 128 dB xdsl line config profile PROFILE up pbo ko Bridge Enables disables usage of electrical loop length on xDSL line If not enable disable enabled the electrical loop length shall be autonomously derived be the xTU s Default value is disabled PROFILE enter the profile name xdsl line config profile PROFILE boost mode Bridge Enables disables usage of boost mode on xDSL line If disabled the enable disable UPBO standard mode is used with the LOSS function calculated according to G 997 1 PROFILE enter the profile name 11 1 3 Checking of Profiles Command Mode Function show xdsl line config profile Privieged Shows all configured line profiles Global show xdsl line config profile PROFILE Bridge Shows one configured line profile show xdsl line config profile PROFILE margin PROFILE enter the profile name Shows all SNR margins of selected profile PROFILE ente
16. Before deleting a channel the assigned VCCs bridge ports must be deleted or assigned to another channel no unassigned VCC with invalid used channel possible Additional VCCs and bridge ports can be created deleted by operator no automatic creation or deletion with channel To switch the configuration from ADSL2 to VDSL2 not more than 1 VCC bridge port must be assigned to each channel Additional VCC bridge ports must be deleted by the operator before 11 1 Line Profiles This profile includes common attributes describing both ends of the line It is required for all physical xDSL interfaces i This characters are not allowed for profilename size 1 32 space leading integer 11 1 1 Creating Deleting a Profile Command Mode Function xdsl add line config profile PROFILE Bridge Creates xDSL line config profile PROFILE enter the profile name xdsl delete line config profile PROFILE Deletes xDSL line config profile Id 0900d80580256ef1 107 XDSL Operation Manual CLI Command Mode Function NEW PROFILE xdsl duplicate line config profile SOURCE PROFILE Bridge Copies a line profile SOURCE PROFILE name of origin line profile NEW PROFILE name of new line profile 108 11 1 2 Configuration The commands configuring the line profile are contained in the sections e VDSL2 Profile GS Standard Bandplan Line Type Rate Mode RX Power Max Aggregate Power
17. Id 0900d8058023fad7 Operation Manual CLI MAC SWITCH bridge show prioprofilemap Prio in Inner prio Outer prio 0 0 0 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 4 5 5 5 6 6 6 7 FJ 7 SWITCH bridge 13 3 Configuring of CoS Mapping Profiles The CoS mapping profile sets for the inner VLAN the priorities per GEM port of the ONU The MAC mode defined for a certain VLAN depends on the priority values of this profile Use the following commands to configure the CoS mapping profile Command Mode Function cosprofilemap NPRIOOUT Bridge Creates a CoS mapping profile with an index given by system no cosprofilemap COSPROFILE The maximum number of profiles is 64 INPRIOOUT 4 character string of priority values Valid values are from 0 7 Setting of default profile 0 2 4 6 Deletes the specified CoS profile COSPROFILE profile index A profile that is assigned to a VLAN cannot be deleted show cosprofilemap COSPROFILE Bridge Examples Shows information about all or specified CoS mapping profile COSPROFILE profile index Verifying the CoS mapping profiles with show command only default profile 1 is present SWITCH bridge show cosprofilemap Profile Inner prio Out nN FN OC Creating a CoS mapping profile profile index 2 with priority values O 1 2 3 SWITCH bridge cosprofilemap 0123 SWITCH bridge show cosprofilemap
18. LINE Config Changes usage string of an external alarm output 1 3 number of the alarm output LINE new usage string Changes level and usage string of an external alarm input 1 8 number of the alarm input 0 1 low or high active LINE new usage string 7 9 Checking the Physical Tables Command Mode Function show table physical container Config Displays the SNMP table show table physical container PHYSINDEX PHYSINDEX physical index to show information for show table physical card show table physical card PHYSINDEX show table physical entity show table physical entity PHYSINDEX show table shelf Config Displays the slot usage and configuration for all slots show table shelf SLOTNUM Displays the slot usage and configuration SLOTNUM slot number show table physical shelf Config Displays the slot usage and configuration for all slots show table physical rack Config Displays the SNMP configuration of the rack show card config state SLOTNUM Config Displays card specific information for specified slot SLOTNUM slot number show objects temperature Config Displays the temperature alarm tresholds of the shelf Id 0900d8058023f600 63 CXU Board and Line Redundancy Operation Manual CLI 8 CXU Board and Line Redundancy The hiX 5750 R2 0 provides CXU board redundancy to offer a high level of failure pro tection regarding to
19. Loaded Profiles ifmap Parts U 2 1 Profile 003 22 I S 4 3 4 5 48 Loaded Profiles ifma Ports 1U 3 none none Id 0900d80580202c91 249 IRL Input Rate Limitation Operation Manual CLI 27 1 Creating a IRL Profile Commands Mode Function irl create profile PROFILENAME Config Creates a new IRL profile PROFILENAME enter a profile name Example of creating an IRL profile SWITCH config irl create profileProfile 001 SWITCH config irl set profile cir 1000 SWITCH config irl set profile cbs 7500 SWITCH config irl set profile pir 1000 SWITCH config irl set profile pbs 10000 SWITCH config irl apply profile SWITCH config show irl profile info Profile 001 4 R R CIR CBS PIR PBS SNMP Profile Name kbps bytes kbps bytes index R 4 4 4 1000 7500 1000 10000 1 Profile_001 SWITCH config 27 2 Modifying of IRL Profiles Commands Mode Function irl modify profile PROFILENAME Config Modifies an existing IRL profile PROFILENAME enter the profile name irl set profile cir cbs pir pbs VALUE Config Sets IRL profile data enter the profile name cir committed information rate 0 16000 cbs committed burst size lt 96 10000 gt pir peak information rate lt 0 16000 gt pbs peak b
20. Operation Manual CLI XDSL Command Mode Function xdsl line config profile PROFILE down pbo esel Bridge Configures power backoff assumed electrical length of xDSL line down pbo esel min lt 0 512 gt PROFILE enter the profile name down pbo esel downstream power backoff assumed electrical length 0 255 5 values in steps of 0 5 dB 0 PBO disabled down pbo esel min downstream power backoff assumed minimum electrical length 0 512 values in steps of 0 5 dB default 512 If this value is not 512 default and DownPboEsel is not zero DownPboEsel gt DownPboE selMin is required xdsl line config profile PROFILE down pbo mus Bridge Sets min usable receive signal PSD on xDSL line 0 255 PROFILE enter the profile name 0 255 values in steps of 0 5 dB Hz 127 5 to 0 dB Hz xdsl line config profile PROFILE down pbo fmin Bridge Sets start value of frequency range where PBO is applied on xDSL line lt 0 2048 gt PROFILE enter the profile name 0 2048 value 4 3125 kHz xdsl line config profile PROF LE down pbo fmax Bridge Sets end value of frequency range where PBO is applied on xDSL line lt 32 4095 gt PROFILE enter the profile name 32 4095 value 4 3125 kHz xdsl line config profile PROF LE dpbo epsd add Bridge Adds one subcarrier level pair PSD mask on xDSL line lt 1 4095 gt lt 0 255 gt PROFILE enter the profile name 1 4095 subcarrier index 0 255 PSD mask leve xds
21. d 0900d8058024303c Operation Manual CLI Using CLI 2 4 5 Command Can be used in the following mode Function do Config bridge config rmonhistory config rule dhcp provider pppoe provider config if config touter config router map It is possible to use commands that are only valid in Exec mode e g do write Table 13 Privileged Exec Mode Command An example for the write command SWITCH config do write LINEexec command SWITCH config do write Using Line Editing Keys Some commonly used key combinations in order to simplify the line editing are listed in the Table 14 Keys Ctrl B or left arrow key Function Moves cursor back one character Ctrl F or right arrow key Moves cursor forward one character Ctrl A Ctrl E Moves cursor to beginning of line Moves cursor to end of line Moving the CLI cursor Ctrl I or tab key Command completion Ctrl D Deletes character under cursor and shifts remainder of line to left Ctrl H Deletes character to left of cursor Ctrl K Deletes characters from under cursor to end of line Ctrl W Deletes word to the left of cursor Ctrl U Deletes entire line Editing command line Ctrl N or down arrow key Ctrl P or up arrow key Scrolls next command in command history buffer and places cursor at end of command Scrolls previous command in command history buffer and places cursor at end o
22. Accessintegrator AccessIntegrator Ethernet Access Control List Asynchronous Digital Subscriber Line Advanced Encryption Standard Alarm Indication Signal Alternative Mark Inversion Access Node Interface PON Interface American National Standards Institute Angled Polished Connector Application Program Software Address Resolution Protocol Autonomous System American Standard Code for Information Interchange Asynchronous Transfer Mode American Wire Gauge Binary eight Zero Substitution Broadcast Storm Control Bit Error Rate Border Gateway Protocol Building Integrated Timing Supply Bridge Protocol Data Unit Broadband Remote Access Server Connection Admission Control Channel Associated Signaling 1 Community Antenna Television 2 Cable Television Conformit Europ enne Circuit Emulation Service Code Failure Rate d 0900d80580240c85 Operation Manual CLI Abbreviations CLI CLIP CMOS CNN CORBA CoS CPE CTP CXU DA DBA DBMS DC DCE DFB DHCP DIN DNS DR DS DSO DS1 DSCP DSL DSLAM DTMF E1 EEPROM EM EMC EMI Command Line Interface Calling Line Identification Presentation Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor Composite Network Node Common Object Request Broker Architecture Class of Service Customer Premises Equipment Connection Termination Point Central Switch Fabric Unit Destination Address Dynamic Bandwidth Allocation Database Management System Direct Current Data Commun
23. Command Mode Function show ip prefix list detail summary Privileged Shows prefix lists in detail or briefly Config show ip prefix list WORD seq number show ip prefix list WORD A B C D M show ip prefix list WORD A B C D M longer show ip prefix list WORD A B C D M first match Shows prefix list of specified name Shows policy of specified number Shows policy applied to specified network Shows all policies of prefix list applied to specified network Shows policy first applied to specified network Deleting Number of Inquiring Prefix List By default system records number how many times prefix list is inquired To delete the number use the following command Command Mode Function clear ip prefix list WORD A B C D M Privileged Deletes the number how many times prefix list is inquired WORD list name A B C D M specifies the network 21 2 10 AS Route Filtering Policies applies to decide routes are registered in an access list In order to filter routing information with AS standard configure filtering policy in the access list and apply the policy to the neighbor router Command Mode Function ip as path access list WORD permit deny LINE Config Defines specific AS in access list LINE WORD enter the access list number enter a regular expression Id 0900d80580212815 205 IP Routing Operation
24. Example of assigning the IP address 192 168 1 10 to 1 SWITCH config if ip address 192 168 1 10 16 SWITCH config if All assigned IP addresses can be cleared with the following commands Command Mode Function no ip address Interface Clears all IP addresses 15 3 Displaying the IP Address of Interface Use the following command to display an assigned IP address Command Mode Function show ip Interface Displays an assigned IP address of the interface SWITCH config if show ip Scope Status IP Address 10 7 24 199 16 SWITCH config if global 15 4 Displaying the Interface Status To check the interface status and configuration use the following command Command Mode Function show interface INTERFACENAME Privileged Shows Interface status and configuration Config Interface Id 0900d80580257621 167 Interface Configuration Operation Manual CLI Example SWITCH config show interface Interface lo Hardware is Loopback index 1 metric 1 mtu 16436 lt UP LOOPBACK RUNNING gt VRF Binding Not bound Bandwidth 100m input packets 318223 bytes 56058589 dropped 0 multicast packets 0 input errors 0 length 0 overrun 0 CRC 0 frame 0 fifo 0 missed 0 output packets 318223 bytes 56058589 dropped 0 output errors 0 aborted 0 carrier 0 fifo 0 heartbeat 0 window 0 collisions 0 Interface
25. Max nominal PSD Bit Swapping Subcarrier Mask e SNR Magin Values e Power Back off PBO Power Managment Loop Length and Burst Mode i Before parameters of line profile can be modified the port has to be in locked state i Preconditions for profile modification are The profile should not be in use by active ports Amodification of VDSL2 profile number in a way that it causes new subcarrier spacing is not allowed for profiles which are assigned to a VDSL2 line Amodification of GS standard in a way that it causes a new DSL standard VDSL2 gt ADSL2 or back is not allowed for profiles which are assigned to a DSL line The activation of ADSL2 and VDSL2 standard s inside one profile is not allowed VDSL2 Profile GS Standard Bandplan A clear target of the VDSL2 standard was to adopt a single line code in cooperation with established DSL standardization bodies Therefore VDSL2 is based on both the VDSL1 and ADSL2 ADSL2 recommendations It is spectrally compatible with existing services and enables multimode operability with ADSL2 and ADSL2 The hiX 5750 R2 0 uses VDSL2 configuration profiles and bandplans to meet regional service provider require ments VDSL2 also defines asymmetric Plan 998 and symmetric Plan 997 bandplans for the transmission in upstream and downstream direction As in ADSL the lower part of the spectra is allocated for POTS and ISDN service and a splitter is used to separate such
26. The system complies with the standard EN 60950 IEC 60950 All equipment connected has to comply with the applicable safety standards The same text in German Wichtiger Hinweis zur Produktsicherheit In elektrischen Anlagen stehen zwangslaufig bestimmte Teile der Ger te unter Span nung Einige Teile k nnen auch eine hohe Betriebstemperatur aufweisen Eine Nichtbeachtung dieser Situation und der Warnungshinweise kann zu K rperverlet zungen und Sachsch den f hren Deshalb wird vorausgesetzt dass nur geschultes und qualifiziertes Personal die Anlagen installiert und wartet Das System entspricht den Anforderungen der EN 60950 IEC 60950 Angeschlossene Ger te m ssen die zutreffenden Sicherheitsbestimmungen erf llen Id 0900d8058025 467 Operation Manual CLI Table of Contents This document has 272 pages Tel 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 2 1 22 2 2 1 222 2 2 3 2 2 4 2 2 5 2 2 6 2d 2 2 8 2 2 9 2 2 10 2 2 11 2 3 2 4 2 4 1 2 4 2 2 4 3 2 4 4 2 4 5 2 5 3 1 3 2 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 3 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 7 3 8 3 9 3 10 Change iSto ss specs but ed ciuis ede ie eet agent pesto Eq d 15 MOUGNO PTT cp 17 Xu EL A E AET EENE EAA EET 17 Document CONVENTIONS ss ssa eae ve e euis see iaa E EAE ee 17 Typographical Conventions s erise 1 524 simien ihania 17 Related Doc ments a1 icb rs iR DEP ime RUE ERR REESE Reg 18 GPL LGPL Warranty and Liability Exclusion 20055 18 USNOG BE sod uidet e
27. lt 1 65535 gt Privileged Shows the configuration of RMON history of specified number Rmon Config 1 65535 value for specifying Example of activating RMON history and viewing the configuration SWITCH config rmonhistory 5 active SWITCH config show rmon history config 5 history data source interval buckets status owner 5 9 1 60 s 25 25 valid nokia SWITCH config To show RMON ether history table use the following command Command Mode Function show rmon history ether history lt 1 65535 gt 1 100 Config Shows the ether history entries sampling values Note always the last n values will be displayed but no 1 65535 enter the history index for history table more than the number of the granted buckets 1 100 enter the number of samples should be displayed 30 8 Deleting the RMON History To change the history configuration delete the history and then configure it again Command Mode Function no rmon history lt 1 65535 gt Config Deletes RMON history of specified number 1 65535 enter the history index for deleting Example of deleting RMON history 5 SWITCH config no rmon history 5 SWITCH config Id 0900d8058024f4b8 265 Abbreviations Operation Manual CLI 31 ACI ACI E ACL ADSL AES AIS AMI ANI ANSI APC APS ARP AS ASCII ATM AWG B8ZS BCSC BER BGP BITS BPDU BRAS CAC CAS CATV CE CES CFR 266 Abbreviations
28. 146 1d 0900d8058023f697 Operation Manual CLI Voice over IP Command Mode Function create voip performance sip call init pm threshold lt 2 16 gt FAILEDTOCONNECT FAILEDTOVALIDATE TIMEOUT FAILURERECEIVED FALILEDTOAUTENTICATE SEVERITY Config modify voip performance sip call init pm threshold lt 1 16 gt FAILEDTOCONNECT FAILEDTOVALIDATE TIMEOUT FAILURERECEIVED FALILEDTOAUTENTICATE SEVERITY delete voip performance sip call init pm threshold lt 2 16 gt Creates threshold table for SIP agent performance monitoring 2 16 table index FAILEDTOCONNECT threshold for FailedToConnect FAILEDTOVALIDATE threshold for FAILEDTO Validate TIMEOUT threshold for Time out FAILURERECEIVED threshold for FailureReceived FALILEDTOAUTENTICATE threshold for FailedTAuthorizstion SEVERITY pointer to alarm severity alarm Modifies threshold table for SIP agent performance monitoring 1 16 table index Deletes threshold table for SIP agent performance monitoring Configuring of PM Objects To configure VoIP SIP performance objects use the following commands See 10 10 2 Calculation Algorithms for PM Objects for information on the PM object indexes Command Mode Function create voip performance sip agent pm object NDEX Config Creates SIP agent performance monitoring lock I unlock lock I unlock 0 96 0 1 1 16 INDEX object index physical inde
29. Change History 5 Update 12 12 2008 System Access 3 Chapter updated System Basic Configuration 4 Automatic S APS upgrade added Invalid commands deleted Commands added changed Alarms 6 New show command added OLT Equipment 7 New show commands added ONU Equipment 9 Create ONU command changed invalid command deleted Performance Monitoring 10 10 Calculation algorithms of PM objects added Commands added changed Payload Counters 10 11 Commands modified Voice over IP 12 Section PM changed Commands added changed Bridges 14 Tagging rules and enhanced tagging profile added Quality of Service QoS 17 Invalid commands deleted DHCP and PPPoE 18 Command changed IP Anti Spoofing 23 New show command added 4 Update 13 10 2008 3 Update 10 06 2008 Id 0900d8058025f61f 15 Change History Operation Manual CLI 2 Update 17 04 2008 1 Update 31 01 2008 Initial release 21 12 2007 16 Id 0900d8058025f61f Operation Manual CLI Introduction 1 1 1 2 1 3 Introduction The hiX 5750 R2 0 provides a series of CLI Command Line Interface commands for configuring and managing the NE from local or remote place by a console terminal that is installed on PC or workstation This user manual explains how to access the CLI and how to use it to configure the NE hiX 5750 R2 0 Related commands are gro
30. Examples Command Mode Function show upgrade Privileged Displays upgrade information Config Displays upgrade information table of slot remote index ONT number or whole system Displays upgrade information for specified slot number Displays slot based mnemocodes of whole system Displays the S APS upgrade jobs of whole system Displays S APS server data known by upgrade Displays upgrade information timeout value SWITCH config show upgrade sapsserverinfo S APS server data known by upgrade S APS handling S APS server address S APS user name S APS password S APS path name S APS file name SWITCH config disabl 10 0 1 led 16 sff00009 KKKKK SAPS hiX5750R205 002 46 1d 0900d8058023 449 Operation Manual CLI System Basic Configuration SWITCH config show upgrade table file information table for whole system equipped slots Slot type of file file version size l MEC 09 stored load gpon r2 0 5 cxu f o 010 010 12976156 09 error log error tgz none 23499 09 configuration configuration tgz none 5952 09 label data inventory bin none 256 o S 13 stored load gpon r2 0 5 iu gpon o 006 006 0 13 error log error log none 16962 ee 7 7 a rd 17 stored load not available mnemo
31. Profile Number Id 0900d8058023fad7 Inner prio Out 151 MAC Operation Manual CLI Deleting the CoS mapping profile 2 SWITCH bridge no cosprofilemap 2 SWITCH bridge show cosprofilemap Profile Number Inner prio Out 13 4 Configuring of Enhanced MAC Modes The following commands configure the VLAN ID mapping table which determines the translation from a tagged VLAN to another in order to define rules of traffic aggregation security in the last mile and traffic shaping G If in an OLT running in enhanced MAC mode IU_GPON cards that were offline con figured start up the VLANs using this MAC mode will be sent to such IU_GPONs For online configuration the enhanced MAC mode must be enabled and the IU GPONs must be ready for service 13 4 1 N 1 Bridge Mode In an N 1 VLAN scenario several subscriber share one VLAN for one service The CoS classification depends on the 1p priority bits Use the following command to configure the enhanced MAC mode 1 Command Mode Function enhanced mode nto1 ChangeVlanPerC tag VLANID Bridge Adds or modifies an entry in the VLAN mapping table CHANGEDVID PRIOPROFILE MAC mode 1 N 1 changing VLAN per c tag VLANID VLAN ID customer c tag CHANGEDVID VLAN ID service s tag PRIOPROFILE index of priority mapping profile 13 4 2 1 1 VLAN Cross Connect Mode The c tag incoming from UNI side contains the service information That mean
32. Table 11 Main Commands of the Route Map Configuration Mode PPPoE Configuration Mode To change into PPPoE configuration mode execute the ip pppoe provider command on Configuration mode The system prompt changes from SWITCH config to SWITCH pppoe provider Command ip pppoe provider NAME Mode Config Function Changes into PPPoE configuration mode Id 0900d8058024303c 25 Using CLI Operation Manual CLI 26 2 3 2 4 2 4 1 Exiting a Command Mode The following commands to exit the current command mode are always available Command Function exit Closes current mode and returns to previous mode end Closes current mode and returns to User EXEC mode Table 12 Return Commands Useful Tips The following sections provide useful functions for user s convenience while using CLI commands Listing Available Commands Calling Command History e Using Abbreviation Using Privileged Mode Command Using Line Editing Keys Port Indices and Slot Assignments Listing Available Commands Enter a question mark on the particular command mode in order to display available commands used in this mode and the parameters following this commands Example for the Privileged exec mode SWITCH Exec commands clear Reset functions clock Manually set the system clock configure Enter configuration mode copy Copy from one file t
33. To modify the application service profile table entries use the following commands 142 1d 0900d8058023f697 Operation Manual CLI Voice over IP Mode Command Function modify voip sip appl service profile table entry direct connect uri NDEX LINE Config Modifies table entry direct connect uri INDEX index of profile LINE new direct connect URI modify voip sip appl service profile table entry conference factory uri INDEX LINE Modifies table entry service conference factory LINE new service conference factory modify voip sip appl service profile table entry bridge line agent uri INDEX LINE Modifies table entry bridge line agent uri LINE new direct connect URI To show the application service profile table use the following command Command Mode Function show vip sip appl service profile table Exec Shows the application service profile table Config 12 8 2 SIP Agent The VoIP SIP agent configuration data table contains the configuration attributes nec essary to establish communication for signaling between a SIP user agent and a SIP server Each entry may be referenced by one or more SIP user data entries Each entry is related to one or more TCP UDP configuration data entries One default profile always exists All table entries of one ONT card must use the same profile only one profile per ONT card possible Conf
34. To show VolP SIP performance data use the following commands Command Mode Function show voip performance sip agent pm current data table Exec Displays current data table for SIP agent PM eaa a a a Ont show voip performance sip agent pm history data table g Displays history data table for SIP agent PM show voip performance sip call init pm current data table Displays current data table for SIP call init monitoring show voip performance sip agent pm history data table Displays history data table for SIP call init monitoring 12 8 6 Checking the User Status Information Use the following commands to check information about a single SIP user POTS port Command Mode Function get voip sip user status port ADDRESS Exec Starts a request of the SIP user status attributes for the spec Config ified port ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port ONT ID port number POTS port number 1 to max show voip sip user status port ADDRESS Shows the attributes of operation state voice server status and SIP agent status for the specified port Use the following commands to check information about all SIP users POTS ports of an ONT Command Mode Function get voip sip user status onu ADDRESS Exec Starts a request of the SIP user status attributes for all user Config ports of specified ONT ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port ONT ID ONT slot ONT port show voip sip user status onu ADDRESS
35. VoIP CAST CONFIGURATION interface counter vlan address group mapping 2 1 20 1 1 none invalid 2 1 20 1 2 none invalid 2 1 20 1 3 none invalid 2 1 20 1 4 none invalid 2 1 20 1 none invalid 2 1 20 5 1 none invalid 2 1 24 2 1 none invalid 2 1 24 4 1 none invalid 2 1 24 4 2 none invalid 2 1 24 4 3 none invalid 2 1 24 4 4 none invalid 2 1 24 4 1 none invalid Id 0900d80580257cd9 97 Ports Operation Manual CLI PAYLOAD COUNTER NAMES 1 nn 2 wu 3 wee 4 wn 64 wn 10 11 1 2 Naming of Counter Groups Each counter group can be marked with a specific name Use the following command to configure names for counter groups Changes made by this command take effect immediately i e without the necessity of activation and they remain valid independently of executing a config load command Command Mode Function modify payload counter ADDRESS set config name Config Configures name for specified counter group 1 64 LINE ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port as specified with config load command 1 64 counter group LINE name for counter group max 24 characters Use this command without LINE option to delete the name of spec ified counter group Example Setting the name of counter group number 4 to name with spaces 24 characters including spaces SWITCH config modify payload counte
36. WORD soft reconfiguration inbound Router Starts storing updates for inbound soft reconfiguration Use the no parameter with this command to disable this function neighbor A B C D WORD strict capability match Router Closes the BGP connection if capability value does not com pletely match to remote peer Use the no parameter with this command to disable this function neighbor A B C D WORD dont capability negotiate Router Disables capability negotiation Use the no parameter with this command too enable capa bility negotiation neighbor A B C D WORD override capability Router Override capability negotiation result Use the no parameter with this command to disable this function neighbor A B C D WORD unsuppress map WORD Router Configures Route map to selectively unsuppress sup pressed routes WORD Name of route map 202 Id 0900d80580212815 Operation Manual CLI IP Routing 21 2 6 Redistribute Routing Information In order to to inject routes from another routing process into the BGP routing table use the following command Command Mode Function redistribute kernel connected static rip ospf Router Registers transmitted routing information from another router s table isis route map WORD Optional specify route to be redistibuted by route map reference WORD pointer to route map entries Use the no parameter with this c
37. lock I unlock 0 96 0 1 1 16 delete voip performance callctrl object NDEX Creates VoIP performance call control object INDEX object index lock unlock deactivates activates performance monitoring admin state 15min 24hrs 0 96 number of history entries configured for the PM object and the 15min interval 0 1 number of history entries configured for the PM object and the 24hrs interval 1 16 pointer to threshold object Modifies VoIP performance call control object Deletes VoIP performance call control object Verifying Call Control Configuration Data To show call control configuration data use the following commands Command Mode show voip performance callctrl object table Exec Conti show voip performance callctrl threshold table g Function Shows the whole call control object table Shows the whole call control threshold table 12 6 2 RTP Objects Configuring of RTP PM The table contains an entry for each RTP monitoring PM object related to a POTS PPTP supporting VoiP To configure RTP monitoring objects use the following commands 134 Id 0900d8058023f697 Operation Manual CLI Voice over IP Command Mode Function create voip performance rtpmon object NDEX lock I unlock lock unlock 0 96 0 1 lt 1 16 gt modify voip performance rtpmon object NDEX lock unlock
38. 1 1 255 last member query count default 2 1 65535 version 1 router time out default 400 on immediate leave on off default immediate leave off 1 16 provider index default 1 igmp host parameter lt 1 65535 gt 1 16 Sets host parameter 1 65535 unsolicited report interval default 10 1 16 provider index default 1 igmp provider 1 16 dotip 0 7 Config Modifies an IGMP provider priority dot1p QoS 1 16 provider index 0 7 priority index Verifying the Providers Command Mode Function show igmp provider Config show igmp version 1 16 show igmp query parameter 1 16 show igmp provider egress port list 1 16 show igmp host parameter 1 16 Displays a list of created IGMP providers Displays IGMP version currently running 1 16 provider index Displays query parameters 1 16 provider index default 1 Displays subscriber list per provider 1 16 provider index Displays host parameter 1 16 provider index default 1 Assigning of Provider to VLAN Use the following commands to assign a VLAN to the provider Id 0900d80580214302 187 IGMP Operation Manual CLI Command Mode Function igmp provider vlan 1 16 lt 1 4093 gt Config Connects IGMP provider to a VLAN 1 16 provider index 1 4093 VLAN ID of IGMP provider no ig
39. 1 10 alarm severity profile index modify clock sync waittime T ME Config Modifies clock sync waittime to restore TIME time to has expire before switch back to a higher clock Source after error condition unit is 100 ms show clock sync sources Config Displays all clock sync sources Id 0900d80580201aa1 55 Alarms Operation Manual CLI 6 Alarms The fault management system of the hiX 5750 R2 0 uses alarm profiles specifying alarm severities to inform the operator in case of system errors by SNMP traps It is possible to configure different levels of error checking according to the service type and port For information about how to set the alarm severity profile for a specific unit see the chapters describing the configuration of OLT cards ONUs and ports SEVERITY 6 1 Configuring an Alarm Severity Profile Prior use the show alarm id command to get information about alarm ID values see 6 2 Checking the Alarm Severity Configuration Command Mode Function al mgr set sev profile ALARM ID SEV1 SEV2 Config Sets all severities for the chosen alarm SEV3 SEV4 SEV5 SEV6 SEV7 SEV8 SEV9 ALARM ID alarm ID value SEV10 SEV1 SEV10 severity for profile 1 10 the first profile is default and cannot be overwritten severities values are 1 critical 2 major 3 minor 4 warning 5 cleared modify alarm severity ALARM_ID PROFILE_INDEX Modifies the index of the severity profile in severity pr
40. 12 6 4 12 7 12 7 1 12 7 2 12 7 3 12 7 4 12 8 12 8 1 12 8 2 12 8 3 12 8 4 12 8 5 12 8 6 12 8 7 13 13 1 13 2 13 3 13 4 13 4 1 13 4 2 Checking the XDSL Configuration of LRE Port 123 Verifying of the XDSL Databases 00000 ridar i rikta 124 DEET Gonflgllrati n sirena ban PERO tee e EE Saas 125 Voice over PPP eraa REENA ESAN RART E ADA 127 MOIPIPEOTIIBS x itkee pte hh Ga A e TIA LANE ES 127 RTP Real Time Transport Protocol Profile 00000 127 VoIP M dia Profle 223 uua eruca mem rines Gian Eaa 128 Checking the Media and RTP Profiles 20000000eeaee 129 Jodie 129 IP Host Configuration Table 222 sien m eee imer Re 129 Configuring the TCP UDP Port Table nananana uaaa 130 Checking the Configuration llli 131 VolP Configuration Data Table esee rb mee seppa beesi 131 Modifying the VoIP Configuration Data Table 5 131 Checking the VoIP Configuration Data Table 04 132 Voice CTP Connection Termination Point Table 132 Modifying the Voice CTP Table 000 cece eee eee is 132 Checking the Voice CTP Table 0 0 00 e eee eee 132 Line Status Table 2 sese eR nade ERIS E Ed nd EHI aba cease 132 Retrieving the Line Status 0 0 0 0 cece eee 132 Checking the Line Status 240 606 4000 eed m e em rizi 133 Performance Monitoring llle 133 Config
41. A B C D I A B C D MI any icmp Rule Rule Matches the IP protocol source destination IP address source destination IP address with mask any revoke the destination IP protocol classifier Matches the IP protocol source destination IP address source destination IP address with mask any source destination IP address any revoke the destination IP protocol classifier match ip A B C D A B C D M any A B C D I A B C D M I any icmp 0 255 Rule Configures the IP protocol source destination IP address source destination IP address with mask any source destination IP address 0 255 ICMP message type number any revoke the destination Ip address classifier 242 Id 0900d80580204604 Operation Manual CLI Rules Command Mode Function match ip A B C D I A B C D M I any A B C D I A B C D M any icmp lt 0 255 gt lt 0 255 gt Rule Configures the IP protocol source destination IP address source destination IP address with mask any source destination IP address 0 255 ICMP message type number 0 255 ICMP message code number any revoke the destination IP address classifier match ip A B C D A B C D M any A B C D I A B C D M I any tcp udp match ip A B C D A B C D M any A B C D I A B C D M any tcp udp lt 0 65535 gt any lt 0 65535 gt any Rule Rule Configures the IP protocol
42. ADDRESS Config Search for the specified ONU IDs on an interface used for displaying ONU IDs which are used on an interface free for displaying ONU IDs which are not used on an interface ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port ONU ID show gpon ont config ADDRESS Config Show a ONT configuration data ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port ONU ID show onu flags ADDRESS Config Shows the flags for an ONU entry ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port ONU ID show gpon unknown onus Config Shows all unknown ONUs show onu table ADDRESS Config Displays the ONU table of system ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port ONU ID show onu ONUINDEX mac table Bridge Shows ONU specific information of MAC address table ONUINDEX address OLT slot GPON port ONU ID show onu ONUINDEX mac table vlan VLANID Shows ONU specific information of MAC address table seg mented per port VLANID show only MAC addresses in one VLAN show ponpptp ont table list Config Displays PON interface on ONT ONU ADDRESS table table with config data list list ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port ONU ID show table onu physical container ADDRESS Config Displays SNMP table for a specified ONU ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port ONU ID show table onu physical entity ADDRESS Config Displays SNMP table for a specified ONU ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port ONU ID show table onu physical rack ADDRESS Config Displays SNMP table for a specified ONU ADDRESS OLT
43. G 992 5 Ext Up ADSL2 POTS non overlapped adsl2plus isdn G 992 5 ADSL2 ISDN non overlapped vdsl2 region a G 993 2 VDSL2 non overlapped Region A vdsl2 region b G 993 2 VDSL2 non overlapped Region B vdsl2 region c G 993 2 VDSL2 non overlapped Region C Id 0900d80580256ef1 109 XDSL Operation Manual CLI Command Mode Function xdsl line config profile PROFILE band plan number itu annexa m1 eu32 itu annexa m9 eu64 itu annexa m1 adlu32 itu annexa m9 adlu64 997 m1c a 7 997 m1x m 8 997 m1x m 997 m2x m 8 997 m2x a 997 m2x m 998 m1x a 998 m1x b 998 m1x nusO 998 m2x a 998 m2x m 998 m2x m17 998 m2x b 998 m2x b17 998 m2x nusO 998 m2x nusO17 itu annexc itu annexc 8k 997e30 m2x nusO itu annexc 1m1 itu annexc 8k 1m1 998e17 m2x a 998e17 m2x nusO anfp calO long anfp cal0 medium anfp calO short anfp cal0e short korea fttcab korea fttcab 8k hanaro fttcab 8k itu annexc fttex a itu annexc fttex m itu annexc fttcab a itu annexc fttcab a 8k itu annexc fttcab m itu annexc fttcab m 8k itu annexa m10 eu128 annexa m1 eu32 annexa m2 eu36 annexa m3 eu40 annexa m4 eu44 annexa m5 eu48 annexa m6 eu52 annexa m7 eu56 annexa m8 eu60 annexa m9 eu64 annexa eu128 annexa m1 adlu32 annexa m2 adlu36 annexa m3 adlu40 annexa m4 adlu44 annexa m5 adlu48 annexa m6 adlu52 annexa m7 adlu56 annexa m8 adlu60 annexa m9 adlu64 annexa adl
44. Initiates the configuration of switch route map Enters into Config route map mode router Enters into Router configuration mode snmp Configures SNMP syslog Configures syslog time zone Configures time zone Table 4 Main Commands of Configuration Mode 2 2 4 Rule Configuration Mode To enter into Rule configuration mode the rule create command is used in Configura tion mode The system prompt changes from SWITCH config to SWITCH config rule name Command Mode Function rule NAME create Config Changes from Configuration into Rule configuration mode In Rule configuration mode it is possible to configure the condition and operational method for the packets which rule function is applied to Table 5 shows a couple of important main commands of Rule configuration mode Command Function apply Configures rule and applies it to the GPON OLT mac Configures the packet condition by MAC address match Configures operational condition which meets the packet condition no match Configures the operational condition for the packet which does not meet the packet condition port Configures the packet condition with port number prio Configures the priority for rule Table 5 Main Commands of Rule Configuration 22 d 0900d8058024303c Operation Manual CLI Using CLI 2 2 5 2 2 6 2 2 7 DHCP Configuration Mode To enter into DHCP configuration
45. Rules Command Mode Function tagging single double Rule Sets tagging mode of a rule single single tagged traffic double double tagged traffic 25 4 Setting of Priority To configure the priority of rule use the following command If multiple rules match the same packets the rule with the higher priority will be processed first Command Mode Function prio lt 0 7 gt Rule Configure the priority for the new rule 0 7 enter a priority value default is 0 25 5 Configuring of Matches and Actions 25 5 1 Matches Configure the policy to adjust what properties should be analyzed within incoming packets Some rule types support combinations of two or more rule matches Such rules only match if all of their matches are true Command Mode Function iu slot SLOT any Rule Configures IU physical slot number SLOT enter slot number any revokes this configuration match exact exclude Rule Configures the granulation of match action exact default matches exactly the given value s exclude matches all values except given value s This command is optional because hiX 5750 R2 0 only supports match exact and uses this as default match port PORT cpu any Rule Matches a CXU uplink or CXU or IU subscriber port PORT enter the CXU or IU port number cpu CXU port any revoke the PORT classifier
46. addedenabled off addedenabled Off Default portset bitmask 0x3f Current portset bitmask 0x3f SWITCH bridge stp port del 9 3 SWITCH bridge show stp port addedenabled On addedenabled On addedenabled On addedenabled Off addedenabled Off SWITCH bridge Configuring the STP Deciding the Root Switch To establish STP RSTP or MSTP function first of all the root switch for MSTP the IST root switch should be decided Unless otherwise configured the switch with the lowest bridge ID will be decided as the root switch However the operator can determine the Id 0900d80580203028 223 Spanning Tree Operation Manual CLI root switch by configuring the priority The switch with the lowest priority operates as root switch Use the following command to change the switch priority Command Mode Function stp mst priority MSTID_RANGE lt 0 61440 gt Bridge Configures the priority of the switch MSTID_RANGE instance number 0 61440 priority value in steps of 4096 default 32768 no stp mst priority MSTID RANGE Clears the Priority of the switch Example SWITCH bridge stp mst priority 0 8192 SWITCH bridge show stp mst 0 all CST Root 2000 080006261 d2fl ST Root 2000 080006261 d2f max age 20 s hello time 4 s forward delay 15 s max hops 20 nx S SSeS oseH5e MST00 vlans 51 4096 bridge id 2000 080006261d2f d
47. dence of the internal packet queues The higher the weight value the higher the scheduling precedence of this queue Each of the scheduling algorithms can be assigned separately to uplink as well as downlink interface types for both downstream and upstream traffic flow This means that each interface type can operate in another scheduling mode Id 0900d8058025faf9 173 Quality of Service QoS Operation Manual CLI 17 1 fi For information about how to configure QoS on ONUs see 10 3 Traffic Manage ment Configuring the Dot1p Priority to Queue Mapping This configuration specifies the queues storing packets with a certain 1p priority In order to create the QoS map and to classify the rules of queueing use the following commands in Configuration mode Command Mode Function qos map 0 7 be bg spare ee cl video voice ctrl 0 7 Config Priority to queue number mapping 0 7 priority value acc to 1p Default queue mappings 0 lowest best effort be 1 background bg space space excellent effort ee controlled load cl video video voice voice highest network control ctrl 0 7 queue number NOJA UON 17 2 Configuring the Scheduling Method The hiX 5750 R2 0 supports different scheduling methods that can be assigned to dif ferent interface modes Command Mode Function qos scheduling mode uplink_cards downlink_cards all Config De
48. frequencies from the VDSL2 band Annex A specifies bandplans for the North American region and enables VDSL2 to be deployed with POTS service Annex B specifies band plans for Europe and enables VDSL2 deployment with underlying POTS and ISDN ser vices Annex C describes VDSL2 found primarily in Japan i A mix of enabled VDSL and ADSL standards or ADSL POTS and ISDN standards will be rejected by the NE fi Refer to the current release notes for information about supported xDSL bandplans and profiles Note that the possibility of settings can change with new firmware updates for the DSL chipset 1d 0900d80580256ef1 Operation Manual CLI XDSL The HiX 5709 003 MDU is prepared to provide via its xDSL service boards the following bandplans and profiles Profiles 8b 12a 17a USO 17b 30a SB xDSL12 only Band plan 998 e VDSL2 over ISDN PSD B8 6 998 M2x B B8 8 998E17 M2x NUSO B8 12 998ADE17 M2x B B8 15 998ADE30 M2x NUSO M e VDSL2 over POTS PSD B8 4 998 M2x A B8 11 998ADE17 M2x A Command Mode Function xdsl line config profile PROFILE use profile number profile8a profile8b profile8c profile8d I profile 12a profile12b profile17a profile 17b profile30a Bridge Selects VDSL2 profile which should be used for basic parameter config uration on xDSL line PROFILE enter the profile name profile8a 8A 8 8 MHz bandwidth 2048 tones 17 5 dBm line power profile8
49. in out soft in Privileged Reconfigures information about BGP neighbor router out reset a BGP connection for all peers A B C D specifies the address of the BGP route to be cleared as number AS number for which all routes will be cleared in incoming advertised routes will be cleared out outgoing advertised routes will be cleared soft both incoming and outgoing routes will be cleared 198 Id 0900d80580212815 Operation Manual CLI IP Routing 21 2 4 Managing BGP Peer Groups A BGP peer group is a group of BGP neighbors that share the same update policies Members of a peer group inherit all of the configuration options of the peer group A peer group facilitates the updates of various policies such as distribute and filter lists Use the following commands to create a peer group and to add neighbors to this group Command Mode Function neighbor WORD peer group Router Creates a peer group WORD name of the peer group Use the no parameter with this command to disable this func tion neighbor A B C D peer group WORD Adds a neighbor to an existing peer group A B C D address of the BGP neighbor in IPv4 format WORD name of an existing peer group Use the no parameter with this command to disable this func tion 21 2 5 Extended Neighbor Commands Unless otherwise noted common parameters of all following commands are A B C D IPv4 address of BGP neighbo
50. lt 1 255 gt src A B C D Config Establishes a static route A B C D destination IP prefix A B C D or M destination IP prefix mask A B C D forwarding router s IP address INTERFACE interface 1 255 administrative distance src A B C D binding source IP address Use the no parameter with this command to remove the speci fied static route from the routing table Each dynamic routing protocol has a default administrative distance When there are two or more routes to the same destination the router uses the administrative distance to decide which routing protocol or static route to trust more When a static route is entered that is the same as a dynamic route it will be used over the dynamic route Default administrative distances are e g connected interface 0 static route 1 RIP 120 OSPF 110 and IS IS 110 The lower the number the more trustworthy the type of route is Determine the administrative distance of a static route higher than that of the dynamic protocol to allow that the static route can be overrode by information from a dynamic routing protocol Example of configuring static routes to reach three destinations which are not directly connected SWITCH config ip route SWITCH config ip route 200 SWITCH config ip route 00 0 24 10 1 1 2 0 24 20 1 1 2 6 1 0 24 30 1 1 2 72 There is a special kind of static route called a default
51. m sbxdsl 12 elm sbxdsl 16 elm sbxdsl 16p el m sbxdsl 16p sl el m ubgpon 2512 el m ubgpon catv e locked unlocked mdu card delete ADDRESS ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port ONU ID ONU slot m sb 8p4ge e service board with 8xPOTS and 4x GE electric front access m_sb_24p e service board with 24x POTS front access m sbxdsl 12 e service board with 12x xDSL front access m sbxdsl 16 e service board with 16x xDSL front access sbxdsl 16p e service board with 16x xDSL and splitter Annex A POTS VDSL2 front access sbxdsl 16p sl e service board with 16x xDSL for splitter less applications ADSL Annex A POTS VDSL2 Region B front access m ubgpon 2512 e GPON uplink board infrastructure and cascading interfaces front access m ubgpon catv e GPON uplink board infrastructure and cascading interfaces CATV interface front access locked set adminstate to locked unlocked set adminstate to unlocked Creates a new MDU 1 32 MDU number GPON PORT enter GPON port number ONU ID enter ONU ID number MDU SLOT enter MDU SLOT number Deletes a card ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port ONU ID ONU slot 9 15 2 Changing the Admin State Command Mode Function mdu card adminstate ADDRESS locked unlocked Config Changes the adminstate of a specified MDU ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port ONU ID ONU slot locked set adminstate to locked unlocked set adminstate to unlocked 9 15 3
52. match ingress slot PORT any default Rule Matches one IU slot number PORT enter logical IU slot number any revoke the PORT classifier default set all IU slots to default upstream match ingress port PORT any default Rule Matches one CXU uplink port PORT enter the uplink port number any match any uplink port ignore default set all IU slots to default upstream match ingress uport map B TMASK any default Rule Matches user port bit mask BITMASK bitmask value max 32 bits any revoke the PORT classifier default set all IU slots to default upstream match egress uport USERPORT any Rule Matches the BCMX user port USERPORT user port number any revoke this number Id 0900d80580204604 241 Rules Operation Manual CLI Command Mode Function match vlan VLAN I any MASK Rule Matches a VLAN VLAN enter a VLAN number any revoke the VLAN classifier MASK VLAN mask match inner vlan VLAN I any MASK Rule Matches an inner VLAN VLAN enter a VLAN number any revoke the VLAN classifier MASK VLAN mask match dscp DSCP any Rule Matches a DSCP value DSCP enter a DSCP value 0 to 63 any revoke the DSCP classifier match cos 0 7 any Rule Matches the IEEE 802 1p priority 0 7 enter a 1priority value any revoke the 1priority classifier match inne
53. no ip dhcp option82 remote id Disables the configuration of remote ID Enter the command below to display the remote ID Command Mode Function show ip dhcp remote id system remote id Config Displays the specified DHCP remote ID 18 4 3 Setting the Circuit ID Format To set and verify the circuit ID format use the following commands Command Mode Function circuitid format STRING Bridge Sets the default format string for circuit IDs Format string describer replacement N gt hostname S gt slot P gt port R gt VLAN T gt line type DSL V gt VCC ID p gt VPI c gt VCI B gt bridgeport not e g iuslot b gt unique bridgeport ID Separator space Enter the command below to display the default format string Command Mode Function show circuitid format Bridge Displays the default format string for circuit IDs 18 4 4 VLAN Handling depending on Circuit ID To add delete or modify VLAN depending circuit ID part use the following commands 180 Id 0900d8058025c93a Operation Manual CLI DHCP and PPPoE Command Mode Function ip dhcp circuitid2 BRIDGEPORTINDEX all lt 2 4094 gt Config Adds VLAN depending circuit ID part CIRCUITID BRIDGEPORTINDEX bridge port index or IU sloV GPON link ONU ID ONU slot ONU port all all bridgeports that currently exi
54. the configurations for all routers on the network have compatible values The Interfaces configuration mode is entered with the interface FNAME command in the configuration mode The name of the interface to be configured must be specified e Circuit Type and Summary Address Message Intervals and Attributes Metrics Mesh Groups Authentication Password Id 0900d80580212815 217 IP Routing Operation Manual CLI Circuit Type and Summary Address The level of adjacencies formed on the interface can be specified with circuit type command The interface can be configured to form Level 1 and Level 2 adjacencies if the routing instance supports both levels By default the IS IS circuit type is the same as the is type of the routing instance Command Mode Function isis circuit type level 1 level 1 2 level 2 only Config Configures circuit type type of adjacency desired for neighbors on Interface the specified interface level 1 Level 1 only adjacencies are formed level 1 2 Level 1 2 adjacencies are formed this is the default circuit typ level 2 only Level 2 only adjacencies are formed i On the point to point interface IS IS Hello will be sent regardless of the circuit type Message Intervals and Attributes The average time between periodic PDU transmissions can be set and used in conjunction with a multiplier in order to control the actual value of holding time in the PDUs transmitted by the
55. 0 over serial console port Atinitial startup the hiX 5750 R2 0 is configured with standard features and default values As the NE s IP address depends on operator s network manage ment concept there is no IP assigned to the system for this purpose Hence if the system has booted successfully for the first time the management channel for both inband and outband must be configured on this way in order to ensure that an IP connection can be established between an NMS and the NE e For any reason a restore of NE factory defaults was initiated Figure 2 Serial Console Cable Wiring and Signal Assignments Id 0900d8058025feb5 Operation Manual CLI System Access 3 2 2 e Run a VT terminal emulation software e g HyperTerminal with the attributes 38400 8 N 1 no flow control When the NE is switched on the CXU is starting up and the terminal program displays automatically the login prompt SWITCH login Login as described in Chapter 3 3 System Login Configure the outband see Chapter 3 2 2 Configuring the Outband Interface Configure the inband see Chapter 3 2 3 Configuring the Inband Management Channel Configuring the Outband Interface To communicate with the NE over LCT port on CXU after login configure an outband interface as follows 1 Configure the management interface and a default gateway See the Chapters 15 1 Enabling of an Interface 15 2 Assigning an IP Address to the Interface and 21 1
56. 0000 AN_GPON 5 3 Configuring the Time Zone Time Country City Time Country City Time Country City Zone Zone Zone GMT 12 Eniwetok GMT 3 Rio De Janeiro GMT 6 Rangoon GMT 11 Samoa GMT 2 Maryland GMT 7 Singapore GMT 10 Hawaii Honolulu GMT 1 Azores GMT 8 Hong Kong Table 16 World Time Zones 54 Id 0900d80580201aa1 Operation Manual CLI System Properties Time Country City Time Country City Time Country City Zone Zone Zone GMT 9 Alaska GMT 0 London Lisbon GMT 9 Seoul Tokyo GMT 8 LA Seattle GMT 1 Berlin Rome GMT 10 Sydney GMT 7 Denver GMT 2 Cairo Athens GMT 11 Okhotsk GMT 6 Chicago Dallas GMT 3 Moscow GMT 12 Wellington GMT 5 New York Miami GMT 4 Teheran GMT 4 George Town GMT 5 New Delhi Table 16 World Time Zones Cont Command Mode Function time zone TIMEZONE Config Sets the time zone TIMEZONE GMT GMT 0 GMT 1 GMT 12 GMT 0 GMT 1 GMT 12 GMTO Greenwich UCT UTC Universal show time zone Privileged Displays all time zones Config 5 4 Synchronizing the Clock Index Priority Clock Source ETSI Clock Source ANSI 1 High T3 input at PM 1 DS1 interface 1 at PM 3 2 Internal clock generator DS1 interface 2 at PM 3 3 Internal clock generator Table 17 Clock Source Indexes Command Mode Function modify clock sync source NDEX 1 10 Config Modifies configuration of clock sync source INDEX clock source index
57. 1 16 pointer to threshold object Modifies VoIP performance MGC monitoring object Deletes VoIP performance MGC monitoring object Configuring of MGC Thresholds The table entries are thresholds for Call Control performance monitoring To configure MGC thresholds use the following commands Id 0900d8058023f697 137 Voice over IP Operation Manual CLI Command Mode Function create voip performance mgcmon threshold lt 2 16 gt PROTERRORS TRANSPLOSS SEVPTR Config modify voip performance mgcmon threshold lt 1 16 gt PROTERRORS TRANSPLOSS SEVPTR delete voip performance mgcmon threshold 2 16 Creates VoIP performance MGC monitoring threshold object 2 16 table index PROTERRORS threshold for protocol errors TRANSPLOSS threshold for transport losses SEVPTR pointer to alarm severity profile Modifies VoIP performance MGC monitoring threshold table 1 16 table index Modifies VoIP performance MGC monitoring threshold table Verifying the MGC PM Configuration To show MGC configuration data use the following commands Command Mode Function show voip performance mgcmon object table Exec Shows the whole MGC monitoring object table Config show voip performance mgcmon object table index NDEX show voip performance mgcmon threshold table Shows the MGC monitoring object table INDEX physical index of the ONT
58. 51 43 Jun 13 2 51 45 system system system system savecf savecf ERROR ERROR ERROR ERROR g write g done ip 10 2 30 19 path GPON 1loads gpon 1 account ftpuser ftpuserl swal vlan get pvid port 2 data swal vlan get pvid port 3 data swal vlan get pvid port 4 data swal vlan get pvid port 5 data backup w GPON_1 config auto backup ftp interval 24 GPON_1 config auto backup ftp start time 800 GPON_1 config show auto backup current time Fri Jun 13 11 52 49 2008 local backup current time automatic write of local backup enabled backup up to data no ocal automatic write after remote backup 24 minut last backup Fri Jun 13 11 51 45 2008 es nabled save of backup on FTP server backup on FTP server up to data no backup period start FTP server I path on FTP server time 13 24 hours 20 00 P address FTP account username f FTP account password next backup Fri Jun 13 13 20 00 2008 42 Success number of files on FTP server 10 2 30 tpuseri1 KKKKKKK Id last backup Fri Jun 13 11 51 46 2008 last FTP access result 5 19 GPON 1oads gpon 1 0900d8058023 449 not not not not found found found found Operation Manual CLI System Basic Configuration 3 Refresh file table GPON_1 config auto backup ftp refresh file tabl GPON_1 config sh
59. CLI Ports 10 11 1 5 Mapping VLAN to Counter The following requirements must be fulfilled in order to use counters for a certain VLAN traffic 1 The enhanced MAC mode is set for OLT s VLAN operation 2 VLANFLAG is set true for the addressed ports In case of former MAC mode and VID mode or if the VLANFLAG is set to false the whole interface traffic will be always counted in the first counter of group i Note that the configured relation between VLAN and counter is valid for all counter groups of the chosen GPON link Use the following commands to allocate payload counters for VLAN related services Command Mode Function modify payload counter OLTADDRESS set vlan 1 8 lt 1 4094 gt Example SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH PAYLOAI D counter co y AU FWN S modify payload counter OLTADDRESS clear vlan 1 8 config config config config config config config Config Modifies the configuration for counter assigned to VLAN OLTADDRESS OLT slot GPON port 1 8 counter in group 1 4094 VLAN ID modify payload counter modify payload counter modify payload counter modify payload counter modify payload counter modify payload counter G 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 set set set set set set vlan vlan vlan vlan vlan vlan show payload counte
60. Command Mode Function show voip sip dial plan profile table Exec Shows the network dial plan profile table Config Dial Plan Token Format fi Configuring of dial plan token is only possible for the ONTs G25A and G25E The format of dial plan is selected to 1 H 248 e Valid characters are 0 1 2 3 9 X andT All the dial plan profiles will be concatenated at the creation sequence instead of at alphabet sequence The dial plan begins with and ends with Each item in the dial plan is delimited by I e g 12341 1x T 140 1d 0900d8058023f697 Operation Manual CLI Voice over IP Adial plan completes by integrating several separate dial plan token A dial plan token is a component of the whole dial plan The length of dial plan token is limited to 28 Byte For example with the token Token 1 xx Xx x 1 XXx X xx Token 2 xx x dt 31 5o0o0oxxxxl Token 3 xx l xx l xx 1 001x T the whole dial plan forms xxl 5oc x xx x odtr xx x X 31 XXXXXXXX XX I XX XXx I 0011x T e The two POTS ports of ONT share one dial plan After lock unlock the ONT the new dial plan takes effect The ONT uses its default dial plan before any other dial plan is configured The current default dial plan is xxl 5oc x xx x odt xx x XH 50000oxxISodtlibodgtI iod Ht001 Ix T e Configure empty dial plan to the ONT will not replace the current dial p
61. Controlling the redistribution of routes between two domains is possible by using the route map command Id 0900d80580212815 209 IP Routing Operation Manual CLI Command Mode Function route map WORD deny permit lt 1 65535 gt Config Creates route map and sets permission WORD map name 1 65535 index One or more match and set commands typically follow route map command If there are no match commands then everything matches If there are no set commands nothing is done Therefore at least one match or set command is needed To define conditions for redistributing routes from a source route entry into the RIP tables perform at least one of the following tasks in route map configuration mode Command Mode Function match interface FNAME Route map Transmits information to only specified interface IFNAME interface name match ip address prefix list WORD Route map Matchs if route destination is permitted by access list Transmits infor mation to only neighbor router in list WORD name prefix list Use the no parameter with this command to disable this match match metric lt 0 4294967295 gt Route map Transmits information matched with specified metric 1 16 Enter a valid metric value Use the no parameter with this command to disable this match set ip next hop A B C D Route map Specifies where the packets that pass the match criteria are output A B C D IP address of next
62. D Mode Configures link discovery remote shelf IP address for a Bridge port link discovery slot PORTS RMSLOT port link discovery port PORTS RMPORT port link discovery mode PORTS none manual automatic Function specified port PORTS port number OLT slot OLT port A B C D remote chassis IP address Configures link discovery slot value on remote shelf for a specified port RMSLOT remote slot number Configures link discovery port value on remote shelf for a specified port RMPORT remote port number Configures link discovery link discovery mode value for a specified port none manual automatic Set the mode 10 5 E1 DS1 Port Configuration and Test The NE automatically creates the entries for each E1 DS1 interface with default settings The following commands can be used to modify these E1 DS1 interface settings 86 d 0900d80580257cd9 Operation Manual CLI Ports Command Mode Function modify e1 config local remote ADDRESS normal crc unframed hdb3 ami no payload line none bit message loop local through disabled enabled modify ds1 config local remote ADDRESS esf d4 jbzs b8zs zbtsi no payload line none robbedt message loop I local through ansi att none Config Config Modifies E1 interface configuration local local interface re
63. Function modify voip sip agent config data table proxy ip address INDEX LINE Config Modifies an IP address in the agent configuration data table INDEX profile index LINE IP address or URI of the SIP proxy server for SIP signaling messages modify voip sip agent config data table outband proxy ip address NDEX LINE Modifies an IP address in the agent configuration data table LINE IP address or URI of the SIP outband proxy server modify voip sip agent config data table primary sip dns NDEX LINE Config Modifies an IP address in the agent configuration data table LINE IP address of the SIP primary DNS If this value is zero the Primary SIP DNS should not be used modify voip sip agent config data table secondary sip dns INDEX LINE modify voip sip agent config data table primary sip dns addr NDEX A B C D Modifies an IP address in the agent configuration data table LINE IP address of the SIP secondary DNS If this value is zero the Secondary SIP DNS should not be used Config Modifies an IP address in the agent configuration data table A B C D IP address of the SIP primary DNS modify voip sip agent config data table secondary sip dns addr NDEX A B C D Modifies an IP address in the agent configuration data table A B C D IP address of the SIP secondary DNS modify voip sip agent config data table host part uri NDEX LINE modify voip sip agent config
64. ID 128 192 256 AES encryption with 128 192 256 bit i The AES key length is fixed to 128 Bit 1 144 time for periodical key switchover in 5 min steps from 5 min to 37 h modify onu userdata ADDRESS LINE Config Modifies the user data of the specified ONU ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port ONU ID LINE userdata max 80 characters 9 4 Deleting an ONU Command Mode Function delete onu ADDRESS Config Deletes specified entry ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port ONU ID 68 d 0900d80580257da6 Operation Manual CLI ONU Equipment 9 5 Getting List of Unknown ONTs Command Mode Function gpon get unknown onu list ADDRESS Config Gets the current list of unknown ONTs at a GPON link ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port 9 6 Replacing an ONU The ONU replacement bases on commands described in other sections of this docu ment It is mentioned here also as example for these commands 1 Verifying the Alarm List and the Unknown ONU List The example below shows alarms indicated by an unknown ONU The registration ID of an unknown ONU will be displayed only if there is at least one ONU configured in discover mode on the GPON link The registration ID is dis played as long as the ONU is not configured SWITCH config show alarm list Alarm List ID Severity Prof Time and Date rep src type Idx 80 critical 01 Mon 14 Jul 2008 13 34 34 SyncSource 01 gponSyncClockSourc
65. IS on the interface If the PDUs are to be padded to the full MTU of the circuit the command isis hello padding is specified CSNPs are transmitted p eriodically on the circuit The interval between periodic CSNP transmissions can be changed Command Mode Function isis hello interval minimal lt 1 65535 gt level 1 Config Specify the length of time in seconds between hello packets the Interface router sends on the specified interface The Hello interval is calculated level 2 dm aus by dividing by the hello multiplier minimal Holdtime 1 second interval depends on multiplier 1 65535 Hello interval value level 1 Specify hello interval for level 1 IIHs level 2 Specify hello interval for level 2 IIHs The no parameter with this command sets the default value 10 sec for both level 1 and level 2 isis hello multiplier lt 3 1000 gt level 1 level 2 Config Sets multiplier for Hello holding time Interface 3 1000 Hello multiplier value level 1 Specify hello multiplier for level 1 IIHs level 2 Specify hello multiplier for level 2 IIHs The no parameter sets the default value 3 to both level 1 and level 2 isis hello padding Config Adds padding to IS IS hello packets IS IS pads the Hello packet by Interface default to notice neighbors the supported MTU size The no parameter disable the padding isis csnp interval 0 65535 level 1 level 2 Config Sets CSNP interval This parameter is o
66. Ire PORT ADDRESS xdsl atm vcctp info show Ire PORT ADDRESS xdsl atm vcctp overview Mode Function Privileged Shows VCC TP detailed information Global PORT ADDRESS enter slot port ONU ID ONT slot Bri ridge Shows VCC TP information PORT ADDRESS enter slot port ONU ID ONT slot 11 6 3 Checking the XDSL Configuration of LRE Port Command Mode Function show Ire PORT ADDRESS xdsl line config info Privieged Shows xDSL line configuration information for a Global specified port Bridge PORT ADDRESS slot port ONU ID ONT slot show Ire PORT ADDRESS xdsl line table Shows xDSL line status information PORT ADDRESS enter slot port ONU ID ONT slot show Ire PORT ADDRESS xdsl line conf Shows line table configuration PORT ADDRESS enter slot port ONU ID ONT slot show Ire PORTS xdsl band table Privileged Show xDSL line band table Config PORTS enter slot port ONU ID ONT slot Bridge Id 0900d80580256ef1 123 XDSL Operation Manual CLI Command Mode Function show Ire PORTS xdsl chan table Privileged Shows xDSL channel status information Config PORTS enter slot port ONU ID ONT slot Bridge show Ire PORTS xdsl chan config info i Shows LRE port xDSL channel config profile information PORTS enter slot port ONU ID ONT slot show Ire PORT ADDRESS xdsl chan table Shows xDSL channel status information PORT ADDRESS enter slot port ONU ID ONT slot show I
67. Ire PORT ADDRESS xdsl delt hlin allocation downstream upstream lt 1 4096 gt lt 1 4096 gt Id 0900d80580256ef1 Command Mode Function Ire PORTS xdsl delt force inhibit Privieged Enables disables DELT mode on selected ports Global PORTS slot port ONU ID ONT slot Bridge force force loop diagnostics by xTU C inhibit stop loop diagnostics process show Ire PORT ADDRESS xdsl delt status Shows information about port DELT status PORT ADDRESS enter slot port ONU ID ONT slot show Ire PORT ADDRESS xdsl delt all downstream Shows all subcarrier group values of one port for down upstream 1 4096 lt 1 4096 gt stream upstream direction PORT ADDRESS enter slot port ONU ID ONT slot 1 4096 start subcarrier group press ENTER to show all 1 4096 end subcarrier group press ENTER to show only one show Ire PORT ADDRESS xdsl delt bit allocation Privieged Shows Bit allocation table for different subcarriers of one downstream upstream 1 4096 lt 1 4096 gt Global port for downstream upstream direction Bridge PORT ADDRESS enter slot port ONU ID ONT slot 1 4096 start subcarrier press ENTER to show all 1 4096 end subcarrier press ENTER to show only one Shows Bit allocation table for different subcarriers of one port for downstream upstream direction PORT ADDRESS enter slot port ONU ID ONT slot 1 4096 start subcarrier press ENTER to show all 1 4096
68. Manual CLI Command Mode Function xdsl line config profile PROFILE up pboa us1 I us21 Bridge Configures the value A in the reference PSD on xDSL line us3 us4 us5 lt 4000 8095 gt PSDREF f A B sqrt f The value is given for each US band except USO Each single value consists of 2 octets First couple of octets rep resenting the value for band US1 Second for band US2 third for US3 fourth for US4 and the last couple represent the value for US5 All values can be set but only if the respective band is realy in use the values will be taken otherwise NE will ignore the settings The simul taneous setting of values of UPBOA 40 dBm Hz and UPBOB 0 dBm Hz for a band shall cause UPBO to be disabled This are the default setting for all band s PROFILE enter the profile name us1 UPBOA for US1 band us2 UPBOA for US2 band us3 UPBOA for US3 band us4 UPBOA for US4 band us5 UPBOA for US5 band 4000 8095 value in 0 01 dBm Hz 40 to 80 95 xdsl line config profile PROFILE up pbob us1 us21 Bridge Configures the value B in the reference PSD on xDSL line us3 us4 us5 lt 0 4095 gt PSDREF f A B sqrt f The value is given for each US band except USO Each single value consists of 2 octets First couple of octets rep resenting the value band US1 Second for band US2 third for US3 fourth for US4 and the last couple represent the value for US5 All values can be set but only if t
69. Non FEC supporting ONUs ignore the command ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port ONU ID Id 0900d80580257cd9 83 Ports Operation Manual CLI 10 3 Traffic Management 10 3 1 Priority Mapping One mapper for 802 1p priority queues is associated with one physical ONT user inter face or with an internal IP interface There is a restriction in the priority mapper configu ration Upstream the incoming tagged packets are mapped to GEM ports with GEM Port ID values that differ in the last 0 1 2 or 3 LSB depending on ONT type A priority mapper serves a group of 1 2 4 or 8 consecutive GEM Port ID values Command Mode Function prio map range 1121418 Bridge Configures maximum numbers of GEM ports each priomapper can z serve modify priosmap range 1121418 1 2 4 8 max number is 1 8 priomapper eth xdsl INTERFACE modify 0 8 0 8 Bridge Configures 1p mapping lt 0 8 gt lt 0 8 gt lt 0 8 gt lt 0 8 gt lt 0 8 gt lt 0 8 gt eth Ethernet port xdsl xDSL port modify priomapper eth xdsl INTERFACE 0 8 0 8 INTERFACE OLT slot OLT port ONU ID ONU slot ONU port SUED ste Be Sede Rose SEHE SUP 1 8 select index of GEM port for 1p priority O 1 8 select index of GEM port for 1p priority 1 1 8 select index of GEM port for 1p priority 2 1 8 select index of GEM port for 1p priority 3 1 8 select index of GEM port for 1p priority 4 1 8 select index of GEM port for 1p prior
70. PROFILE enter the profile name Bridge 11 3 Notch Profile The VDSL spectrum covers a number of Handheld Amateur Radio HAM radio bands To avoid interference it is necessary to introduce power control notching in one or more of these bands The hiX 5750 R2 0 does not use RFI band masks This feature is sup ported by the notch profiles The standard notches defined in the VDSL spectrum rep resenting the subcarrier indices if a spacing of 4 3125 kHz is used profiles 8A 17A are provided in the following table Band Start Frequency Start Subcarrier End Frequency End Subcarrier HAM 1810 kHz 417 2000 kHz 464 3500 kHz 811 3800 kHz ETSI 881 4000 kHz ANSI 7000 kHz 1623 7100 kHz ETSI 1670 7300 kHz ANSI 10100 kHz 2342 10150 kHz 2354 14000 kHz 3246 14350 kHz 3328 GMDSS 2173 kHz 504 2191 kHz 508 4200 kHz 974 4215 kHz 977 6300 kHz 1461 6320 kHz 1466 Table21 RFI in VDSL Spectrum 11 3 1 Creating Deleting a Profile Command Mode Function xdsl add notch config profile PROFILE Bridge Create Notch profile PROFILE enter the profile name xdsl delete notch config profile PROFILE Delete a specified Notch profile xdsl duplicate notch config profile SOURCE PROFILE Bridge Copies a notch profile NEW PROFILE SOURCE PROFILE name of origin notch profile NEW PROFILE name of new profile 11 3 2 Configuration fi General restriction for notch profile configurai
71. Q enhanced ONT bridge ports are tagged according tagging profile bridgeport PORTS enhtaggprof lt 1 65535 gt Bridge Sets enhanced tagging profile for bridge port 1 65535 enhanced tagging profile index see 14 2 2 Enhanced Tagging Profile for more information no bridgeport PORTS enhtaggprof Deletes the enhanced tagging profile from port bridgeport PORTS pvid PVIDS Bridge Configures PVID PORTS port number range of port numbers e g 1 1 1 1 72 1 0 1 PVIDS list of PVIDs e g 101 172 101 162 Id 0900d8058025fb9e Operation Manual CLI Bridges Command Mode Function bridgeport PORTS priority PRIORITY Bridge Sets new priority for bridgemode PORTS port number range of port numbers e g 1 1 1 1 72 1 0 1 PRIORITY 1p priority 0 7 bridgeport PORTS priority option dotip PRIORITY Configures bridgeport priority option Incoming frames gets config ured 1p PORTS port number range of port numbers e g 1 1 1 1 72 1 0 1 PRIORITY 1p priority 0 7 bridgeport PORTS priority option dscp Sets DSCP mode for bridgeport priority option DSCPPROFILE PORTS port number range of port numbers e g 1 1 1 1 72 1 0 1 DSCPPROFILE DSCP to 1p profile ID See 14 2 3 DSCP to Dot1p Mapping Profile for more information bridgeport PORTS host protocol Bridge Configures host configuration protocol none I dhcp pppoe dhcp pppoe PORTS port number range
72. SFU 2 8 X X X X hiX5705 001 SBU 1 8 2 1 X X X G25A 001 SFU 4 2 1 X X X G25A 002 SFU 4 X X X G25A 003 SFU 4 2 X X X G25C 001 SFU 1 X X X G25E 001 SFU 4 2 X X X X G25E 002 SFU 4 X X X G80RG 001 SFU 4 2 1 X X X X X 1 2 RG hiX5709 001 MDU1 16 482 243 X X X hiX5709 003 16 962 324 1 X x x X Table 18 ONT MDU Types 1 4 slots for service boards Max number of ports MDU equipped with 2 SB_POTS24 3 SB_XDSL12 12 VDSL2 and splitter 4 SB_XDSL16 16 VDSL2 ADSL2 combo splitter or SB_XDSL16P 16 VDSL2 ADSL2 POTS splitter 66 Id 0900d80580257da6 Operation Manual CLI ONU Equipment 9 2 Creating an ONU An ONU can be created in one of two modes Configured serial number In this mode the serial number as printed on the ONU must be set If an ONU is detected with a serial number that is equal to the config ured one this ONU starts up with the associated configuration data set Discover mode Each ONU is assigned a unique password The password is only transmitted upstream and cannot be changed from OLT side If the OLT reference password is initialized with the appropriate command the received ONU password can be compared with the local stored OLT reference password If an ONU with unknown serial number is detected and the password Reg ID is matching with the stored one the configuration will be completed with this ONU s serial number Command Mode Function create onu hiX5701 001 hiX
73. Setting of Alarm Severities and External Alarms Command Mode Function mdu card alarm severity profile ADDRESS lt 1 10 gt Config Changes the alarm severity profile of a specified MDU ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port ONU ID ONU slot 1 10 profile index mdu rack alarm severity profile ADDRESS 1 10 Changes the rack alarm of a specified MDU mdu shelf alarm severity profile ADDRESS 1 10 Changes the shelf alarm of a specified MDU mdu shelf ext alarm output ADDRESS 1 3 LINE Config Changes the usage string of the external alarm output of a specified MDU ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port ONU ID ONU slot 1 3 number of external alarm output LINE new usage string 76 d 0900d80580257da6 Operation Manual CLI ONU Equipment Command Mode Function mdu shelf ext alarm input ADDRESS 1 8 0 1 LINE Config Changes the usage string of the external alarm input of a specified MDU ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port ONU ID ONU slot 1 8 number of external alarm input 0 1 input is low or high active LINE new usage string 9 15 4 Setting the Number of Fans Command Mode Function modify onu fans ADDRESS 0 2 Config Sets the number of MDU fans ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port ONU ID 0 2 fan number 0 without fan 1 fan unit equipped with 1 fan 2 fan unit equipped with 2 fans 9 15 5 Checking the Configuration Data
74. Spanning Tree Operation Manual CLI 228 For example after setting the configuration ID and applying it with the stp mst config id commit command the configuration ID can be checked with the show stp mst config id command Example SWITCH bridge show stp mst 0 2a11 CST Root ST Root max age 20 s 8000 080006261d2f hello time 4 s 51 4096 bridge id vlans 8000 080006261d2f designated root 8000 080006261d2f root port 0 0 path cost O0 8000 080006261a2f1 forward delay 15 s MSTOO max hops 20 Port id AdminCost Cost Role State Attribute 0 1 8001 0 20000 designated forwarding P2P 0 2 8002 0 20000 backup blocking P2P 0 3 8003 0 20000 designated forwarding P2P 0 4 8004 0 20000 backup blocking P2P 0 5 8005 0 disable disabled 0 6 8006 0 disable disabled MST02 vlans 1 50 bridge id 8002 080006261d2f designated root 8002 080006261d2f root port 0 0 path cost 0 Port id AdminCost Cost Role State Attribute 0 1 8001 0 20000 designated forwarding P2P 0 2 8002 0 20000 backup blocking P2P 0 3 8003 0 20000 designated forwarding P2P 0 4 8004 0 20000 backup blocking P2P 0 5 8005 0 disable disabled 0 6 8006 0 disable disabled SWITCH bridge SWITCH bridge show stp mst 2 0 1 detail CST Root 8000 080006261a2f1 8000 080006261d2f hello time 4 s ST Root max age 20 s
75. Static Routes for more information SWITCH enable SWITCH configure terminal SWITCH config interface mgmt SWITCH config if ip address lt ip address of the management interface according to the project documentation gt lt mask gt SWITCH config if no shutdown SWITCH config if exit SWITCH config ip route default default gateway ip address according to the project documentation 2 Configure the trap destination to communicate with the NE using SNMP ACI E EM PX R2 0 LCT see Chapter 28 7 Configuring an SNMP Trap Host SWITCH config snmp community ro public SWITCH config snmp community rw private SWITCH config snmp trap2 host ip destination address for the trap host gt public After return from the Configuration mode the made settings must be stored in the persistent CXU memory SWITCH config exit SWITCH write memory Wait for OK message Connect the PC workstation via LCT port Local Telnet access as well as access using the EM PX R2 0 LCT should be possible 3 2 3 Configuring the Inband Management Channel To enable inband management communication the following tasks need to be per formed Id 0900d8058025feb5 33 System Access Operation Manual CLI 3 3 3 4 34 Create a dedicated VLAN for inband management and assigned it to the CXU uplink port see Chapter 16 1 Configuring a VLAN SWITCH gt enable SWITCH configure terminal SWITCH config brid
76. Syslog File e Checking the Syslog Configuration Enabling Disabling of Syslog Function 29 1 Configuring the Syslog Output Level The syslog function allows the NE to generate event notifications which can be forwarded to different event message collectors such as the console the system memory or a remote syslog server The system logs errors depending on its importance with different severity levels The highest level is emergency and the lowest one is informational Only messages with an severity of at least the configured level and higher will be forwarded to the specified output all other will be suppressed That means the informational level must be configured in order to receive all messages on the management system at last It is possible to configure the syslog output level with or without reference to the subsystem that generates the message 29 1 1 Syslog Output Level without a Priority Use the following commands to configure the severity levels of syslog messages and to determine its output redirection The output takes place regardless of a priority which part of system has generated the message Command Mode Function syslog output emerg alert crit err warning notice Config Transmits syslog message of configured level to specified output info debug local volatile non volatile Severity levels a emerg emergency 0 alert alert 1 or more serious crit critical 2 or more
77. TPID and DE if present copied from outer tag of received frame TPID output TPID and DE copied fron inner tag of received frame TPID output TPID and DE copied from outer tag of received frame TPID 0x8100 TPID output TPID DE 0 7 TPID output TPID DE 1 0 15 treat inner prio 0 7 the given priority to insert in the inner VLAN tag 8 the inner priority is to be copied from the inner priority of the received frame 9 the inner priority is to be copied from the outer priority of the received frame 15 do not add an inner tag 0 4097 treat inner VID 0 4094 4096 the inner VID is to be copied from the inner VID of the received frame 4097 the inner VID is to be copied from the outer VID of the received frame 0 7 treat inner TPID meaning of values as specified for treat outer TPID ORWND Creates an entry of tagging rule table with specific index 1 255 index of tagging rule 160 Id 0900d8058025fb9e Operation Manual CLI Bridges Command Mode Function taggingrule modify lt 1 255 gt lt 0 15 gt Bridge Modifies values of specified tagging rule lt 0 4096 gt lt 0 7 gt lt 0 15 gt lt 0 4096 gt lt 0 7 gt 0 3 lt 0 2 gt 0 15 0 4097 0 7 0 15 0 4097 0 7 taggingrule delete 1 255 Deletes the specified tagging rule Use the following command to verify the tagging rule table Command Mode Function
78. To choose the distribution method of aggregated CXU or IU 10x1GE ports use the following commands Command Mode Function trunk group distmode AGGREGATORS srcmac dstmac srcdstmac scrip dstip srcdstip Bridge no trunk group distmode AGGREGATORS srcmac dstmac srcdstmac srcip dstip srcdstip trunk iu SLOT aggregator group distmode AGGREGATIONS Bridge no trunk iu SLOT aggregator group distmode AGGREGATIONS Manages distribution method of fixed trunk groups of CXUports AGGREGATORS trunk group ID 0 1 srcmac set source MAC dstmac set destination MAC srcdstmac set source destination MAC default srcip set source IP dstip set destination IP srcdstip set source destination IP Deletes fixed trunk groups of CXU ports Manages distribution method of fixed trunk groups of ports AGGREGATORS trunk group ID 0 4 SLOT IU slot number IU Deletes fixed trunk groups of IU ports Group ID of port trunk cannot be configured repeatedly Source destination MAC address is basically used to decide the packet route 24 2 Configuring a static Port Trunk The port designated as member port of a trunk is automatically deleted from existing VLAN Therefore if member port and aggregated port exist in different VLAN VLAN configuration should be changed for the aggregated port If the operator deletes a member port from the logical port or releases the
79. Upgrades IU image for all plug in units of the same type ADDRESS server IP address or host name FILE source file name load file Upgrades software load of remote system ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port ONU ID ONU cardq FTP SERVER IP address of FTP server FILE source file name ignore operstate force download to disabled cards Help shows the relations between address and download type Stops current download job of upgrade software load remote system Use the following commands to upload data to FTP server The file extension tgz will be added by the system if the upload cxu config command is executed Command Mode Function upload cxu config errlog inventory alarmlog uptimelog ADDRESS FILE Config Uploads specified CXU data config configuration data errlog error log inventory inventory data alarmlog alarm log data uptimelog board uptime log data ADDRESS FTP server ID address or hostname FILE destination file name acc to the selected command upload iu errlog inventory ADDRESS FILE Config Uploads IU data for slot number 1 x errlog error log inventory use inventory data ADDRESS server ID address or host name FILE destination file name acc to the selected command upload iu inventory alloftype ADDRESS FILE Config Uploads IU inventory data for all Us of same type ADDRESS server ID address or host name FIL
80. VLANS none NAME Bridge Configures VLAN name VLANS select VLAN IDs e g 101 148 1000 NAME enter a VLAN name no vian name VLANS Deletes VLAN name The variable VLANS is a particular set of bridged interfaces Frames are bridged only among interfaces of the same VLAN The VLAN ID is contained in the VLAN tag of transmitted packets If a port is configured in tagging mode it will send tagged traffic Deleting a VLAN The following tasks must be performed in order to delete a VLAN Id 0900d80580221 ef7 169 VLAN Operation Manual CLI Step 1 Delete all ports associated with the VLAN see 16 3 Assigning the VLAN to Bridgeports Step 2 Delete the VLAN Example SWITCH bridge vlan del 10 0 1 0 4 SWITCH bridge no vlan 10 SWITCH bridge show vlan 10 vlan 10 doesn t exist 16 2 Enabling a Host VLAN In order to enable a host VLAN use the following command Command Mode Funciton host vlan lt 1 4093 gt Config Adds host to a specified VLAN 1 4093 enter the VLAN ID Use the no parameter with this command to delete a host VLAN 16 3 Assigning the VLAN to Bridgeports Command Mode Function vlan add VLANS PORTS tagged untagged Bridge Adds port to specified VLAN PORTS tagged untagged VLANS enter the VLAN IDs e g 101 148 1000 PORTS enter the port number for tagged or untagged traffic vlan d
81. a remote destination based upon individual router hops A RIP router sends routing update messages at regular intervals and when the network topology changes When the RIP router receives a routing update from another one that includes changes to an entry it updates its routing table to reflect the new route The metric value for the path is increased by 1 and the sender is indicated as the next hop A directly connected network has a metric of zero an unreachable network has a metric of 16 After updating its routing table the router immediately begins transmitting routing updates to inform other network routers of the change These updates are sent independently of the reg ularly scheduled updates that RIP routers send If an interface s network is not specified it will not be advertised in any RIP update For more information about RIPv2 refer to RFC 1058 RFC 1723 and RFC 2453 The RIP commands are described in the following sections Basic Configuration of RIP e Allowing Unicast Updates for RIP e Configuring of Static Routes e Redistributing of Routing Information e Configuring of Routing Metrics e Configuring the Administrative Distance Id 0900d80580212815 207 IP Routing Operation Manual CLI 21 3 1 Extended RIP Configuration Managing the Authentication Key Checking of Router and Protocol Information Basic Configuration of RIP To configure RIP on the router perform the following tasks 1 2 Specifyi
82. agent adds the DHCP option 82 and modifies also the DHCP header e g change the source IP no simplified Sets the DHCP provider to normal vlanid lt 2 4094 gt DHCP PPPoE Specifies a VLAN for the DHCP PPPoE provider pool 2 4094 provider s VLAN ID no vianid Deletes a VLAN ID from DHCP PPPoE provider pool 18 2 3 Verifying the Consistence of DHCP Provider Pool To verify the consistence of provider pool entries use the following command Id 0900d8058025c93a 177 DHCP and PPPoE Operation Manual CLI Command Mode Function verify DHCP Checks if the provider entry s values are consistent 18 2 4 Checking a Provider Pool Enter the following command in order to display the provider pool entries Command Mode Function show ip provider NAME index Exec Shows DHCP PPPoE provider pool Config NAME provider pool name DHCP index sorted by index PPPoE show ip dhcp vlan lt 2 4094 gt Config Displays all or specified DHCP VLANs print name vlanid option82 gateway remote id DHCP Displays actual values server all name provider s name vianid VLAN ID option82 option105 option82 option105 flag gateway gateway IP address server DHCP server IPs remote id remote ID all all default print name vlanid option105 remote id all PPPoE 18 3 DHCP Relay Agent A DHCP relay agent has t
83. alias to make user s equipment response ARP request Use the no parameter with this command to delete specified IP address range from ARP table i Unless you have specified a MAC address the MAC address of user s equipment will be used for ARP response To view ARP alias use the following command Command Mode Function show arp alias Privileged Shows registered ARP Alias Config Example of configuring ARP alias by registering IP addresses from 10 1 1 2 to 10 1 1 5 SWITCH config arp alias 0 1 1 2 10 1 1 5 SWITCH config 194 Id 0900d805801da7a0 Operation Manual CLI IP Routing 21 IP Routing The hiX 5750 R2 0 supports the following routing protocols e BGP Routing RIP Routing S IS Routing 21 1 Static Routes Static routing is the simplest form of routing A static route remains in the router config uration until it will be removed Thus it does not work well when the routing information has to be changed frequently or needs to be configured on a large number of routing devices Static routes must consist of a valid destination IP address neighbor router receiving the packets and number of hops that packets have to pass through From Configuration mode use the ip route commands to add delete a static IP route Command Mode Function ip route A B C D A B C D A B C D INTERFACE lt 1 255 gt ip route A B C D M A B C D INTERFACE
84. all subscriber switching models per GPON port of OLT simultaneously MAC mode and VID mode per one port modify gpon mac mode vid mac enhanced mac Configures the GPON MAC mode all IUs must be locked vid VLAN mode mapping of VLANs to GEM ID is configured downstream and upstream mac MAC mode downstream mapping of MAC address to GEM ID is learned from upstream frames enhanced mac MAC mode with special features see above show base settings Config Displays GPON MAC mode and prio map range Bridge Example SWITCH config show base settings gpon mac mode enhanced mac prio map range 4 13 2 SWITCH config Configuring of Priority Mapping Profiles The priority mapping profile defines the translation from a tag priority to another depending on the MAC mode was defined for a certain VLAN Use the following command to set the priorities of traffic flows in an enhanced MAC mode environment Command Mode Function prioprofilemap modify NPRIOOUT OUTPRIOOUT Bridge Modifies a entry of the priority mapping profile INPRIOOUT 0 7 with 0 not applicable for this MAC mode OUTPRIOOUT 0 7 If the NNI is single tagged OUTPRIOOUT means the only tag at the NNI In this case INPRIOOUT is not used show prioprofilemap Bridge Shows information about the current priority mapping for VLANs in cross connect 150 Example SWITCH config SWITCH config bridge
85. and RFC 1195 Connectionless network routing and End System IS discovery are not supported IS IS routing makes use of a two level hierachical Level 1 L1 routers know the topology inside their area including all routers and hosts They forward all traffic for destinations outside by using a Level 2 L2 router within their area which knows the domain level 2 topology All L1 routers and hosts in an area must have a Network Service Access Point NSAP with the same area address The GPON OLT itself is part of a single area Therefore it performs the tasks of aL1 router only The IS IS routing can be established at the uplink ports only not at subscriber ports e Level 2 L2 routers connect all areas within a routing domain They advertise their own area addresses NSAP to the other L2 routers in the backbone L1 and L2 routers have two link state databases a level 1 link state database for intra area routing and a level 2 link state database for inter area routing The routing tables are builded calculating the shortest path tree SPT by each IS An IS IS area can consist of L1 routers only L1 L2 routers or L2 only or a combination of all i There is a limitation only one IS IS instance can run Level 2 routing either Level 2 only IS or Level 1 2 IS IS IS is used to intermittently send out link state information across the network so that each router can maintain a current picture of network topology For messages four p
86. as angpon SWITCH configure terminal SWITCH config passwd enable angpon SWITCH config Example of accessing SWITCH login root Password SWITCH gt enable Password SWITCH 3 6 Configuring the Auto Logout Function For security reasons the user is automatically logged out when there is no command prompted within the configured inactivity time Use the following command to enable the auto logout function and to configure the inactivity timer Command Mode Function exec timeout lt 0 35791 gt lt 0 59 gt Config If no command is entered within the configured inactivity time the user is automatically logged out of the system 0 35791 time unit in minutes by default 10 minutes 0 releases auto logout function 0 59 time unit in seconds Id 0900d8058025feb5 35 System Access Operation Manual CLI Command Mode Function show exec timeout Privileged Shows configured inactivity timer Config Example Example of configuring an auto logout timeout of 50 seconds and displaying the configuration SWITCH config exec timeout 0 50 SWITCH config show exec timeout Log out time 50 seconds SWITCH config 3 7 Configuring of Users The administrator can configure up to 8 user accounts Once a user account is config ured the user can login to the system using the user name password combination Adding a U
87. backup mode T 1 2 Traffic management option 1 0 0 0 cellRateControlled Powerlevel Pvid Number of Fans Distance 0 metre User data 2 1 1_G25 A 3 Configuring the ONU Registration ID in Discover Mode At first the unknown replaced ONU must be locked In order to configure the ONU registration ID the serial number method must be set to discover mode Note that the registration ID is only sent in upstream direction Hence the registration ID that is now set has to match with the ID that was directly configured on ONU before This step should be finished with a configuration check 70 d 0900d80580257da6 Operation Manual CLI ONU Equipment SWITCH config modify onu adminstate 2 1 1 lock SWITCH config modify onu discovermode 2 1 1 30303037303231323539 SWITCH config show onu table 2 1 1 OltSlot 2 GponPort 1 Onuld 1 Configured onu type G25A 001 Serialnumber method 2 discover mode Serialnumber ASCIT gO OPO 28 Serialnumber HEX 0x0000000000000000 Password Reg Id ASCII 0007021259 Password Reg Id HEX 0x30303037303231323539 Equipment Id ASC OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO00 Equipment Id HEX 0x0000000000000000000000000000000000000000 Version ASC OOOOOOOOOOO0O000 Version HEX 0x0000000000000000000000000000 Vendor Id ASCII QOO Vendor Id HEX 0x00000000 Vendor product code 0 Pptp ind
88. be added to user s upstream frames One default profile always exists and cannot be deleted but modified Use the following commands to manage up to 16 DSCP to 1p mapping profiles Command Mode Function dscp dot1p map profile create PROFID DSCPPOS Bridge Creates a new profile DSCPFIELD 1 PROFID profile ID 1 to 16 of DSCP dot1p map profile O means looking for next free entry DSCPPOS start index in map table for next parameter undeclared 1p elements have prio 0 DSCPFIELD character string with characters between 0 and 7 e g 112270123 dscp dot1p map profile modify PROFID DSCPPOS DSCPFIELD Modifies a profile dscp dot1p map profile delete PROFID Deletes a profile show dscp dot1p map profile PROFID Privileged Displays DSCP 1p map profile Config Bridge 14 2 4 Bridge Port Parameters Use the following commands to configure the ONT bridge port parameters Command Mode Function bridgeport PORTS taggingmode off tagged untagged transparent enhanced Bridge Configures bridge port tagging mode PORTS port number range of port numbers e g 1 1 1 1 72 1 0 1 off untagged tagged and double tagged frames are forwarded unchanged tagged tagged and double tagged frames are forwarded untagged frames are dropped untagged untagged frames are forwarded tagged and double tagged frames are dropped transparent add a tag frame untagged gt tagged tagged gt double tagged 0x8100 Q in
89. blocks the port To enable disable self loop detection use the following command Command Mode Function stp self loop detect enable disable Bridge Enables disables self loop detection function 230 Use the following commands for detection of loops or to check the ports where a loop occurred Id 0900d80580203028 Operation Manual CLI Spanning Tree Command Mode Function show stp self loop detect show stp self loop detect all PORTS Bridge Shows status of self loop detection and a port where loop is happed Shows self loop detection status on specified ports all all the ports PORTS selected port 22 7 Sample of MSTP Configuration SWITCH bridge stp force version mstp SWITCH bridge stp mst enable SWITCH bridge stp mst config id map 2 1 50 SWITCH bridge stp mst config id name 1 SWITCH bridge stp mst config id revision 1 SWITCH bridge stp mst config id commit SWITCH bridge show stp mst Status enabled bridge id 8000 00d0cb000183 designated root root port 0 max age hello time forward delay CIST regional root 8000 00d0cb000183 max hops 20 name SWITCH revision 1 instance vlans IST 51 4094 L 50 SWITCH bridge 8000 00d0cb0001 path cost 20 00 2 00 15 00 83 0 bridge max age 20 00 lo time 2 00 bridge forward delay 15 00 CIST path cost bridge hel
90. card Shows the whole MGC monitoring threshold table Updating the MGC PM Data Use the following command to update the MGC performance monitoring data Command Mode Function update voip performance mgcmon current data NDEX Config Checking the MGC PM Data Use the following commands to verify the MGC performance monitoring data Updates VoIP performance mgc monitoring object Command Mode Function show voip performance mgcmon current data table Exec Shows the whole MGC monitoring current data table Conti show voip performance mgcmon current data table index 9 Shows the MGC monitoring current data table for specified INDEX ONT INDEX physical index of the ONT card show voip performance mgcmon history data table Exec Shows the whole MGC monitoring history data table Conti show voip performance mgcmon history data table index 9 Shows the MGC monitoring history data table for specified INDEX ONT INDEX physical index of the ONT card 12 7 4 Checking the MGC Configuration and User Table Command Mode Function show voip mgc user data table Exec Shows the whole MGC user data table or specified table Config ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port ONT ID port number POTS show voip mgc user data table addr ADDRESS port number 1 max show voip mgc config data table Exec Shows the whole MGC config data table Config 138 1d 0900d8058023f697
91. configuration mode and to configure the specified provider Command Mode Function ip dhcp provider NAME ip pppoe provider NAME Config Changes into DHCP PPPoE configuration mode to create modify a DHCP PPPOE provider pool NAME provider name Use the no parameter with this command to delete the specified DHCP PPPOE provider pool entry Use the commands below to exit the DHCP PPPoE configuration mode and to save made settings Command Mode Function exit secure forced DHCP Exits DHCP PPPoE config mode to config mode PPPoE secure only if some valid data are committed default commit exit end quit end forced exits DHCP PPPoE configuration mode without saving Saves values after having verified them successfully exit commits data and leave DHCP PPPoE configuration mode to Config mode end commits data and leave DHCP PPPoE configuration mode to Privileged exec mode Exits DHCP PPPoE configuration mode without saving Goes up to Privileged exec mode without saving 18 2 2 Configuring the DHCP PPPoE Provider To configure the DHCP PPPOE provider enter the following commands Command Mode Function simplified on off DHCP Configures DHCP provider s type on simplified DHCP default The relay agent just adds DHCP option 82 without changing anything else inside DHCP header off normal DHCP The relay
92. data table sip registrar INDEX LINE modify voip sip agent config data table sip softswitch NDEX LINE Config Modifies an IP address in the agent configuration data table LINE IP address of the SIP host part URI Config Modifies an IP address in the agent configuration data table LINE IP address or name of the SIP registrar server for SIP sig naling messages Examples 10 10 10 10 and proxy voip net Config Modifies the agent configuration data table LINE SIP gateways softswitch vendor 4 ASCII alphabetical characters A Z as defined in ANSI T1 220 All NULL characters indicates no particular vendor modify voip sip agent config data table udp tcp ptr INDEX PTR Config Associates the SIP agent with the TCP UDP service to be used for communication with the SIP proxy server Default value is 0 unless the IP port is associated The attribute represents the second index of the VoIP TCP UDP config data table the TCP UDP port PTR UDP TCP pointer Checking the SIP Agent Configuration To show SIP agent configuration data table use the following command Command Mode Function show voip sip agent config data table Exec Shows the agent configuration data table Config Checking the SIP Agent Status To check the SIP agent status use the following command Command Mode Function get voip sip agent status ADDRESS Config SIP agent statu
93. describe the commands in order to check the utilization of system resources and the status of system values Displaying the Running Time of System Checking the CPU Load Displaying Consumption Ratio of System Memory Displaying the Fan Status Displaying Running Processes Saving the Configuration After download a new system image to the hiX 5750 R2 0 system from FTP server or changing the configuration the operator has to save the files into the flash memory Oth erwise the configuration data will be lost in case of rebooting write memory show flash All exceed Saves changed configuration in the flash memory exec Privileged Displays flash info Config Examples SWITCH write memory OK SWITCH i Wait for OK message after starting this function without pressing any key Id 0900d8058023f449 39 System Basic Configuration Operation Manual CLI SWITCH show flash Flash Information Bytes Area total used free loadname oad 1 32112640 12976156 19136484 gpon r2 0 5 cxu f o 010 Load 2 32112640 14856192 17256448 gpon r2 0 5 cxu f o 003 CONFIG 1310720 663552 647168 CONFIG 441792 675840 765952 SWITCH Besides the write command the system configuration can be also stored into flash memory through copying the configuration file with a particular file name The configu ration file stored in flash can be transferred to a remote FTP se
94. disable auto backup local waiting time 1 59 Config Configures automatic save of the configuration data in persistent memory enable local save enabled disable local save disabled Use the no parameter with this command to disable the function Configures auto backup waiting time for local backup 1 59 waiting time in minutes after the last configuration action before the configuration data are saved in persistent memory Configuring the Auto Backup to an FTP Server Use the following commands in order to inform the NE about the FTP server that is used for auto backups If this is the default FTP server the optional parameters may drop Command Mode Function auto backup ftp enable disable Config auto backup ftp file count 1 32 auto backup ftp ip A B C D auto backup ftp path PATH auto backup ftp account USER PASSWORD auto backup ftp interval 1 48 auto backup ftp start time 0 1439 Configures automatic save of the configuration data on an FTP server enable FTP save enabled disable FTP save disabled Use the no parameter with this command to disable the function Configures the number of files on FTP server 1 32 number of files on FTP server Configures the IP address of the FTP server A B C D IP address of the FTP server Configures the path on FTP server where to save the backup PATH path on FTP
95. end subcarrier press ENTER to show only one The gain value is represented as a multiple of 1 512 on linear scale Shows SNR allocation table for different subcarrier groups of one port for downstream upstream direction PORT ADDRESS enter slot port ONU ID ONT slot 1 4096 start subcarrier group press ENTER to show all 1 4096 end subcarrier group press ENTER to show only one Shows Quiet Line Noise allocation table for different sub carrier groups of one port for downstream upstream direc tion PORT ADDRESS enter slot port ONU ID ONT slot 1 4096 start subcarrier group press ENTER to show all 1 4096 end subcarrier group press ENTER to show only one Shows H f linear representation for subcarrier groups of one port for downstream upstream direction PORT ADDRESS enter slot port ONU ID ONT slot 1 4096 start subcarrier group press ENTER to show all 1 4096 end subcarrier group press ENTER to show only one 125 XDSL Operation Manual CLI Command Mode Function show Ire PORT ADDRESS xdsl delt hlog allocation Privileged Shows H f logarithmic representation for subcarrier downstream upstream 1 4096 lt 1 4096 gt Config groups of one port for downstream upstream direction Bridge PORT ADDRESS enter slot port ONU ID ONT slot 1 4096 start subcarrier group press ENTER to show all 1 4096 end subcarrier group press ENTER to show only
96. entries of voice CTP table use the following commands Command Mode Function modify voip voip voice ctp table entry F NDEX 1 16 Config Modifies CTP table entry A F F IF_INDEX physical index modify voip voip voice ctp table entry addr ADDRESS lt 1 16 gt ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port ONT ID port number POTS port number 1 max 1 16 VoIP media profile table 12 4 2 Checking the Voice CTP Table To show configuration data use the following commands Command Mode Function show voip voip voice ctp table Exec Shows the VoIP CTP table of all or specified port Config ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port ONT ID port POTS port number 1 max show voip voip voice ctp table addr ADDRESS 12 5 Line Status Table A line status table entry is automatically created and will be numbered identically with the POTS PPTP It contains status information related to the VoIP session for the spec ified POTS port 12 5 1 Retrieving the Line Status Use following commands to retrieve the line status 132 1d 0900d8058023f697 Operation Manual CLI Voice over IP Command Mode Function retrieve voip voip line status table F NDEX Config Retrieves the line status table IF INDEX interface index of the POTS port retrieve Voip voip line status table addr ADMESS ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port ONT ID port number POTS port number 1 max 12 5 2 Checking the L
97. filter outer prio 15 zero tag rules have both filter priority fields 15 The tagging rule table has 3 default entries that list the default treatment of normal for warding for untagged single tagged and double tagged frames As an exception to the ordered processing these default rules are always considered as a last resort for frames that do not match any other applicable rule The 3 default entries can neither be deleted nor modified Use the following commands to configure tagging rules Id 0900d8058025fb9e 159 Bridges Operation Manual CLI Command Mode Function taggingrule create lt 0 15 gt lt 0 4096 gt lt 0 7 gt 0 15 lt 0 4096 gt 0 7 0 3 0 2 0 15 0 4097 0 7 0 15 0 4097 0 7 taggingrule 1 255 create 0 15 0 4096 0 7 0 15 0 4096 0 7 0 3 0 2 0 15 lt 0 4097 gt 0 7 0 15 0 4097 0 7 Bridge Creates an entry of tagging rule table free running rule index 0 15 filter outer prio 0 7 the given outer priority to filter the received frames 8 indicates not to filter on outer priority 14 indicates the default filter when no other double tag rule in this table applies 15 indicates that this entry is not a double tag rule and all other outer tag filter fields should be ignored 0 4096 filter outer VID 0 4094 4096 indicates not to filter on the outer VID 0 7 filter outer TPID 0 do not f
98. for a route are received the route is declared invalid default is 180 garbage routing garbage collection timer Upon expiration of the garbage col lection timer the route is finally removed from the routing table default is 120 Use the no parameter with this command to restore the defaults 21 3 8 Managing the Authentication Key Only RIP version 2 supports authentication on an interface Command Mode Function ip rip authentication key chain LINE Interface Enables RIPv2 authentication on an interface LINE name of the key chain Use the no parameter with this command to disable this function The hiX 5750 R2 0 supports two modes of authentication on an interface for which RIP authentication is enabled plain text authentication and MD5 authentication The default authentication in every RIP Version 2 packet is plain text authentication Do not use plain text authentication in RIP packets for security purposes because the unencrypted authentication key is sent in every RIP Version 2 packet In order to configure RIP authentication use the following order of commands Command ip rip authentication string L NE Interface Specifies the authentication string or password used by a key Mode Function LINE specifies authentication string or password used by a single key on an interface The string must be shorter than 16 characters Use the no parameter with this command to disable th
99. forwarded without verifying the IP source address i In the hiX 5750 R2 0 there is only one anti spoofing VLAN profile Command Mode Function ip antispoofing vlan profile 1 1 add lt 1 4094 gt all Bridge Adds specified VLAN or all VLANs to IP anti spoofing VLAN profile 1 1 index VLAN profile 1 4094 VLAN ID all all VLANs in system ip antispoofing vlan profile 1 1 del lt 1 4094 gt all Deletes specified VLAN or all VLANs from IP anti spoofing VLAN profile Command Mode Function show ip antispoofing vian profile Bridge Shows IP anti spoofing VLAN profile 232 Id 0900d8058023ed69 Operation Manual CLI Link Aggregation 24 Link Aggregation LACP link aggregation control protocol complying with IEEE 802 3ad bundles several physical GPON ports together to one logical port providing enlarged bandwidth In the hiX 5750 R2 0 system Link Aggregation Groups LAG can be formed over the 1 Gbps Ethernet uplink ports of the OLT cards CXU up to 4 interfaces per group and IU 10x1G up to 8 interfaces per group The system supports two kinds of link aggregation groups static groups as port trunk and dynamic groups using LACP A static LAG balances the traffic load across the links in the LAG port If a physical link within the static LAG fails traffic previously carried over the failed link is moved to the remaining links 24 1 Selecting Distribution Method
100. hop This command set next hop value in RIPv2 This command does not affect RIPv1 because there is no next hop field in the packet Use the no parameter with this command to disable this setting 21 3 5 Configuring of Routing Metrics Metrics of Redistributed Routes RIP metric is a value for distance for the network that will be incremented when the network information is received Redistributed route s metric is set to 1 i This command is used with the redistribute command in order to determine RIP to use the specified metric value for all redistributed routes Default metric is useful in redistributing routes with incompatible metrics Every protocol has different metrics and cannot be compared directly For example the RIP metric is a hop count and the OSPF metric is a combination of five quantities Default metric provides the standard to compare All routes that are redistributed will use the default metric In such situations an artificial metric is assigned to the redistributed route In order to set metrics for redistributed routes use the following command Command Mode Function default metric 1 16 Router Specifies the metrics to be assigned to redistributed routers 1 16 metric value default value is set to 1 Use the no parameter with this command to disable this feature fi This command does not affect a connected route even if it is redistributed by redistribute connected
101. liliis 38 Configuring the Inband Management Channel llus 33 System Logi 225 crac pu teme eas dogma DE E dpud a apes SUP BUS 34 Telnet ACCESS isse t ug REY Ee CORE ROE eee RE SEES Oe 34 Modifying the Password of Privileged Exec Mode 35 Configuring the Auto Logout Function 00 0c eee eee 35 Configuring Of USGts scii EIE RES ia eX AES RIQELQe SEDES 36 Limiting the Number of Management Sessions 04 37 Checking the Management Sessions llli eee eee ees 38 Checking Telnet Users lllllllellellele ree 38 Id 0900d8058025f467 3 Operation Manual CLI 4 1 4 1 1 4 1 2 4 1 3 4 1 4 4 1 5 4 1 6 4 1 7 4 1 8 4 2 4 2 1 4 2 2 4 2 3 4 2 4 4 2 5 4 3 4 3 1 4 3 2 4 3 3 4 3 4 4 4 4 4 1 4 4 2 5 1 5 2 5 8 5 4 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 6 5 fal ie 7 3 7 4 5 7 6 Tl 7 8 La System Basic Configuration 0 000 cece eee 39 Software and Configuration Management llli sess 39 Saving the Contiguration s ubt RUE RS beset Ber ERRARE 39 Auto Backup the Configuration llle 40 Auto Upgrading the S APS 00 een ee 43 Downloading and Uploading of Software 0 0 e ee eee 44 Restarting the System usos enr bP es Epp drepde MEE 47 Restoring default Configuration liliis ree 47 Displaying the System Version and Startup Information 48 Checking the Running System Configuration
102. member ports choose the port operation mode active or passive mode Passive mode starts LACP when the port of the opposite GPON is using active mode Because the priority of active mode is higher than of passive mode the passive port follows the active port i If the uplink ports are set in passive mode a link of member ports over two switches is impossible To configure the operation mode of member ports use the following commands in Bridge mode Command Mode Function lacp port activity PORTS active passive Bridge Configures the mode of member port of CXU LAG default is active PORT select the member port number no lacp port activity PORTS Releases operation mode of configured member port of CXU LAG lacp iu SLOT port activity PORTS active passive Bridge Configures the mode of member port of IU LAG default is active PORT Select port number s Slot Port SLOT select IU slot number 24 3 5 no lacp iu SLOT port activity PORTS Releases operation mode of configured member port of IU LAG i Member ports are set to active operation mode by default After releasing the operating mode the port is returned to default mode active Configuring LACP Priority In case of a configured active mode LACP system enabled it is required to choose the standard GPON port of the LAG and to configure the priority Command Mode Function lacp system priority lt 1 65535 gt
103. metric and the priority for becoming IS with the command isis priority Command Mode Function isis metric 1 63 level 1 level 2 Interface Configures the default metric metric style narrow for the interface isis priority 0 127 level 1 level 2 Config Sets priority for designated router election 1 63 Range of calculation level 1 metric to level 1 links level 2 metric to level 2 links The no parameter with this command sets default metric to the default value 10 to both level 1 and level 2 Interface 0 127 Priority value default priority is 64 for both level 1 and level 2 level 1 Specify priority for level 1 routing level 2 Specify priority for level 2 routing Mesh Groups Mesh groups are a mechanism to reduce redundant packet transmissions for the IS IS protocol If an interface is configured as mesh group blocked the standard LSP database synchronization process is applied if the interface receives CSNP Complete Sequence Number PDU or PSNP Partial Sequence Number PDU Command Mode Function isis mesh group blocked lt 1 4294967295 gt Interface Sets IS IS mesh group ID on the specified interface 1 4294967295 Mesh group Number blocked blocks LSPs on the current interface The no parameter disables unblocked mesh group on the specified interface Authentication Password IS IS specifies an authentication mechanism to prevent unautho
104. mgmt Hardware is Ethernet address is 0800 0626 1a69 index 2 metric 1 mtu 1500 lt UP BROADCAST RUNNING MULTICAST gt VRF Binding Not bound Bandwidth 100m inet 10 2 2 20 24 broadcast 10 2 2 255 input packets 16085 bytes 8778585 dropped 0 multicast packets 0 input errors 0 length 0 overrun 0 CRC 0 frame 0 fifo 0 missed 0 output packets 9245 bytes 2955103 dropped 0 output errors 0 aborted 0 carrier 0 fifo 0 heartbeat 0 window 0 collisions 0 Interface br4094 Hardware is Ethernet address is 0800 0626 1a69 index 41 metric 1 mtu 1500 lt UP BROADCAST RUNNING MULTICAST gt VRF Binding Not bound Bandwidth 100m inet 10 254 254 100 27 broadcast 10 255 255 255 input packets 19418 bytes 13580234 dropped 0 multicast packets 0 input errors 0 length 0 overrun 0 CRC 0 frame 0 fifo 0 missed 0 output packets 26948 bytes 12872892 dropped 0 output errors 0 aborted 0 carrier 0 fifo 0 heartbeat 0 window 0 collisions 0 SWITCH config 168 Id 0900d80580257621 Operation Manual CLI VLAN 16 16 1 VLAN The first step in setting up a bridging network is to define VLAN A VLAN is a bridged network that is logically segmented by subscriber or function Each VLAN contains a group of ports Packets on the VLAN which are received on a port will be forwarded only to ports that are member of the same VLAN Network devices in different VLANs cannot communicate with one another without a Layer 3 switching device
105. mode execute the ip dhcp provider command on Configuration mode The system prompt changed from SWITCH config to SWITCH dhcp provider Command Mode Function ip dhcp provider NAME Config Enters into DHCP configuration mode to configure DHCP DHCP configuration mode is used to configure the DHCP relay agent option82 and PPPoE option 105 Table 6 shows main commands of DHCP configuration mode Command Function ip Configures DHCP relay server Configures DHCP server address option82 Configures DHCP option82 option105 Configures PPPoE option 105 Table 6 Main Commands of the DHCP Configuration Mode RMON Configuration Mode To enter into RMON history mode execute the rmon history command on Configura tion Mode The system prompt changes from SWITCH config to SWITCH config rmonhistory n Command Mode Function rmon history lt 1 65535 gt Config Changes into RMON configuration mode Table 7 shows a couple of important main commands of RMON configuration mode Command Function active Activates the history owner Shows the subject which configures each RMON and uses related information Table 7 Main Commands of the RMON Configuration Mode Bridge Configuration Mode By executing the bridge command on Configuration mode the system prompt changes from SWITCH config to SWITCH bridge Command Mode Funct
106. name Use the no parameter with this command to send no route as a default neighbor A B C D WORD filter list WORD in out Router Establish BGP filters WORD name of AS path access list in incoming advertised routes will be filtered out outgoing advertised routes will be filtered Use the no parameter with this command to disable this function Id 0900d80580212815 201 IP Routing Operation Manual CLI Command Mode Function neighbor A B C D WORD prefix list WORD in out Router Distributes neighbor information as specified in a prefix list by filtering the updates to from this neighbor WORD Name of a prefix list in access list applies to incoming advertisements out access list applies to outgoing advertisements i The neighbor distribute list command is an alterna tive to the this command and only one of them can be used for filtering to the same neighbor in any direction neighbor A B C D WORD maximum prefix lt 1 4294967295 gt lt 1 100 gt warning only neighbor A B C D WORD maximum prefix lt 1 4294967295 gt lt 1 100 gt warning only Router Configures the number of prefixes that can be received from a neighbor 1 429496729 maximum number of prefixes permitted 1 100 Threshold value 1 to 100 percent warning only Only give warning message when limit is exceeded Use the no parameter with this comma
107. of ONUs Id 0900d80580214302 189 IGMP Operation Manual CLI Command Mode Function igmp onu D inactive vlan switching snooping acl Config Configures IGMP on ONU side ID ONU slot link ID slot inactive switching mode is off vlan switching MC traffic will be forwarded over all ports of the VLAN snooping supports MAC based IGMP snooping functionality Only subscriber ports which have joined at the MC group will be inscribed on the forwarding table of the MC VLAN Ports that leave the group will be deleted from the table acl the ACL contains the allocations of the customer subscriber ports to their allowable MC groups Selecting this feature the ONU will filter the MC packages according to the determination of the ACL Provider necessary see 19 3 IGMP Provider Use the following commands to check the IGMP information of ONUs Command Mode Function show igmp onu ADDR Config Shows ONU port with regard to IGMP ADDRESS slot link ONU ID slot show igmp snooping table onu D Config Displays the ONU snooping table ID address slot link ONU ID slot port VCC show igmp onu card ADDH Config Shows ONU port with regard to IGMP ADDRESS slot link ONU ID slot show igmp onu port PORT Config Shows ONU port with regard to IGMP PORT slot link ONU ID slot 19 6 Configuring of Queries Parameters Use the following commands to configure different query parame
108. of RMON History 00000 esee 263 Assigning Source Port of statistical Data naana 0 0 00 263 Identifying Subject of RMON History 0 000 cee ee eee 264 Configuring Number of Sample Data 0 000 264 Configuring Interval of Sample Inquiry 20000 e ee eee 264 Activating the RMON FISIONY oi cinta ans mper dca dm te oe aUe ere e gens 265 Displaying RMON History 4 onu eye km eee reete 265 Deleting the RMON History 000 0c eee e 265 ADDICVIANONS sS accrue a cus qd mpi Spp e omis Gee qid ase 266 1d 0900d8058025 467 Operation Manual CLI List of Figures Figure 1 Figure 2 Figure 3 Figure 4 Figure 5 Overview of Configuration Modes 000c cee eee eee 20 Serial Console Cable Wiring and Signal Assignments 32 CXU and 1 GE Redundancy Example llle 65 VoIP Configuration Structure 0 sssaaa aeaaee 127 User defined Setting for CPU Packet 0 000000 ee 173 Id 0900d8058025f467 13 Operation Manual CLI 14 List of Tables Table 1 Command Notation of GEl s2accneatedacd bess tadsotinseaads 18 Table 2 Related Documentation 22s nm ena rinse dba eps 18 Table 3 Main Commands of Privileged Exec Mode ssuss 21 Table 4 Main Commands of Configuration Mode sss 22 Table 5 Main Commands of Rule Configuration 00000 eae 22 Table 6 Main Commands of the DHCP Configurati
109. port trunk ports will be automatically contained as default VLAN 24 2 1 Forming a fixed Trunk Group of Ports To form the port trunk use the following command Id 0900d8058020266d 233 Link Aggregation Operation Manual CLI Command Mode Function trunk port AGGREGATOR PORTS Bridge Manages fixed trunk of CXU ports AGGREGATOR trunk group ID 0 1 PORTS port numbers that should be added 0 1 0 4 Use the no parameter with this command to delete a fixed trunk of CXU ports trunk iu SLOT port AGGREGATOR PORTS Bridge Manage IU fixed trunk groups SLOT IU slot number AGGREGATOR trunk group ID 0 4 PORTS port numbers that should be added Slot Port Use the no parameter with this command to delete a fixed trunk of IU ports i Group ID of port trunk cannot be configured repeatedly 24 2 2 Checking Port Trunk Configuration To check the configuration of port trunk use the following command Command Mode Function show trunk all show trunk iu SLOT Privileged Shows the configuration for trunk Config Bridge Shows IU fixed trunk groups SLOT select IU slot number 24 3 Configuring LACP LACP provides a dynamically exchange of information in order to configure and maintain link aggregation groups automatically Load sharing is automatically readjusted if a failure or recovery from failure occurs in any of the links that partic
110. s bestenaa 5 peed S vbi adios boram pelis ias 184 Global SettiigS oss eu one taeda oS Pepe boa a 184 IGMP REC PIO G s mis d operto Re ees spud GER QM E T ERE 185 IGMP Provider x 2222s bee X RI Ra VET RP PRESE ERE 187 Multicast Package and Group iur bre Fry ppt m dade sod atra hs 188 IGMP Operation Mode sssssssese eee 189 Configuring of Queries Parameters 0 00 0c ee 190 IGMP Subscriber Pons each agaist apetens capac Rodas eR Red s 190 Assigning of an ONU Port to static Multicast Groups 191 ARP Table s i043 dh ES Ebr ae kapha a Vie e deas 193 Managing of ARP Table Entries ss uad e paces baec Rd eS 193 Checking the ARP Table osse ree bRRE RR HR PRESE RS 193 PRO AMES 2c be id oput rmx UM dE LA I LRL 194 IP OUO sra raa diria s qnt sun qa enor at ird adio eap dd 195 State ROUES cuida pite ep RU S aepo det E ou p dope detuning 2 195 BGP ROUMO e s petes tease usas teE stu Seb LM E a 197 Enabling a BGP Routing Process liliis cece eens 197 Announcing the Network to Neighbors 00 eee eee 198 Configuring BGP Neighbor Routers 000 cee eee 198 Managing BGP Peer Groups osse ii e RP EAR PER ERI ER REX 199 Extended Neighbor Commands 0 0000e eee eee nes 199 Redistribute Routing Information llle 203 ROWO MAD p MEE 203 Distribution EISE sac des00 RR kire bere ee eee bated alae ade 203 Prefbcbisl uas ied elei Reip tbe E tides p ba adotta t
111. serious syslog output emerg alert crit err warning notice err error 3 or more serious info debug console warning warning 4 or more serious notice notice 5 or more serious info informational 6 or more serious debug debug 7 or more serious System logger output redirection Local output file system memory see also 29 4 Verifying and Clearing the local Syslog File volatile deletes a syslog message after restart non volatile reserves a syslog message A B C D remote log host IP address Use the no parameter with this command to disable specified syslog output syslog output emerg alert crit err warning notice info debug remote A B C D An example of configuring syslog to send all logs higher than notice to the remote log host IP address 10 1 1 1 SWITCH config syslog output notice remote 10 1 1 1 SWITCH config 260 Id 0900d80580221 7ed Operation Manual CLI System Logger Syslog 29 1 2 Syslog Output Level with a Priority Use the following commands to configure syslog messages depending on severity level output redirection and prioritized facility type generating the message Command Mode Function syslog output priority auth authpriv cron daemon kern local local2 locals local4 local5 local6 local7 lpr mail news syslog user uucp emerg alert crit err warning notice info loc
112. show taggingrule table Bridge Displays information of tagging rule table 14 2 2 Enhanced Tagging Profile An enhanced tagging profile contains a list of tagging rules that are assigned to ONT subscriber bridge ports Each upstream incoming packet is matched against each rule in list order The first rule that matches the packet is selected as the active rule and the packet is then treated according to that rule If enabled the operation performed in the downstream direction is the inverse of that performed in the upstream direction For one to one VLAN mappings the inverse is triv ially defined Multi to one mappings are possible however these are treated as follows e If the multi to one mapping results from multiple operation rules producing the same ANI side tag configuration then the first rule in the list will be used to define the inverse operation e Ifthe multi to one mapping results from Don t care fields in the filter being replaced with provisioned fields in the ANI side tags then the inverse is defined to set the cor responding fields on the ANI side with their lowest value Command enhtagprofile create NAME ITPID OTIPD 0 1 RULELIST Mode Bridge enhtagprofile lt 1 65535 gt create NAME ITPID OTIPD 0 1 RULELIST enhtagprofile modify 1 65535 TPID OTIPD 0 1 RULELIST enhtagprofile delete lt 1 65535 gt Function Creates an enhanced tagging profil
113. status for name 0 Public 1 Private 0x20 Anonymous CID blocking ACR 0x40 0x80 not used is set to 0 0 63 call waiting features the bit position values are 0x01 Call waiting 0x02 Caller ID Announcement 0x04 0x80 not used is set to 0 0 255 call processing features the bit position values are 0x0001 3way 0x0002 Call transfer 0x0004 Call hold 0x0008 Call park 0x0010 Do not disturb 0x0020 Flash on Emergency Service call Flash is to be pro cessed during an Emergency Service call 0x0040 Emergency Service originating hold determines if a call clearing is to be performed on an on hook during and Emergency Service call 0x0080 6way 0x0100 0x8000 not used is set to 0 0 15 call presentation features the bit position values are 0x0001 Message Waiting Indication Splash Ring 0x0002 Message Waiting Indication Special Dial tone 0x0004 Message Waiting Indication Visual Indication 0x0008 Call Forwarding Indication 0x0010 0x8000 not used is set to 0 0 3 direct connect features the bit position values are 0x01 direct connect feature enabled 0x02 dial tone feature delay option LINE profile name Modifies application service profile table entry Modifies profile name of application service profile table INDEX index of profile LINE descriptive name for profile handling Deletes application service profile table INDEX index
114. the VLAN Configuration Command Mode Function show vlan VLANS Privileged Shows the configuration for specific VLAN or for all VLANs Config VLANS enter VLAN ID Bridge Id 0900d80580221 ef7 171 VLAN Operation Manual CLI Command Mode Function show port in vlan PORTS Privileged Lists ports VLAN Config PORTS enter the port number e g 1 1 1 48 0 1 1 2 1 Bridge show host vian Config Shows assignment of host to a VLAN 172 1d 0900d80580221ef7 Operation Manual CLI Quality of Service QoS 17 Quality of Service QoS The hiX 5750 R2 0 provides QoS functions for traffic management QoS is a useful function to provide the users more convenient services for the network traffic This function is very good serviceable in order to prevent an overloading the delaying or the failing of traffic through the setting of specific priorities for the different kinds of traffic flows QoS can basically give a priority for a specific traffic or limit it When data are pro cessed they are usually supposed to be processed in a defined time order like first in first out It is possible to use strict priority and WRR Weighted Round Robin for queuing The case that certain data are processed not immediately might result in the loss of all data in case of overloaded traffics However in case of an overloading situa tion the QoS of the traffic flows can determine the order of
115. the other interface Command Mode Function no mac Bridge Deletes the specified static address es from MAC table NAME enter the bridge name no mac NAME PORT enter the port number no mac NAME PORT XX XX enter the MAC address no mac NAME PORT XX XX XX XX XX XX 13 5 3 Showing MAC Table Information Up to 32k CXU_VR of MAC addresses can be registered in a MAC table Hence it is difficult to find out the information you need at one sight When the show command is executed only a small number of addresses will be displayed If the line Id 0900d8058023fad7 155 MAC Operation Manual CLI more appears press any key to search more After you have found the needed information press a to go back to the system prompt without displaying the other table entries Command Mode Function show mac vlan NAME Exec Shows MAC addresses selected by VLAN MAC address Config learned at IU only are invisible show mac vlan NAME PORT Bridge NAME VLAN name PORT port number show mac vlan NAME PORT detail Bridge Shows MAC table details with ONU index selection by VLAN MAC addresses learned at IU only are invisible NAME VLAN name PORT port number 156 Example of showing the MAC address of destination specified port number VLAN ID and time the address is registered in table The first table entry is the switches own MAC address and hence is the permission st
116. there is only one CXU in the system the new load will be automatically activated and committed if the download process was successful and the load is valid After reboot by operator command the committed load is running and will be used also for later reboots by reset or cold starts When something goes wrong e g board crash the CXU will disable the wrong load and will reboot automatically with the former good load 2 Inan OLT with two CXUs that provides redundancy measures one CXU is in active mode and the other one is in standby mode In this case the download process replaces at first the active load of the standby CXU i During the load download process the standby CXU performs automatically two resets After the download process has been finished load and configuration the following tasks must be performed in order to update both CXU boards with the same load Check with show table shelf command the software consistence on both CXU boards The new load on both boards must be identical stored backup Reset the standby CXU to pre activate the new software see 8 2 Resetting a CXU Check the consistence of the software loads on this board identical running stored backup loads Reset the active CXU to initiate a switch over that makes the standby CXU to the active one causes the upgrade of the other CXU by now in standby mode and activates the new software on it Check the consistence of both boards so
117. to route traffic between the VLANs These VLANs improve performance because they reduce the propagation of local traffic and they improve security benefits because they completely separate traffic The IEEE 802 1q based ports on the switches support simultaneous tagged and untagged traffic An 802 1q port is assigned to a default port VLAN ID PVID and all untagged traffic is assumed to belong to the port default PVID Thus the ports participating in the VLANs accept packets bearing VLAN tags and transmit them to the port VLAN ID VLAN configuration is described in the chapters e Configuring a VLAN Enabling a Host VLAN e Assigning the VLAN to Bridgeports e Assigning the VLAN to DHCP PPPoE Provider e Assigning the VLAN to Default Gateway Enabling of Multicast Permission for the VLAN Checking the VLAN Configuration i For detailed information about the configuration of VLAN scenarios using the enhanced MAC modes see chapter 13 1 Setting the GPON MAC Mode Configuring a VLAN Command Mode Funciton vlan create VLANS MODE Bridge Creates new VLAN by assigning VLAN ID VLANS enter the number of VLAN ID from 1 to 4093 MODE enter number of enhanced MAC mode 1 MAC mode 1 N 1 changing VLAN per ctag 2 MAC mode 2 1 1 cross connect by adding outer tag service tag per c tag default no vlan VLANS Deletes the specified VLAN i Before deleting a VLAN all ports must be removed vlan name
118. used for commu nication with MGC soft switch is supported Table indices are the IP interface of the ONT first index and the TCP UDP port second index 12 2 1 IP Host Configuration Table Creating Deleting an IP Host Configuration Table The IP host s config data table contains configuration data of IP interfaces There is one table entry per ONT card that is providing IP host services Use the following commands to create or delete an IP host s config data table by means of the interface index or the ONT address Command Mode Function create voip ip host config data table NDEX Config Creates a VoIP IP host config table ee a ERU AER D EN INDEX Interface index of ONT which provides IP host services create voip ip host config data table addr ADDRESS ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port ONT ID ONT slot delete voip ip host config data table INDEX Deletes a VoIP IP host config table delete voip ip host config data table addr ADDRESS Configuring the IP Host Parameters Use the following commands to configure the VoIP options of ONT interfaces that provide IP host services e g servises based on TCP and UDP Command Mode Function modify voip ip host ip options NDEX OPTIONS Config Modifies IP related options modify voip ip host addr ip options ADDRESS OPTIONS INDEX interface index of ONT card which provides IP host services ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port ONT ID ONT slot OPTIONS this attribute is a bit field th
119. v1 v2c uses a community name for authentication without encryption 256 Id 0900d8058025b404 Operation Manual CLI SNMP Command Mode Function snmp access GROUP v1 v2c READ VIEW WRITE VIEW NOTIFY VIEW Config no snmp access GROUP Configures MIB view to permit for appropriate group in SNMP v1 or SNMP v2c GROUP group name v1 v2c set the security level according to SNMP version READ VIEW set a read access view WRITE VIEW set a write access view NOTIFY VIEW set a notify access view Deletes the granted access of specified SNMP group to SNMP view records Use the following command to verify the permission of groups Command Mode Function show snmp access Privileged Shows the granted access of SNMP group to a specific Config SNMP view record 28 7 Configuring an SNMP Trap Host An SNMP trap is a change of state message initiated by the SNMP agent It alerts or notifies the SNMP manager about certain problems or important events of the SNMP agent If SNMP trap was configured the system transmits pertinent information to the network management program that is running on the so called trap host The hiX 5750 R2 0 supports the configuration of up to 16 SNMP trap hosts 28 7 1 SNMP V1 V2 Trap Host In order to configure a trap host receiving SNMP v1 v2c traps use the following com mands The IP address of trap host is a
120. version 4 Router Set the BGP version to match a neighbor 4 Neighbor s BGP version 200 Id 0900d80580212815 Command Mode Function neighbor A B C D WORD attribute unchanged Router Advertises unchanged BGP attributes to the ighbor A B C D WORD attrib hanged h I next hop ARA aa neighbor A B C attribute unchanged as path next hop med as path AS path attribute neighbor A B C D WORD attribute unchanged as path next hop med med MED attribute Multi Exit Discriminator used for best path selection neighbor A B C D WORD attribute unchanged as path med next hop next hop Next hop attribute neighbor A B C D WORD attribute unchanged as path next hop med HEC the no parameter MITSIPUS commanditg disable this function neighbor A B C D WORD attribute unchanged med as path I next hop neighbor A B C D WORD attribute unchanged med as path next hop neighbor A B C D WORD attribute unchanged next hop as path med neighbor A B C D WORD attribute unchanged next hop as path med neighbor A B C D WORD attribute unchanged next hop med as path neighbor A B C D WORD timers connect lt 0 65535 gt Router Configures neighbor router to transmit routing information 0 65535 connect timer in seconds Use the no parameter with this command to clear the timers for a specific neighbor neighbor A B C D WORD
121. xdsl GEMPORTS 1 8 security mode off on eth Ethernet port voip internal voice over IP interface eids1ll E1DS1 leased line interface xdsl xDSL port GEMPORTS interface address OLT slot GPON port ONU ID ONU slot ONU port 1 8 priority ID of GEM port off no encryption on AES encryption 82 d 0900d80580257cd9 Operation Manual CLI Ports Command Mode Function gemport eth I voip etds1ll xdsl GEMPORTS 1 8 Bridge Configures alarm severity profile on GEM port modify alarm severity index lt 1 10 gt eth Ethernet interface E M voip internal voice over IP interface modify gemport alarm severity index eth voip e1ds1ll eidsill E1DS1 leased line interface xdsl GEMPORTS 1 8 1 10 xdsl xDSL port modify gemport eth voip eids1ll xdsl GEMPORTS GEMPORTS interface address OLT slot GPON port ONU 1 8 alarm severity index 1 10 ID ONU slo ONU port 1 8 priority ID of GEM port 1 10 severity table index gemport eth voip e1ds1ll xdsl GEMPORTS 1 8 Bridge Enables disables loopback on GPON encapsulation method modify loopstate loopback no loopback board n eth Ethernet interface modify gemport loopstate eth voip e1ds1ll I xdsl voip internal voice over IP interface GEMPORTS 1 8 loopback no loopback eidsill E1DS1 leased line interface
122. 0 Configures port alarm severity for CXU 1 10 severity index 10 4 2 Large Reach Ethernet LRE Port Command Mode Function port Ire PORTS enable I disable I test port Ire PORTS description LINE port Ire PORTS alarm severity profile 1 10 Bridge Enables disables a LRE port on CXU PORTS port number OLT slot OLT port test configures a port as test port Enables LRE port specific description LINE max number of characters is 100 Configures LRE port specific alarm severity profile index 1 10 profile index d 0900d80580257cd9 85 Ports Operation Manual CLI 10 4 3 Type and Negotiation Command Mode Function port type POATS electrical optical Bridge port nego PORTS force auto Configures the port type PORTS port number OLT slot OLT port electrical internal electrical mode default optical external optical SFP Configures the auto negotiation of specified port force auto negotiation disabled auto auto negotiation enabled fi Auto nego is activated in 10 100BASE TX ports by default Even when auto nego was configured the transmit rate or the duplex mode of the con nected equipment can be changed furthermore i It is impossible to configure auto nego in 100BASE FX ports external optical SFP 10 4 4 Link Discovery Command port link discovery chassis PORTS A B C
123. 00s 231 IP Anti Spooflng aser terram red kem ee Work eg E a a doo US ace 232 Global Enabling of IP Anti Spoofing liliis 232 Enabling IP Anti Spoofing for Port l l 232 Ghiecking lie Statils d ce sod cena piu apti cM QC DRE Pie 232 Configuring an IP Anti Spoofing VLAN Profile 4 232 Link Aggregation 3 3 age scout SEC Ren denen wea RR e ceo ode 233 Selecting Distribution Method 0000 eee eee 233 Configuring a static Port TUNK c oum sire it prend Este weer Sue 233 Forming a fixed Trunk Group of Ports 000000 eee eee 233 Checking Port Trunk Configuration liliis esee 234 Coniguing EAGP ccc us acra tritam ebur usw mer DEEE on denen 234 1d 0900d80580251467 Operation Manual CLI 24 3 1 24 3 2 24 3 3 24 3 4 24 3 5 24 3 6 24 3 7 24 3 8 24 3 9 24 3 10 25 25 1 25 2 25 3 25 4 25 5 25 5 1 25 5 2 25 6 25 7 25 8 26 27 27 1 2 27 3 27 4 27 5 27 6 28 28 1 28 2 28 3 28 4 28 5 28 6 28 7 28 7 1 28 7 2 28 7 3 28 8 28 9 29 29 1 29 1 1 Enabling Disabling LACP 3233 cia opo R SERERE ERE Re 234 Configuring Packet Routen 29b RR RR Ip piee Ei 4 PLI 235 Configuring the Member Ports llllllllllel leere 236 Configuring Operating Mode of Member Port 0 00055 236 Configuring LAGP Prioiily ruere recor bad heeds oe ace 236 Deciding Member State of LACP Port 00000 cece eaeee 237 Configuring LACPDU Trans
124. 0266d 237 Link Aggregation Operation Manual CLI fi The values of transmission rate are long 30 sec and short 1 sec 24 3 8 Configuring Admin Key of Member Port and Aggregator All member ports in one aggregator have the same key values In order to make an aggregator consisted of specified member ports configure a key value that is different from key values of other ports Command Mode Function lacp port admin key PORTS lt 1 15 gt Bridge Configures key value of member port on CXU PORTS port number 1 15 port key value no lacp port admin key PORTS Deletes key value of selected member port on CXU lacp iu SLOT port admin key PORTS lt 1 15 gt Bridge Configures key value of member port on IU PORTS Select port number s Slot Port 1 15 select the port key value SLOT select IU slot number no lacp iu SLOT port admin key PORTS Deletes key value of selected member port on CXU lacp iu SLOT aggregator admin key AGGREGATIONS lt 1 15 gt Bridge Configures the admin key of IU aggregator SLOT IU slot number AGGREGATIONS aggregator numbers 0 4 1 15 admin key value default 1 no lacp iu SLOT aggregator admin key AGGREGATIONS Deletes the admin key of IU aggregator i The key value of all ports is 1 by default Executing the no commands returns the key value to 1 24 3 9 Configuring Port Priority To configure the priority of an LACP member port use the following commands
125. 1 CAS events LINE the whole line up to 64 characters allowed will be taken as profile name spaces included modify voip voip rtp profile table entry 1 16 LOCPORTMIN LOCPORTMAX 0 255 0113 011 011 011 LINE Modifies RTP profile table entry delete voip voip rtp profile table entry 1 16 Deletes RTP profile table entry 12 1 2 VoIP Media Profile The media profile table contains entries for the connection to the media gateway con troller soft switch that controls the signaling messages Use the following commands to configure the media profile table Command Mode Function create voip voip media profile table entry 1 16 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 162 11213141255 onl off 0 999 LINE modify voip voip media profile table entry 1 16 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 162 11213141255 onl off 0 999 LINE modify voip voip media profile table entry name 1 16 LINE modify voip voip media profile pstn protocol variant 1 16 0 999 delete voip voip media profile table entry 1 16 Config Creates media profile table 1 16 table entry index Specified codec selection as defined in RFC 3551is 0 PCMU Silence suppression O off 1 0n 0 1 1st order 0 1 2nd order 0 1 3rd order 0 1 4th order 1 16 pointer to the RTP profile Voice service prof announce type 1 silence 2
126. 16 profile index LINE profile name up to 64 characters spaces included modify voip mgc config data table primary mgc 1 16 Config Modifies primary MGC soft switch controlling the signal mes LINE sages 1 16 profile index LINE the name IP address or resolved name CR the whole line will be taken as name spaces included modify voip mgc config data table secondary mgc 1 16 Modifies secondary MGC soft switch LINE modify voip mgc config data table termination id base Config Modifies base string for the H 248 physical termination ID 1 16 LINE 1 16 profile index LINE up to 25 chars will be taken as termination ID base spaces included 12 7 2 MGC User Data Use the following commands to modify MGC user data 136 1d 0900d8058023f697 Operation Manual CLI Voice over IP Command Mode Function modify voip mgc user data mgc pointer INDEX 1 16 Config Modifies pointer to VoIP MGC config data table entries 7 INDEX index of user data table POTS PPPT modify voip mgc user data addr mgc pointer ADDRESS ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port ONT ID port number POTS lt 1 16 gt port number 1 max 1 16 table entry index modify voip mgc user data user url INDEX LINE Config Modifies user URL modify voip mgc user data addr user url ADDRESS LINE INDEX index of user data POTS PPPT ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port ONT ID port number POTS port number 1 ma
127. 23f449 49 System Basic Configuration Operation Manual CLI 4 2 3 Displaying Consumption Ratio of System Memory show memory bgp isis dhcp imi igmp lib nsm ospf rip Command Mode Function show memory Privileged Displays memory information Config Displays memory information of bgp BGP router dhcp DHCP igmp IGMP imi integrated management interface isis IS IS router lib libraries nsm network services module ospf OSPF router rip RIP router 4 2 4 Displaying the Fan Status Command Function Mode show status fan Privileged Config Displays hardware status 4 2 5 Displaying Running Processes The following show command displays information about the running processes on hiX 5750 R2 0 that may be very helpful to manage the NE Command Mode Description show process Privileged Shows information of the running processes Config Example SWITCH config show process USER PID CPU MEM VSZ RSS TTY STAT START TIME COMMAND root 1 0 0 0 1 1448 596 S Oct07 0 01 init 3 root 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 SW Oct07 0 00 keventd root 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 SWN Oct07 0 00 ksoftirqd CPUO0 root 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 SW Oct07 0 00 kswapd root 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 SW Oct07 0 00 bdflush root 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 SW Oct07 0 00 kupdated root 7 0 0 0 0 0 0 SW Oct07 0 00 mtdblockd root 63 0 0 0 0 0 0 SWN Oct07 0 00 jffs2 gcd mta2 root 70 0 0 0 0 0 0 SWN Oct0
128. 2D3035 Vendor Id ASCII CIGG Vendor Id HEX 0x43494747 Vendor product code 0 Pptp index 201 Physical index 270369 Alarmseverity profile 1 Onu is detected 1 true Adminstate 1 ONU unlocked Operstate 2 ONU disabled Security option s AES encryption implemented Security mode 0 no encryption selected Key length 128 bit Key switching time BackupOption unknown Backup disabled Battery backup option 5 min Battery backup mode OWFRPNE RB Traffic management option cellRateControlled Powerlevel Pvid Number of Fans 0 Distance 28 metre User data 2 1 1_G25 a Found 1 entrie s 9 7 Setting the Number of Fans Command Mode Function modify onu fans ADDRESS 0 2 Config Sets the number of ONU fans ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port ONU ID 0 2 fan number 0 without fan 1 fan unit equipped with 1 fan 2 fan unit equipped with 2 fans 72 d 0900d80580257da6 Operation Manual CLI ONU Equipment 9 8 Synchronizing the ONU Time Command Mode Function synchronize onu time ADDRESS Config Synchronize the start time of all monitoring managed entities of this ONU with the reference time of the OLT All ONU s performance data are reset ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port ONU ID 9 9 Reset an ONU Command Mode Function reset onu ADDRESS ignore operstate Config Resets a certain ONU ADDRES
129. 3 4 3 Disabling the Enhanced MAC Mode of VLAN To disable the enhanced mode of a VLAN use the following command Command Mode Function no enhanced mode VLANIDS PORT Bridge Deletes an entry in the VLAN mapping table VLANIDS specify VLANs PORT slot port ONU ID ONU slot ONU port 13 4 4 Checking VLAN Mapping Information Command Mode Function show vidmap database subscriber VLANID Config Shows information of all or specified VLAN Bridge database shows all configured VID map table entries subscriber shows the translation for the subscriber depend ing on the VLAN table 13 4 5 Modifying the MAC Mode of VLAN Use the following commands to read or modify the MAC mode parameters of a VLAN Id 0900d8058023fad7 153 MAC Operation Manual CLI Command Mode Function macmode VLANID MODE Bridge Defines a behavior per VLAN based on configurations defined by the previous prioprofilemap command Modifies the MAC mode value of specified VLAN VLANID enter the VLAN ID MODE number of MAC mode to be new set for the specified VLAN 12 N 1 bridge mode 2 2 1 1 VLAN cross connect mode with tagged uses frames show macmode VLANID Config Shows the current MAC mode of specified VLAN ID Bridge 13 5 13 5 1 Changing a VLAN to Enhanced MAC Mode Perform the following tasks in order to change the MAC mode of VLAN 1 Check if th
130. 5701 002 I hiX5701 003 I Config Creates specific entries ONU type see list above hiX5701 004 hiX5702 001 hiX5703 001 hiX5703 003 ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port ONU ID hiX5704 001 hix5705 001 hix 5705 003 g25a 001 SERIAL NUMBER serial number of the ONU ONT as g25a 002 g25a 003 g25c 001 g25e 001 g25e 002 hexadecimal number 8 signs if all is ASCII 12 signs if the g50a 001 g50a 002 g80rg 001 first 4 are ASCII and the remaining are HEX 16 signs if all is hiX5709 001 hiX5709 003 HEX must be set in this mode with or without password ADDRESS configured SERIAL NUMBER PASSWD Registration ID of the ONU ONT max 10 signs nopassword password PASSWD discover REG ID REG ID registration ID of the ONU ONT max 10 signs 1 10 on off O1 1 1 444 must be set in this mode lt 0 1099560000 gt lt 0 1099560000 gt lt 0 1099560000 gt 1 10 alarm severity profile lt 0 1099560000 gt lt 0 1099560000 gt 0 1099560000 LINE on off GPON battery backup on off If off no related alarms battery missing battery failure battery low are generated 0 1 security mode 0 no encryption When encryption for the whole ONT is switched off the NE automatically switches off the encryption for the affected GEM ports 1 AES encryption of downstream payload 1 444 time for periodical key switchover in units of 5 minutes from 1 5 minutes up to 444 37 hours The bandwidth value
131. 604 247 Broadcast Storm Control Operation Manual CLI 26 Broadcast Storm Control The hiX 5750 R2 0 system supports BCSC A broadcast storm is the result of an over loading situation in which broadcast packets occupy the major part of network s band width causing an unstable network Such a broadcast storm may be occurred by hardware malfunctions or a wrong network configuration at which for example informa tion of a routing protocol regularly transmitted from the router are wrong recognized by a system that does not support this protocol BCSC operates with counting the broad cast packets per second and discarding packets which exceed the configured limit Besides BCSC the system can also control of MC or DLF destination lookup fail storms The storm control configuration will be equally applied to all VLANs To enable disable storm control or to check its state use the following commands Common Mode Function storm control broadcast multicast dif RATE PORTS Bridge no storm control broadcast multicast dlf PORTS Enables broadcast MC or DLF storm control respectively in a port with a user defined rate RATE values from the range unit packet s FE 1 262142 GE 1 2097150 PORTS port number Disables specified storm control show storm control PORT Exec Config Bridge Displays a configuration of storm control PORT port number fi By defaul
132. 6ef1 Operation Manual CLI XDSL 11 5 Alarm Profile 11 5 1 Creating Deleting a Profile Command Mode Function xdsl add alarm config profile PROFILE Bridge Creates the new alarm config profile PROFILE enter the profile name xdsl delete alarm config profile PROFILE Deletes the alarm config profile xdsl duplicate alarm config profile SOURCE PROFILE Bridge Duplicates the alarm config profile NEW PROFILE SOURCE PROFILE enter source profile name NEW PROFILE enter new profile name 11 5 2 Configuration Command Mode Function xdsl alarm config profile PROFILE thres lofs thres loss Bridge Configure the alarm threshold profile thres Iprs thres lols thres es thres ses thresuas 0 900 PROFILE enter the profile name thres lofs loss of frame seconds alarm threshold thres loss loss of signal seconds alarm threshold thres Irps loss of power seconds alarm threshold thres lols loss of link seconds alarm threshold thres es errored seconds alrm threshold thres ses severely errored seconds alarm thresholdthres uas unavailable seconds alarm threshold 0 900 value in seconds xdsl alarm config profile PROFILE opstate notify Enable disable the the state notification initfailure notify enable disabe PROFILE enter the profile name opstate notify operation state notification initfailure notify init failure notification 11 5 3 Checking of Profi
133. 7 0 00 jffs2 gcd mta4 root 143 0 0 0 0 0 0 SW Oct07 0 00 bcmDPC root 147 0 0 0 0 0 0 SW Oct07 0 00 bcmCNTR 0 root 148 0 0 0 0 0 0 SW Oct07 0 00 bcmTX root 149 0 0 0 0 0 0 SW Oct07 0 00 bcmLINK 0 root 150 0 9 0 0 0 0 SW Oct07 80 54 bcmCNTR 1 SWITCH config 4 3 Checking the System Access To prevent trouble or if there is any problem with the system access the operator cannot get only information about the access status of system but he can also check if the 50 1d 0900d8058023 449 Operation Manual CLI System Basic Configuration 4 3 1 network configuration is correct to reach the system This chapter describes the required CLI commands in following sections e Checking the Network Connection e Tracing Packet Routes e Checking Telnet User Displaying Hosts Accessing the System Checking the Network Connection The ping command can be executed to verify if the system is correctly connected to the network In IP networks this command uses ICMP Internet control message protocol echo messages to notify a fault situation and to provide information about the location where the IP packets were received from Command Mode Function ping IP_ADDRESS Privileged Performs ping test to check network status IP ADDRESS destination address i Press keys to stop the ping process 4 3 2 Tracing Packet Routes To identify the route used for host to host connectiv
134. 92 1 ADSL AnnexB bin 1 64 related to US and bin 65 256 related to DS direction For G 992 3 G 992 4 and G 992 5 it is defined in the corresponding recommendations xdsl line config profile PROFILE Bridge Enables Disables usage of the subcarrier mask subcarrier mask use enable disable PROFILE enter the profile name SNR Magin Values Command Mode Function xdsl line config profile PROFILE down max snr mgn down min snr mgn down tgt snr mgn up max snr mgn up min snr mgn up tgt snr mgn 0 310 Bridge Configures max min SNR margin on xDSL line PROFILE enter the profile name down max snr mgn max downstream SNR margin down min snr mgn min downstream SNR margin down tgt snr mgn target downstream SNR margin the tranceiver must achieve up max snr mgn max upstream SNR margin up min snr mgn min upstream SNR margin up tgt snr mgn target upstream SNR margin the tranceiver must achieve 0 310 value from 0 31 dBm in steps of 0 1dBm xdsl line config profile PROFILE vtuc down snr mgn vtuc up snr mgn vtur down snr mgn vtur up snr mgn 0 310 Bridge Sets SNR margin for rate downshift upshift on xDSL line PROFILE enter the profile name vtuc down snr mgn SNR margin for rate downshift VTU C upstream vtuc up snr mgn SNR margin for rate upshift VTU C upstream vtur down snr mgn SNR margin for rate downshift VTU R downstream tur up snr mgn SNR mar
135. B C D Router Configure neighbor router with which the routing information will be exchanged A B C D IP address of a neighboring router Use the no parameter with this command to disable the specific router 208 fi Sending of routing updates on specified interfaces can be disabled by configuring the passive interface command Id 0900d80580212815 Operation Manual CLI IP Routing 21 3 3 Configuring of Static Routes The route command makes a static route only inside RIP This command is mostly used for debugging purposes If you are not familiar with RIP protocol you would better create a static route and redistribute it in RIP using the redistribute static command Command Mode Function route A B C D M Router Adds a static RIP route A B C D M specifies the IP address prefix and length Use the no parameter with this command to disable this function Default Route A router can generate a default route and inject it in the network If no other routes qualify this one is used You can force an Autonomous System AS boundary router to generate a default route into an RIP routing domain Whenever you specifically configure redistribution of routes into an RIP routing domain 21 3 4 Redistributing of Routing Information the router automatically becomes an AS boundary router However an AS boundary router does not by default generate a default route into the RIP rout
136. Bridge Sets the priority of the CXU switch in LACP function 1 65535 switch system priority no lacp system priority 236 Clears the priority of the configured CXU switch Id 0900d8058020266d Operation Manual CLI Link Aggregation Command Mode Function lacp iu SLOT system priority lt 1 65535 gt no lacp iu SLOT system priority Bridge Sets switch system information needed by LACP ex SystemID for IU SLOT select IU slot number 1 65535 switch system priority Clears the priority of the configured IU switch The priority of the system is set to 32768 0x8000 by default After clearing the operating mode the priority of the member ports return to this default value 24 3 6 Deciding Member State of LACP Port By default LACP ports are potentially member of a configured dynamic LAG However these ports could operate as well as independent ports without being aggregatable to an LAG These independent ports cannot be used as trunk port by the system Use the following commands to configure if a member port is aggregatable or not aggregatable individual Command Mode Function lacp port aggregation PORTS Bridge Designate whether a member port of CXU is included in LACP or not aggregatable individual PORT select the member port should be included Default setting is aggregatable no lacp port aggregation PORTS Clears the config
137. ClockSourceAlarm 86 critical 01 Tue 13 Jun 2000 23 26 35 SyncSource 02 gponSyncClockSourceAlarm All values are decimals 58 Id 0900d8058025ae9c Operation Manual CLI Alarms Command Mode Function show alarm list reportingsourcetyp Privileged Displays the alarm list of the system physical entity interface vcctp I vlan bridgeport erpdomain Config physical_entity only alarms from physical entity show alarm list cxu show alarm list iu addr SLOT show alarm list gpon port ADDRESS show alarm list ont addr ADDRESS show alarm list ont card addr ADDRESS show alarm list oid show alarm list sync interface only alarms from interfaces vectp only alarms from VCC TP vlan only alarms from VLAN bridgeport only alarms from bridge port erpdomain only alarms from ERP domain Ethernet ring protection is not supported by GPON Displays CXU alarms Displays the alarms of a certain IU address IU and ONTs SLOT OLT slot of IU_GPON Displays the alarms with a certain GPON port address GPON line port and ONTs ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port Displays the alarms with a certain ONT address ONT and ONT cards ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port ONU ID Displays the alarms with a certain ONT card address ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port ONU ID ONU slot Displays alarm list of the system shown by OIDs Displays alarms which are synchronized by alarm m
138. Configuring the SNMP Agent 00 0c cece eee ee 255 Configuring an SNMP Group 000 0 cee eee eee 255 Configuring the SNMP MIB View 0 60 0c cee eee ee 256 Configuring the Access Policy for Group 00000e eevee 256 Configuring an SNMP Trap Host 000 0c eee eee eee 257 SNMP VT MP TEaDSHIOSE 22 tances be retia eor eb EP PERI 257 Displaying the SNMP Trap Configuration llle 258 Displaying and Resetting the SNMP Trap Counter 258 Checking the SNMP Configuration liliis eee aes 258 Disable SNMP 5 2 ueri eR a PER ER e REUS RUE E ded 258 System Logger Syslog eerca ters ism ek eed Sheen edad thawte a eens 260 Configuring the Syslog Output Level 20 00 00 cee eee eee 260 Syslog Output Level without a Priority 0000 cee aee 260 Id 0900d8058025f467 11 Operation Manual CLI 12 29 1 2 29 2 29 3 29 4 29 5 29 6 30 30 1 30 2 30 3 30 4 30 5 30 6 30 7 30 8 31 Syslog Output Level with a Priority 0 0 0 0 cece eee 261 Binding an IP Address sci coc n raria ee tee ES 261 Setting the local Facility Code llli 261 Verifying and Clearing the local Syslog File 0 00 262 Checking the Syslog Configuration liliis 262 Enabling Disabling of Syslog Function 0000 cease 262 Remote Montitorlrig io cc0iancccneea bebe ddd hema RR x e he Ree ene 263 Configures Number
139. D mask profile i The profile should not be in use by any line xdsl duplicate psd config profile SOURCE PROFILE Bridge Copies a PSD profile NEW PROFILE SOURCE PROFILE name origin PSD profile NEW PROFILE name new PSD profile 11 4 2 Configuration Command Mode Function xdsl psd config profile PROFILE add psd lt 1 4095 gt Bridge Adds one PSD breakpoint to the table 0 195 PROFILE enter the profile name 1 4095 index of subcarrier where breakpoint will be placed 0 195 PSD mask level 0 to 97 5 dBm Hz coded as 0 to 195 in steps of 0 5 dBm Hz xdsl psd config profile PROFILE delete psd index Bridge Deletes one PSD mask from the PSD mask profile by mask index 1 32 PROFILE enter the profile name 1 32 PSD mask index xdsl psd config profile PROFILE delete psd subcarrier Bridge Deletes one PSD mask from the PSD mask profile by subcarrier lt 1 4095 gt index PROFILE enter the profile name 1 4095 subcarrier index 11 4 3 Checking of Profiles Command Mode Function show xdsl psd config profile Privileged Shows all configured PSD profiles Config show xdsl psd config profile PROFILE ae Shows selected PSD profile show xdsl psd config info show xdsl psd config info PROFILE PROFILE enter the profile name Show all PSD profiles with assigned ports Shows PSD profile and its assigned ports PROFILE enter the profile name 120 1d 0900d8058025
140. DDRESS PASSWD Config Modifies the discover mode for the specified ONU ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port ONU ID PASSWD set the new password or registration ID as hexadeci mal max 20 signs for 10 bytes modify onu password ADDRESS set PASSWD delete Config Modifies the password for the ONU ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port ONU ID PASSWD password or registration ID of the ONU ONT max 20 signs for 10 bytes delete delete the set password modify onu securitymode ADDRESS 0 1 1 144 Config modify onu securityuserdata ADDRESS 12811921256 Config modify onu adminstate ADDRESS unlock lock Config Modifies the administrative state of the specified ONU ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port ONU ID modify onu alarm severity profile ADDRESS 1 10 Config Modifies the alarm severity profile of the specified ONU ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port ONU ID 1 10 index alarm severity profile modify onu batterybackup ADDRESS on off Config Modifies the battery backup mode of the specified ONU ADDRESS slot port ONU ID Modifies the security mode of the specified ONU ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port ONU ID 0 1 security mode 0 no encryption When encryption for the whole ONT is switched off the NE automatically switches off the encryption for the affected GEM ports 1 AES encryption of downstream payload Modifies the security user data for the specified ONU ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port ONU
141. E destination file name inventory file Example SWITCH config upload cxu config 192 168 156 16 alf config SWITCH config FTP User Name onus SWITCH config FTP Password SWITCH config upload cxu config file alf config tar to server 192 168 156 16 complete Id 0900d8058023f449 45 System Basic Configuration Operation Manual CLI Timer Parameter upgrade timeout lt 25 65535 gt Command Mode Function upgrade set timeout cxu stb cxu iu remote config Privileged Sets upgrade option timeout value errorlog pm data label data snmp ftp timeout lt 25 65535 gt Config cpu set upgrade CXU timeout Stb cxu set upgrade standby CXU timeout iu set upgrade IU timeout remote set upgrade ONT timeout config set upgrade config timeout errorlog set upgrade error log timeout pm data set upgrade performance data timeout label data set upgrade label data timeout snmp set upgrade SNMP timeout ftp timeout set FTP timeout 25 65535 set FTP timeout value in sec upgrade timeout set upgrade timeout 25 65535 set upgrade timeout value in sec Checking the Upgrade Process Use the following commands to verify such data that are relevant for upgrade process show upgrade table show upgrade table SLOT show upgrade table mnemocode show upgrade table sapsjobs show upgrade sapsserverinfo show upgrade timeout values
142. HCP Configuration To check the current DHCP configuration use the following commands Command Mode Function show ip dhcp config show ip dhcp bridge BRIDGEPORTINDEX all Config Displays current DHCP configuration Displays a fixed IP entry BRIDGEPORTINDEX shows bridge port index all shows all entries default An example of viewing the DHCP configuration Id 0900d8058025c93a 181 DHCP and PPPoE Operation Manual CLI SWITCH config show ip dhcp config Begin of DHCP daemon s configuration no debug dhcp all no debug dhcp kernel no debug arp reply all ip arp reply flood ip dhcp bridge ip pppoe bridge ip dhcp option82 remote id 08 00 06 26 24 b3 ip dhcp option82 policy keep DHCP provider pool 2 ip dhcp provider simple indepent 1 0 11 2 ip dhcp provider vlan 501 2 501 3 192 168 51 56 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 192 168 51 10 End of DHCP provider pool PPPOE provider pool 2 ip pppoe provider test 3 0 7 End of PPPOE provider pool ip dhcp circuitid2 token R End of DHCP daemon s configuration SWITCH config 18 7 Checking and Clearing the DHCP Statistics To show or clear the statistics of sent and received packets use the following commands Command Mode Function show ip dhcp statistics Config Displays DHCP packet sent received statistics ip dhcp clear statistics Clear
143. LINE modify voip sip feature access codes profile table entry cids activate INDEX LINE modify voip sip feature access codes profile table entry cids deactivate NDEX LINE modify voip sip feature access codes profile table entry do not disturb activation NDEX LINE modify voip sip feature access codes profile table entry do not disturb deactivation NDEX LINE modify voip sip feature access codes profile table entry do not disturb pin change NDEX LINE modify voip sip feature access codes profile table entry emergency service number NDEX LINE modify voip sip feature access codes profile table entry intercom service NDEX LINE Config Modifies table entry cancel call waiting INDEX index of profile LINE new code for specified parameter size 0 5 Modifies table entry call hold Modifies table entry call park Modifies table entry cids activate Modifies table entry cids deactivate Modifies table entry do no not disturb activation Modifies table entry do no not disturb deactivation Modifies table entry do no not disturb pin change Modifies table entry emergency service number Modifies table entry intercom service Id 0900d8058023f697 139 Voice over IP Operation Manual CLI To show the feature access codes table use the following command Command Mode Function show voip s
144. M PM3 A unknown 0 end sSS S S S S S S 5525S SSS SS S535 S SSS SS SS SS SS SS SS ee ee SSS Se Se Se eI SWITCH config 4 1 5 Restarting the System Execute the reset command in Config mode to reboot the system manually after down loading a new system image from the TFTP FTP server or when a reboot is needed during installing or managing the system i Execute the write memory command see 4 1 1 Saving the Configuration to save anew configuration before rebooting the system Otherwise all changes will be lost Command Mode Function reset all Config Resets the system fi For information about restarting single cards see also Reset of Interface Unit Cards e Resetting a CXU 4 1 6 Restoring default Configuration i After reloading the configuration by executing the restore factory defaults command all previous configuration data are lost The NE access is only possible via console The system must be rebooted manually Command Mode Function Restore factory defaults Config Restores factory default configuration Example SWITCH config fsrestore factory defaults SWITCH config reset all SWITCH config Id 0900d8058023f449 47 System Basic Configuration Operation Manual CLI 4 1 7 Displaying the System Version and Startup Information Use one of the following commands to display system startup information
145. Manual CLI 21 2 11 Communities Communities are the most flexible way to implement routing policies BGP supports transmit policy distributing routing information Distributing routing information is operated based on not only community list but also IP address and AS route Commu nity list makes community according to each destination and routing policy is applied based on community standard It helps configure BGP speaker that distributes routing information A community is a destination group that shares some common attributes One destina tion can be belonged to more than one community An administrator can configure to which community the destination is belonged By default all destinations are configured to be in the internet community The other defined and well known communities are no export Do not distribute this route to exterior BGP neighbor routers no advertise either exterior or interior Do not distribute this route to neighbor routers local as Distribute this information to neighbor routers of low level AS located on the BGP united network Do not distribute it to exterior routers To create a community list use the following commands Command Mode Function ip community list WORD permit deny LINE Config Creates community list WORD specifies the community listname permit specifies the community to accept deny specifies the community to reject LINE ip community list 1 99 standard WORD p
146. Nokia Siemens S Networks wif SURPASS hiX 5750 R2 0 Operation Manual CLI Operation Manual CLI The information in this document is subject to change without notice and describes only the product defined in the introduction of this documentation This documentation is intended for the use of Nokia Siemens Networks customers only for the purposes of the agreement under which the document is submitted and no part of it may be used reproduced modified or transmitted in any form or means without the prior written permission of Nokia Siemens Networks The documentation has been prepared to be used by professional and properly trained personnel and the customer assumes full responsibility when using it Nokia Siemens Networks welcomes customer comments as part of the process of continuous development and improvement of the documentation The information or statements given in this documentation concerning the suitability capacity or performance of the mentioned hardware or software products are given as is and all liability arising in connection with such hardware or software products shall be defined conclusively and finally in a separate agreement between Nokia Siemens Networks and the customer However Nokia Siemens Networks has made all reasonable efforts to ensure that the instructions contained in the document are adequate and free of material errors and omissions Nokia Siemens Networks will if deemed necessary by Nokia Siemens N
147. ONT 0 65535 alloccated queue size in GEM block lengths Default value is 10 0 255 queue weight for the WRR algorithm used by the traffic scheduler Default value is 1 enabled enable back pressure operation default disabled disable back pressure operation TIME back pressure time duration in which the customer terminal temporarily suspends sending data in microseconds Default value is 0 0 65535 back pressure start threshold Default value is 8 0 65535 back pressure stop threshold Default value is 6 Note BackPressureStartThresh gt BackPressureStopThresh 10 3 3 Scheduling The traffic scheduler accommodates upstream GEM packets after priority queue and transfers the GEM packets toward the T CONT The following command shows table entries that are created automatically by the NE Command Mode Function show scheduler table list ADDRESS Bridge Displays traffic scheduler upstream table list with config data ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port ONU ID 10 4 Ethernet Port Configuration 10 4 4 CXU Ports Command Mode Function port cu PORTS enable disable test port cu PORTS description LINE port cu PORTS alarm severity profile 1 10 Bridge Enables disables a port on CXU PORTS port number OLT slot OLT port test configures a port as test port Enables port specific description LINE max number of characters is 10
148. ORT lt 1 4093 gt 1 100 Config no igmp subscriber 1 16 1 72 1 8 BRIDGEPORT lt 1 100 gt Configure an IGMP subscriber port 1 16 logical IU slot 1 72 IU port 1 8 ADSL VCC BRIDGEPORT bridge port specified by slot port VCC 1 4093 port based VLAN ID 1 1 00 package index Deletes an IGMP subscriber Assigning of Multicast Package Group To assign a package with multicast groups to the subscriber ports use the following command on Bridge configuration mode Command Mode Function bridgeport PORTS multicast packagegroup VCPKGGPR Bridge Configures multicast package group PORTS port number e g 1 1 1 48 2 20 MCPKGGPR multicast package group means no list Assigning of an IGMP Profile To assign an RFC related profiles to an ONU port use the following command Command igmp onu port rfc profile PORT RFCPROFILE no igmp onu port rfc profile PORT Mode Config Function Assigns a RFC related profile to an ONU port PORT ONU port address slot ink ONU ID slot port RFCPROFILE name of the RFC related profile Deletes a RFC related profile from ONU port Verifying the IGMP Subscribers To check an IGMP subscriber use the following command Command Mode Function show igmp subscriber Config Shows a list of enabled IGMP subscribers show igmp port groups BRIDGEPORT Config Displa
149. PORT cpu Rule No redirect to specified egress port no no action redirect no action mirror Rule No sending a copy to mirror monitoring port no no action mirror no action dscp lt 0 63 gt Rule No change of Changes DiffServ field no no action dscp no action cos lt 0 7 gt Rule No changes of 802 1p class of service no action cos lt 0 7 gt overwrite no action cos same as tos overwrite no no action cos no action ip prec lt 0 7 gt Rule No change of IP ToS precedence bits in the packet no action ip precsame as cos no no action ip prec 244 Id 0900d80580204604 Rule Changes P ToS precedence bits in the packet same as Operation Manual CLI Rules Command Mode Function no action bandwidth BANDWITH Rule No maximum allowed bandwidth no no action bandwidth no action vlan lt 1 4094 gt Rule No specifying of matched packet VLAN ID no no action vlan no action copy to cpu Rule No copy to CPU no no action copy to cpu no action counter Rule No rule action counter no no action counter no action untag Rule No rule action untag no no action untag Configuring of Action Parameters Use the following commands to specify the action parameters Command Mode Function action param vlan VLAN Rule Changes VLAN parameter VLAN VLAN ID action param cos 0 7 Rule Changes class of service IEEE 802 1p priority 0 7 1p priority value action param tos lt 0 7 gt
150. POTS PPPoE PPTP PSD PSTN PTC PVC PVID QoS RF RGW 270 Network Timing Reference Optical Distribution Network Optical Line Termination ONU Management and Control Interface Optical Network Terminal Optical Network Unit Operating System Open shortest Path first 1 Physical Contact 2 Personel Computer Pulse Code Modulation Product Identification Data Protocol Independent Multicast Protocol Independent Multicast Dense Mode Protocol Independent Multicast Sparse Mode Protocol Independent Multicast Source Specific Multicast Phase Lock Loop Physical Layer Operation Administration 1 Power Module 2 Performance Monitoring Optical Passive Network Plain Old Telephone Service Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet Point to Point Tunneling Protocol Power Spectral Density Public Switched Telephone Network Positive Temperature Coefficient Permanent Virtual Connection Port VLAN Identifier Quality of Service Radio Frequency Residential Gateway d 0900d80580240c85 Operation Manual CLI Abbreviations RIP RMON RP RSTP RTCP RTP R VLAN SAPS SBU SC SFP SFU SGMII SIP SNMP SNR STP SW T CONT TC TCP TDM TDMA TMN ToS TP TV UDP UNI UPC US VCC Routing Information Protocol Remote Monitoring Rendezvous Point Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Realtime Control Protocol Rapid Transport Protocol Routing VLAN System Application Program Software Single Business Unit Spheric
151. Port GAILLPIOfII6S ur co zbMEN cesar aiden tararsearersha ed 81 GEM Traffic Description Profiles liliis 81 GEM PONS o osuere heed ceed hed td ee ies 82 Forward Error Goftectloh uico RIcaSTQEReLr vb repe ed de 83 Traffic Management esas eee eee eee Rea E ee 84 Prionty Mapplhg ttr en Rache reta oes poe eder eve bd 84 QUCUING s sso aos bb dE ER kd de Sad S NR DER e qe eqs gd 84 ScliedblitYg 4 33 55 waved ometenat die awenesie die ete buf 85 Ethemet Port Gohfig latiOli ced as vecebied sac pert ane e une nie poi mcs 85 a BLI Im 85 Large Reach Ethernet LRE Port 000 000 eee eee eee 85 Type and Negollallon s xasts ea d nnt IE amp S ETPRIPRAe TERIS aa 86 EINK BISCOVOIY ipea top Re pr EPOR ues Y epp E Ede to dep s 86 E1 DS1 Port Configuration and Test 0 0 00 e eee eee 86 POTS Configuration and Test 0 0000 c cece eee 88 Id 0900d8058025f467 5 Operation Manual CLI 10 7 CATV Port Contiguration xs ua on ons tro ROSE R E RARE TE ES 89 10 8 Checking Port Configuration a esis see pe RE pep eee et oye 90 10 9 Port Statistics 2 chastened eckets tase sede ies add S pud Ea 91 10 9 1 Checking Port Statistics 5o esae eer me t Hea Peewee aes 91 10 9 2 Clearing Port Statistiessc so dee reper Peat puce ep Rd ews ae 92 10 10 Performance Monitoring sisse Rel ERR ER RR eA ends 93 10 10 1 Configuring the Threshold Profiles llle 93 10 10 2 Calculation Algorithms for PM Obje
152. RTS all Bridge Clears all recorded port statistics PORTS port number OLT slot OLT port all clears all information clear port statistics dot3 PORTS Clears all recorded port statistics clear port statistics ethernet PORTS Clears specified or all recorded port statistics clear port statistics avg pkt PORTS Clears specified or all recorded port statistics 10 10 Performance Monitoring Use the commands that are described in the following chapters to configure PM objects for ANI services There are GTC PM managed entities related to GEM port GAL Ether net ONU T CONT and PonPptp 10 10 1 Configuring the Threshold Profiles This profile contains threshold values for the performance monitoring parameters A default profile with index 1 always exist Command Mode Function create threshold profile wi GALETHDISCFRAMES GEMLOSTPACKETS GEMMISINSPACKETS GEMIMPAIREDBLOCKS 0 15 modify threshold profile 2 16 GALETHDISCFRAMES GEMLOSTPACKETS GEMMISINSPACKETS GEMIMPAIREDBLOCKS delete threshold profile 2 16 Config Creates a threshold profile with index GALETHDISCFRAMES threshold GAL Ethernet disc frames GEMLOSTPACKETS threshold GEM lost packets GEMMISINSPACKETS threshold GEM miss inserted packets GEMIMPAIREDBLOCKS threshold GEM impaired blocks 0 15 profile index Modifies a threshold profile 2 16 profile index De
153. Rule Changes IP ToS precedence bits in the packet 0 7 ToS value action param dscp 0 63 Rule Changes DiffServ 0 63 DiffServ value Example of Rule A rule should be created that matches VLAN ID 100 in downstream direction and sets the 1p priority of VLAN tag CoS value to 4 SWITCH SWITCH config rul SWITCH config rul SWITCH config rul SWITCH config rul SWITCH config rul SWITCH config rul SWITCH config rul rule Testrulel type cxu generic prio 2 match vlan 100 Leti Leti Lel LeeL el el el n m Testrul e Testrul Testrul Testrul Testrul Testrul Testrul e e e e e e config rule Testrulel create type cxu generic prio 2 match vlan 100 action cos 4 overwrite match flow downstream apply show rule profile Generic CXU rule match flow downstream action cos 4 overwrite SW Id 0900d80580204604 TCH config rule Testrule1 245 Rules Operation Manual CLI 25 6 Saving a Rule After configuring a rule it must be applied to the GPON Configured values will be checked and the rule will be activated within the system i Without using the apply command the rule configurations will be lost Command Mode Function apply Rule Saves rule and applies it to the GPON i Note the following information The system perf
154. S OLT slot GPON port ONU ID ignore operstate ignore operstate of ONU optional 9 10 Performing the ONU Selftest Command Mode Function selftest onu ADDRESS Config Triggers an ONU Selftest ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port ONU ID 9 11 Managing the Software Load The ONT stores 2 images One image is the active and committed load This load is cur rently running and will be used after a reset It is always available The second image is inactive It will be overwritten during a software download After successful download process the load is valid the new load is automatically activated and committed the images are swapped With the following commands this process can be further specified Command Mode Function modify onu setcommittedload ADDRESS stored inactive Config Sets the committed load of a line card running active not available activate ignore operstate ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port ONU ID ONU slot stored inactive commits the stored inactive load running active commits the running active load not available does not commit any load activate optional activate inactive load ignore operstate optional does not check the operstate modify onu activate inactive load ADDRESS Config Activates the inactive load of a line card ignore operstate ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port ONU ID ONU slot ignore operstate does not check the operstate 9 12 Checking the List o
155. S OLT slot GPON port ONU ID ONU slot ONU port gpon GPON port eth Ethernet port pots POTS port eids1ll E1 or DS1 leased line port xdsl xDSL port catv CATV port ces CES port test configures a port as test port port gpon eth I pots eidstll I xdsl ces PORTS Configures port alarm severity for alarm severity profile lt 1 10 gt 1 10 alarm severity profile index port gpon eth pots eidstll I xdsl catv ces PORTS Port specific description description L NE LINE text max number of characters is 100 clear port gpon eth I pots e1dstll I xdsl catv ces Clears port specific description PORTS description 78 Id 0900d80580257cd9 Operation Manual CLI Ports Command Mode Function gpon olt alarm ADDRESS lt 1 10 gt gpon ont alarm ADDRESS lt 1 10 gt Config Sets alarm severity profile for OLT interface ADDRESS OLT slot OLT port 1 10 alarm severity profile index Sets alarm severity profile for ONT ONU interface ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port ONU ID 1 10 alarm severity profile index 10 2 GPON Port Configuration This chapter is divided in the following sections T CONTs e DBA and Overbooking e GEM Port GAL Profiles GEM Traffic Description Profiles e GEM Ports Forward Error Correction 10 2 1 T CONTs A T CONT represents a logical connection group since it accommodates GEM packets The NE sets all bandwidth parameters accordi
156. S handling restart if S APS enabled All plugged units will be checked again against S APS configuration file content and if needed an upgrade with load activation automatic unit reset will be done restart noreset S APS handling restart without board All plugged units will be checked again against S APS configuration file content and if needed an upgrade will be done NO automatic load activation is per formed reload S APS configuration file will be reload if S APS is disabled Example SWITCH config download sapshandling create sapsserverinfo 172 18 104 252 usera asdf SAPS hiX5750R20 55 hix5750r20 55 012 timeout 20 seconds active command complete SWITCH config download sapshandling enable start upgrade script PID 4731 now command complete SWITCH config download sapshandling restart reset saps handling restarted with resettimeout 7200 seconds activestart upgrade script PID 4867 now 1d 0900d8058023f449 43 System Basic Configuration Operation Manual CLI 44 Downloading and Uploading of Software In order to guarantee a fail safe upgrade process the OLT stores two software images One image is the active and committed load that is currently running This load is always available and it will be used after a reset The second image is inactive It will be over written during a software download Depending on the number of equipped CXU boards there are two operation cases 1 If
157. Shows the attributes of operation state voice server status and SIP agent status for all user ports of specified ONT Use the following command to stop a running SIP user status request 148 1d 0900d8058023f697 Operation Manual CLI Voice over IP Command Mode Function clear get voip sip user status Exec Stops a running SIP user status request Config 12 8 7 Verifying SIP Error Codes To show SIP error codes use the following command Command Mode Function show sip error codes Exec Shows all possible error codes for SIP Config Id 0900d8058023f697 149 MAC Operation Manual CLI 13 1 Setting the GPON MAC Mode i Before changing the MAC mode the CXU must be unlocked and all interface units IU GPON IU_1x10G IU 10x1G must be locked Command Mode Function gpon mac mode vid mac enhanced mac Bridge Configures the GPON MAC mode all IUs must be locked vid VLAN mode mapping of VLANs to GEM ID is configured down stream and upstream by the outer tag VLAN translation between subscriber VLANs and service based VLANs is not possible mac MAC mode downstream mapping of MAC address to GEM ID is learned from upstream frames VLAN translation between sub scriber VLANs and service based VLANS is possible enhanced mac The enhanced MAC functionality supports 1 1 VLAN cross connect VLAN per customer and service and N 1 VLAN per service common for
158. T Command Mode Function gpon bamode ADDRESS staticba nsrdba Config Sets type of upstream bandwidth allocation on T CONT level provided by the OLT ADDRESS OLT slot OLT port staticba static BA nsrdba non status reporting dynamic BA 80 d 0900d80580257cd9 Operation Manual CLI Ports 10 2 3 GEM Port GAL Profiles The GAL profile of a GEM port can only be modified if such ONTs MDU cards which are using it were set in admin state locked or they are offline The command parameter priority ID 1 8 is an internalal index to address GEM ports on an interface By default packets with a higher 1p priority will be forwarded over a GEM port with higher or equal priority ID than packets with lower 1p priority Command Mode Function gemport eth voip e1ds1Il xdsl GEMPORTS 1 8 modify gal profile 1 16 Bridge Configures GEM adaption layer profile eth Ethernet interface modify gemport gal profile eth voip e1ds1ll xdsl GEMPORTS 1 8 1 16 voip internal voice over IP interface eids1ll E1DS1 leased line interface xdsl xDSL port modify gemport eth voip e1ds1ll xdsl GEMPORTS 1 8 gal profile 1 16 GEMPORTS OLT slot GPON port ONU ID ONU Slot ONU port 1 8 priority ID of GEM port 1 16 profile table index The following GAL profiles are related to a GEM IW TP One default profil
159. T OLT slot of the IU GPON optional OLT PORT OLT port for E1DS1 interface optional Configuring Loopback Test Command modify loopback config e1ds1 remote ADDRESS no payload line Mode Config Function Modifies loopback configuration of remote E1DS1 interface ADDRESS remote address OLT slot GPON port ONU ID ONT slot ONT port no a device that is not capable of performing a loopback on the interface shall always return this as its value payload the received signal at this interface is looped through the device Typically the received signal is looped back for retransmission after it has passed through framing function of the device line The received signal at this interface does not go through the device minimum penetration but is looped back out 10 6 POTS Configuration and Test Command pots changedata PORTS lt 0 1 gt lt 0 255 gt lt 0 255 gt lt 0 1 gt RXGAIN TXGAIN lt 0 5 gt lt 0 2 gt lt 0 1 gt Mode Bridge Function POTS port configuration PORTS OLT slot GPON port ONU ID ONU slot ONU port 0 1 alarm reporting control O off 1 on 0 255 alarm reporting control interval 0 254 in minutes 255 for infinity 0 4 impedance 02600 Ohm 12900 Ohm 2 complex1 3 complex2 4 complex3 255 invalid ONU 0 1 transmission path O POTS full 1 POTS part time RXGAIN Rx Gain in 0 1 dB steps from 120 12 dB to 60 6 dB TXGAIN Rx Gain in 0 1 dB s
160. TCH The following commands display information about the configured severity of specific alarms Command Mode Function show alarm severity table SEVERITY TABLE INDEX Privileged Displays the specified alarm severity profile Config SEVERITY TABLE INDEX index of alarm severity table index show alarm severity ALARM ID range of 1 10 Displays the severity of a alarm ALARM ID alarm ID value Examples SWITCH config show alarm severity table 5 AlarmSeverity table for index Alarm ID Severity eee eee 01 1 02 1 24 2 25 2 SWITCH config show alarm severity 4 AlarmSeverities for Alarm ID 4 Id 0900d 8058025ae9c 57 Alarms Operation Manual CLI Severity Profile Index Severity 6 3 Displaying the Occured Alarms Command Mode Function show alarm list critical major minor warning cleared Privileged Displays the alarm list of the system Config without parameter all critical only critical alarms major only major alarms minor only minor alarms warning only warnings cleared only cleared alarms Example SWITCH4 show alarm list critical Alarm List ID Severity Prof Time and Date rep src type rep Name Idx src oe 86 critical 01 Tue 13 Jun 2000 23 26 35 SyncSource 01 gponSync
161. TID_RANGE select instance number 0 32 PORTS select the port number 0 200000000 path cost value no stp mst path cost MSTID RANGE PORTS Clears the configured path cost 22 4 3 Deciding the Port Priority If all conditions of two routes are the same the operator can decide the route by changing the port priority To configure the port priority use the following commands Command Mode Function stp mst port priority MSTID_RANGE PORTS lt 0 240 gt Bridge Configures port priority MSTID_RANGE select instance number 0 64 PORTS select the port number 0 240 port priority value in steps of 16 default 128 no stp mst port priority MST ID_RANGE PORTS Bridge Clears the configured port priority 22 4 4 Deciding the MST Region If MSTP is established decide which MST region the switch is going to belong to by con figuring the MST configuration ID The configuration ID contains region name revision VLAN map To set the configuration ID use the following commands Command Mode Function stp mst config id name NAME Bridge Sets the name for the region NAME enter name to give the MST region no stp mst config id name Deletes the name of region Id 0900d80580203028 225 Spanning Tree Operation Manual CLI Command Mode Function stp mst config id map lt 1 32 gt VLAN RANGE Bridge Configures the range of VLAN that is going to be grouping as a reg
162. To modify the metric value of connected routes use redistribute connected metric or route map The command offset list also affects connected routes 210 Id 0900d80580212815 Operation Manual CLI IP Routing Applying Offsets to Routing Metrics An offset list is the mechanism for increasing incoming and outgoing metrics to routes learned via RIP Offset list can be limited with an access list Command Mode Function offset list WORD in out 0 16 JFNAME Router Adds an offset to in and out metrics to routes learned through RIP WORD access list number or names in access list will be used for metrics of incoming advertised routes out access list will be used for metrics of outgoing advertised routes 0 16 offset used for metrics of networks matching the access list IFNAME specifies the interface to match Use the no parameter with this command to remove the offset list 21 3 6 Configuring the Administrative Distance Administrative distance is a feature used by the routers to select the path when there are two or more different routes to the same destination from two different routing protocols A smaller administrative distance indicating a more reliable protocol The router always selects route created by routing protocol of the smallest distance value Each network has its own features Therefore there is no general rule for distance configuration You should consider overall netw
163. ace 116 11 2 1 Creating Deleting a Profile 0 0000 cece ee 116 q4 2 2 CoOmiguratlon s terimni SEE RESP DERI PS a heter hes oe dS 116 112 3 Checking of Profiles 2 1 t maet Como caedes 117 11 3 INGICINPIONIE see ranra EDS LEE PRUNUS 118 11 3 14 Creating Deleting a Profile llle 118 WES CONMGUIALION cic ordo d per e a ie Propio auis 118 13 3 Checking of Profiles uiae tpa REC E Rc ERR hansen AUR RE 119 11 4 PSD Mask Protlessc civincta cing etteteaee nied de PUE ERN 119 11 4 4 Creating Deleting a Profile llle 119 1142 Configuration seses ania optem edd dee ex d eeu Ripa 120 11 439 Checking of Profiles fon os ated eet EE poked QE ete EE 120 11 5 AA PONO 155 ccncsdvedaearahe deu gna as bags t bp E 121 11 5 4 Creating Deleting a Profile llle 121 S2 obfigfalioD ssi isddaveiaasiieasesodedae dahon Giese iR ds 121 115 3 Checking of Profiles nxor ahees eng de RUE IRURE Pas 121 11 5 4 Verifying the Running XDSL Profiles 000000 2c aes 121 11 6 Configuring of LRE POTFt cast abce tetro me S reete Seo eds 122 11 6 14 Assigning xDSL Profiles to Port EFM 00000 eee eeee 122 116 2 ATM GOnfiguratil once io eet apes tantae ned eq bI ERR 122 1d 0900d80580251467 Operation Manual CLI 11 6 3 11 7 11 8 12 12 1 1211 12 1 2 12 1 3 122 12 2 1 12 2 2 12 2 3 12 3 12 3 1 12 3 2 12 4 12 4 1 12 4 2 12 5 12 5 1 12 5 2 12 6 12 6 1 12 6 2 12 6 3
164. ace Unit Command Mode Function bridgebase iu USLOT switching mode Bridge Configures bridgebase IU outertagging independent vian learning shared vlan learning vlan switching IUSLOT slot in main shelf vlan switching no learning of MAC addresses all frames are flooded in their VLANs switch key VLAN independent vlan learning bridge learns MAC addresses MAC addresses must be unique for all VLANs switch key MAC VLAN shared vlan learning bridge learns MAC addresses and all existing VLANs MAC addresses must be unique in one VLAN switch key MAC bridgebase iu USLOT bridgemode basic diffserv enhanced Bridge Configures general mode of the bridge that will influence some QoS features IUSLOT slot in main shelf bridgebase iu USLOT taggingmode single double Bridge Configures bridgebase IU tagging mode Double tagging affects only the GPON uplink interfaces not the hiG inter link interfaces to CXU IUSLOT slot in main shelf single bridgebase tagging mode single double bridgebase tagging mode double bridgebase iu USLOT residential mode on off Bridge Configures bridgebase IU residential mode IUSLOT slot in main shelf on no traffic between GPON links possible default off traffic between GPON links possible show bridgebase iu USLOT Privileged Displays bridge base for IUs on specified slot Config IUSLOT slot in main shelf Bridge 14 1 4 ONU Bri
165. acket types are used e Hello packets are used for functions capability announcement and neighbor discovery e LSP packets Link state PDU are used to distribute routing information between the IS IS notes e g network topology information and IP addresses e CSNP packets Complete Sequence Number PDU contains a list of all LSPs from the current link state database using to be ensure that all routers of LSPs have the same information and are synchronized e PSNP packets Partial Sequence Number PDU are used to request one or more LSPs and acknowledge their receiption The IS IS configuration is described in the following sections Basic Configuration of IS IS Router e Extended Router Configuration Id 0900d80580212815 Operation Manual CLI IP Routing e Configuring of Interface Parameters e Redistribution of Reachability Information e Checking the Configuration 21 4 4 Basic Configuration of IS IS Router To configure IS IS on the router perform the following tasks 1 Enabling IS IS Process on the Router 2 Configure Network Entity Titles NET for the Routing Process 3 Enabling IS IS Routing on the Interface Enabling IS IS Process on the Router Change to Router configuration mode and enable a IS IS routing process Command Mode Function router isis WORD Config Enables IS IS routing and enters router configuration mode WORD router name excluding spaces Remove IS IS routing instance with the no command
166. aded GPON link Use the following commands to clear the payload counters associated with the UNI ports Command Mode Function ces eth voip xdsl ADDRESS modify payload counter OLTADDRESS clear onu card ADDRESS modify payload counter OLTADDRESS clear onu ADDRESS modify payload counter OLTADDRESS clear uc modify payload counter OLTADDRESS clear interface Config Clears the configuration for one ONU port of specified interface type OLTADDRESS OLT slot GPON port eth voip xdsl ces type of interface ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port ONU ID ONU slot ONU port Clears the configuration for all ports of specified ONU card ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port ONU ID ONU slot Clears the configuration for all ports of specified ONU ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port ONU ID Clears the configuration for all USED CONFIGURED unicast inter faces Id 0900d80580257cd9 99 Ports Operation Manual CLI Example SWITCH config modify payload counter 2 1 set interface eth 2 1 24 4 3 13 1 SWITCH config show payload counter config uc PAYLOAD COUNTER UNICAST CONFIGURATION interface counter vian type address group mapping ee ee ethernet 2 1 20 1 1 52 invalid ethernet 2 1 20 1 2 52 invalid ethernet 2 1 20 1 3 52 invalid ethernet 2 1 20 1 4 52 invalid VoIP 2 1 20 1 52 inv
167. agent address A B C D Config Configures the IP address of SNMP agent A B C D IP address no snmp agent address Deletes IP address SNMP agent snmp location NAME no snmp location Configures the location name of SNMP agent NAME location name Deletes location of SNMP agent snmp contact USER no snmp contact Configures name of user which can access the system USER user name Deletes the name of accessed user Use the following commands to display information of the SNMP agent Command Mode Function show snmp agent address Privileged Shows SNMP agent IP address show snmp location Confi 9 Shows location of SNMP agent show snmp contact Shows the name of user with SNMP access 28 4 Example SWITCH config snmp contact manager SWITCH config snmp location ger gwd SWITCH config Configuring an SNMP Group An SNMP group is a collection of SNMP users who share the same access permission SNMP sets up the authentication strategy for a user and the group in which the user resides In order to create delete an group that can access the SNMP agent use the fol lowing commands Id 0900d8058025b404 255 SNMP Operation Manual CLI Command Mode Function snmp group GROUP v1 vac v3 SECURITY NAME no snmp group GROUP v1 v2c v3 Config Creates an SNMP group GROUP group name
168. al volatile non volatile syslog output priority auth authpriv cron daemon kern local local2 local3 local4 local5 local6 local7 lpr mail news syslog user uucp emerg alert crit err warning notice info remote A B C D syslog output priority auth authpriv cron daemon kern local1 local2 locals local4 local5 local6 local7 lpr mail news syslog user uucp emerg alert crit err warning notice info console 29 2 Binding an IP Address Config Transmits syslog message of configured level to specified output with chosen priority Facility types auth security authorization message authpriv security authorization message cron clock daemon daemon system daemons without separate facility value kern kernel messages local1 local7 reserved for local use see also 29 3 Setting the local Facility Code Ipr line printer subsystem mail mail subsystem news USENET news subsystem syslog messages generated internally by syslog user generic user level messages uucp UUCP subsystem Severity levels emerg emergency 0 alert alert 1 or more serious crit critical 2 or more serious err error 3 or more serious warning warning 4 or more serious notice notice 5 or more serious info informational 6 or more serious System logger output redirection Local output file system memory volatile
169. al Contact Small Form Factor Pluggable Single Family Unit Serial Gigabit Media Independent Interface Session Initiation Protocol Simple Network Management Protocol Signal to Noise Ratio Spanning Tree Protocol Software Traffic Container Transmission Convergence Layer Transmission Control Protocol Time Division Multiplexing Time Division Multiple Access Telecommunication Management Network Type of Service Termination Point Television User Datagram Protocol User Network Interface Ultra Polished Connector Upstream Virtual Cross Connection Id 0900d80580240c85 271 Abbreviations Operation Manual CLI VDE Association for Electrical Electronic amp Information Technologies VDSL Very High Speed Digital Subscriber Line VID VLAN ID VLAN Virtual LAN VoD Video on Demand VolP Voice over IP VR Virtual Router VRF Virtual Routing and Forwarding WDM Wavelength Division Multiplexing WFQ Weighted Fair Queuing WRED Weighted Random Early Detection Discard WRR Weighted Round Robin Queuing XFP Optical Form Factor Pluggable xTU xDSL Transmission Unit xTU C gt central office side XTU R gt remote side 272 Id 0900d80580240c85
170. al Public License LGPL This Open Source Software was written by third parties and enjoys copyright protection You are entitled to use this Open Source Software under the conditions set out in the 18 d 0900d8058020cb15 Operation Manual CLI Introduction GPL and LGPL licenses indicated above In the event of conflicts between Nokia Siemens Networks license conditions and the GPL or LGPL license conditions the GPL and LGPL conditions shall prevail with respect to the Open Source portions of the soft ware The GPL can be found under the following URL http www gnu org copyleft gpl html The LGPL can be found under the following URL http www gnu org copyleft Igpl html This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org The use of Open Source Software contained in this product in any manner other than the simple running of the program occurs at your own risk that is without any warranty claims against Nokia Siemens Network For more information about the warranties provided by the authors of the Open Source Software contained in this product please consult the GPL and LGPL You have no warranty claims against Nokia Siemens Networks when a defect in the product is or could have been caused by changes made by you in any part of the software or its configuration In addition you have no warranty claims against Nokia Siemens Networks when the Open Source Soft
171. alid VoIP 2 1 20 5 1 none invalid VoIP 2 1 24 2 1 11 valid ethernet 2 1 24 4 1 none invalid ethernet 2 1 24 4 2 none invalid ethernet 2 1 24 4 3 13 valid ethernet 2 1 24 4 4 none invalid VoIP 2 1 24 4 1 none invalid 10 11 1 4 Assigning of Multicast Broadcast Traffic to Counter Group Use the following commands to configure payload counters for MC BC traffic flow through the GPON link Command Mode Function modify payload counter OLTADDRESS set mc 1 64 lt 0 1 gt Config Modifies the configuration for counting multicast bytes OLTADDRESS OLT slot GPON port 1 64 counter group 0 1 flag controls whether the used counter depends on VLAN or not see 10 11 1 5 Mapping VLAN to Counter 1 true count VLAN traffic enable 0 false count VLAN traffic disable modify payload counter OLTADDRESS clear mc Clears the configuration for counting multicast bytes Example SWITCH config modify payload counter 2 1 set mc 23 1 SWITCH config show payload counter config mc PAYLOAD COUNTER MULTICAST CONFIGURATION counter group vlan mapping bit 23 valid SWITCH config modify payload counter 2 1 clear mc SWITCH config show payload counter config mc PAYLOAD COUNTER MULTICAST CONFIGURATION counter group vlan mapping bit none invalid 100 d 0900d80580257cd9 Operation Manual
172. anager to standby standby available messages The list header of the above show alarm list commands is shown below Alarm List ID Sev SevProfIdx Time and Date All values are decimals rep src type rep src MIB Object ID 6 4 Configuring the GPON Alarm Thresholds The GPON thresholds are used to calculate the alarms signal failed Sf and signal degraded Sd There is one pair of values for the whole NE Note that the Sd threshold value must be higher than Sf threshold value The Sf alarm as well as the Sd alarm become active if the bit error rate is equal to or greater than 10E X and it become inactive if the bit error rate is lower than 10E X 1 Command Mode Function gpon threshold lt 3 8 gt lt 4 9 gt Config Changes alarm threshold 3 8 10 SfThresh value default 10E 3 4 9 10 SdThresh value default 10E 4 show gpon threshold Shows alarm thresholds Id 0900d8058025ae9c 59 Alarms Operation Manual CLI 6 5 Configuring the CPU Overload Threshold Command Mode Function threshold cpu lt 20 100 gt 51601 600 Config Configures CPU overload threshold 20 100 Threshold in percent 5 60 600 Time interval in sec 60 Id 0900d8058025ae9c Operation Manual CLI OLT Equipment 7 OLT Equipment This chapter contains information about configuration of the OLT cards Creating a new Car
173. ancel for the addressed ports the assignment of counter groups This is the default status that will be reported as none Command Mode Function modify payload counter OLTADDRESS set interface ces eth voip xdsl ADDRESS 1 64 0 1 Config modify payload counter OLTADDRESS set onu card ADDRESS 1 64 0 1 modify payload counter OLTADDRESS set onu ADDRESS 1 64 0 1 modify payload counter OLTADDRESS set uc 1 64 lt 0 1 gt Modifies the configuration for counting unicast bytes via one ONU port of specified interface type OLTADDRESS OLT slot GPON port eth voip xdsl ces type of interface can be eth voip xdsl ces Circuit Emulation Services whole Ethernet traffic encapsulat ing ONU s TDM traffic of unstructured least lines E1 or DS1 ADDRESS address from UNI port OLT slot GPON port ONU ID ONU slot ONU port 1 64 counter group 0 1 flag controls whether the used counter depends on VLAN or not see 10 11 1 5 Mapping VLAN to Counter 1 true count VLAN traffic enable 0 false count VLAN traffic disable Modifies the configuration for counting unicast bytes via all ports of specified ONU card ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port ONU ID ONU slot Modifies the configuration for counting unicast bytes via all ports of specified ONU ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port ONU ID Modifies the configuration for counting unicast bytes via all USED CONFIGURED interfaces of lo
174. and OS version Command Mode Function show system version Privileged Displays system information show system feature list Config Displays the feature list of the system show startup type Displays the type of the last startup show startup result Displays the result of the last startup show startup config Privileged Show a current startup configuration 4 1 8 Checking the Running System Configuration Command Mode Function show running config Privileged Config Shows current system information show running config arp Privileged Config Shows current ARP information show running config bridging show running config dhcp Privileged Config Config Shows current bridging information Shows current DHCP information show running config dns Privileged Config Shows current DNS information show running config full show running config hostname Config Privileged Config Shows current full information Shows current hostname information show running config igmp Config Shows current IGMP information show running config interface FNAME Config Shows current interface information IFNAME name of logical interface show running config I3 Config Shows current fixed IP information show running config lacp show running config login Privileged Config Privileged Config Shows current LACP information Shows current login informat
175. apability O or 1 this attribute is undefined If SignalCapability 22 or 3 this attribute is func tionally read only If SignalCapability 4 or 5 this attribute is read write The following parameter allows the discovery and configu ration of the ONT s AGC capabilities It contains code points for the several AGC types The ONT displays the currently used AGC mode The OLT can discover new modes via the set command The code points are none no AGC is used 0 broadband broadband RF AGC is used 1 optical optical AGC is used 2 0 255 3 255 reserved for future use AGCSETTINGS indicates the measurement offset that the ONT should use if using broadband RF signal level or total optical power as a basis for AGC Enter AGC value Step size of 0 1 dB modify catv uni config ADDRESS off on 0 255 enable disable bothBlocked lowPassed bothPassed Config Configures the UNI of CATV interface ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port ONU ID ONU slot ONU port off alarm reporting allowed immediately on alarm reporting inhibited 0 255 length of time in minutes An interval value of 255 has the special meaning of infinity Following parameter controls whether power is provided to an external equipment over the video PPTP enable power over COAX disable disables power feed Switching between two fixed pass band plans in order to dif ferentiate the services delivered to the subscriber bothBlo
176. at is used to enable 0 or disable 1 IP related options The options are assigned as follows 0x1 Enable DHCP default 0 0x2 Respond to PINGs default 0 0x4 Respond to Trace Route messages Id 0900d8058023f697 129 Voice over IP Operation Manual CLI modify voip ip host addr dns server ADDRESS A B C D A B C D Command Mode Function modify voip ip host ont identifier NDEX LINE Config Modifies ONT identifier string INDEX physical index of ONT card providing IP Host services modify voip ip host addr ont identifier ADRESS LINE peers Secon ONT AD ONE slot LINE identifier string up to 25 Byte modify voip ip host ip mask gateway NDEX Config Modifies the IP address mask default gateway A B C D A B C D A B C D INDEX interface index of ONT card providing IP host services ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port ONT ID ONT slot modify voip ip host addr ip mask gateway ADDRESS A B C D address used for all IP services hosted by the ONT A B C D A B C D A B C D A B C D subnet mask for IP services hosted by the ONT A B C D default gateway address used for all IP services hosted by this ONT If values are set they will override any values returned in DHCP modify voip ip host dns server INDEX A B C D A B C D Config Modifies primary secondary DNS server INDEX interface index of ONT card providing IP Host services ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port ONT ID ONT slot A B C D addr
177. ata Table To show SIP user data parameters use the following commands show voip sip user data table addr ADDRESS Id 0900d8058023f697 Command Mode Function show voip sip user data table Exec Displays SIP user data table Config Displays SIP user data table ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port ONT ID port number POTS port number 1 to max 145 Voice over IP Operation Manual CLI 12 8 4 SIP User Dial Plan Mapping This table maps SIP user data entries to user dial plan entries First table index is the IF Index of the SIP user data entry Second table index is the pointer to a user dial plan entry see Dial Plan Profile Each SIP user data entry can refer to a flexible number of user dial plan entries Configuring of SIP User Dial Plan Mapping To configure SIP user dial mapping table entries use the following commands Command Mode Function create voip sip user dialplan mapping table entry addr Config Creates a user dial mapping table entry ADDRESS DIAL PLAN INDEX create voip sip user dialplan mapping table entry F NDEX DIAL PLAN INDEX delete voip sip user dialplan mapping table entry F NDEX DIAL PLAN INDEX delete voip sip user dialplan mapping table entry addr ADDRESS DIAL PLAN INDEX ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port ONT ID port number POTS port number 1 to max IF INDEX interface index of SIP user data entry primary index DIAL PLAN INDEX user dial plan index
178. aths exist on a network the Spanning Tree Protocol STP 802 1D config ures the network so that a switch uses only the most efficient path If that path fails STP automatically sets up another active path on the network to sustain network operations STP detects and eliminates logical loops by forcing the redundant data path into a blocked state Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP 802 1w innovates to reduce the time of network convergence on STP It is an easy and fast to configure protocol Also RSTP provides comparability with STP If the network contains more than one VLAN the logical network configured by single traditional STP does not work The Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP 802 1Q configures a separate spanning tree for each VLAN and blocks the links which are redundant within each spanning tree So several VLANs can be mapped to a single spanning tree instance Perform the following tasks in order to configure STP 1 Decide STP mode using the stp force version command 2 Activate MST daemon using the stp mst enable command 3 Configure detail options if specific commands are required Configuring the STP Operation Mode Use the following command the configure the forced version Command Mode Function stp force version stp rstp mstp Bridge Sets the specified STP version stp Spanning Tree Protocol STP rstp Rapid STP mstp Multiple STP no stp force version Clears force version conf
179. atic SWITCH bridge show mac 7 12 port id mac addr permission in use eth24 12 00 01 02 9a 61 1a static 0 00 eth24 12 00 10 5a 84 46 76 OK 0 01 eth24 12 00 e0 4c 1a 37 17 OK 0 07 eth24 12 00 d0 cb 0a a0 b7 OK 0 15 eth24 12 00 c0 ca 33 5b 90 OK 0 18 eth24 12 00 03 47 70 e3 30 OK 0 50 omitted SWITCH bridge Id 0900d8058023fad7 Operation Manual CLI Bridges 14 Bridges The bridge configuration is described in the following chapters e Configuring the Bridge Base e Configuring of Bridge Ports Port Mirroring 14 4 Configuring the Bridge Base This chapter describes commands which are set the switching mode tagging mode and residential mode of CXU IU and ONU 14 1 1 Common Bridge Base Commands The following command takes effect without restriction of a specific OLT card Command Mode Function bridgebase outerEtherType ETHERTYPE Bridge Sets QinQ encapsulation configurable outer tag ethertype without CXU specific scope ETHERTYPE 0x8100 0x88a8 0x9100 or 0x9200 14 1 2 CXU Bridge Command Mode Function bridgebase cxu bridgemode basic diffserv enhanced Bridge Configures the general mode of the CXU bridge that will influence some QoS features bridgebase cxu switching mode independent vlan learning Bridge Configures bridgebase outer tagging shared vlan learning vlan switching vlan switching no learning of MAC addresses all frames are fl
180. b 8B 8 8 MHz bandwidth 2048 tones 20 5 dBm line power profile8c 8C 8 5 MHz Bandwidth 1972 Tones 11 5 dBm Line Power profile8d 8D 8 8 MHz bandwidth 2048 tones 14 5 dBm line power profile12a 12A 12 MHz bandwidth 2783 tones 14 5 dBm line power profile12b 12B 12 MHz bandwidth 2783 tones 14 5 dBm line power profile17a 17A 17 MHz bandwidth 4096 tones 14 5 dBm line power profile17b 17A USO profile30a 30A 30 MHz bandwidth 3479 tones 14 5 dBm line power xdsl line config profile PROFILE profile gs standard ansi t1 413 adsl pots adsl isdn adsl2 pots adsl2 isdn reach ext adsl2 pots m11 reach ext adsl2 pots m2 ext up adsl2 pots adsl2plus pots adsl2plus isdn ext up adsl2plus pots vdsl2 region a vdsl2 region b vdsl2 region c Bridge Configures the used standard compliance selects either single mode or combine all and system selects on xDSL line PROFILE enter the profile name ansi t1 413 ANSI T1 413 1998 Standard adsl isdn G 992 1 ADSL ISDN non overlapped adsl pots G 992 1 ADSL POTS non overlapped adsl2 pots G 992 3 ADSL2 POTS non overlapped adsl2 isdn G 992 3 ADSL2 ISDN non overlapped reach ext adsl2 pots m1 G 992 3 Reach Ext ADSL2 POTS non over lapped M1 reach ext adsl2 pots m2 G 992 3 Reach Ext ADSL2 POTS non over lapped M2 ext up adsl2 pots G 992 3 Ext Up ADSL2 POTS non overlapped adsl2plus pots G 992 5 ADSL2 POTS non overlapped ext up adsl2plus pots
181. be estela 208 AS BoultelFilterihg sase on ics oon amd EQE DESqQ rS eem EA S E 205 Comimubities va soe dope PEE pepe dtque tetpr ee aes shed 206 Determining the State of BGP u sese ee Dumas mete mee saepe 206 RIP ROWING ERR 207 Basic Configuration of RIP i c0c 0k8oseke di ete eer wer wads 208 Allowing Unicast Updates for RIP 000 eee eee eee 208 Id 0900d8058025f467 9 Operation Manual CLI 10 21 3 3 21 3 4 21 3 5 21 3 6 21 9 7 21 3 8 21 3 9 21 4 21 4 1 21 4 2 21 4 3 21 4 4 21 4 5 22 22 1 22 2 22 3 22 4 22 4 1 22 4 2 22 4 3 22 4 4 22 4 5 22 4 6 22 4 7 22 4 8 22 4 9 22 5 22 5 1 22 5 2 22 5 3 22 5 4 22 5 5 22 6 22 1 23 23 1 23 2 23 3 23 4 24 24 1 24 2 24 2 1 24 2 2 24 3 Configuring of Static Routes 0 00 c eee eee 209 Redistributing of Routing Information llis 209 Configuring of Routing Metrics 210 Configuring the Administrative Distance 0 00000 0 eee 211 Extended RIP Configuration llle 211 Managing the Authentication Key 0 0 eee eee 213 Checking of Router and Protocol Information 0005 213 ISIS ROUUNG ois sep Em m ERE D RR Bde RR Au dues DEA 214 Basic Configuration of IS IS Router 0000 c eee eee 215 Extended Router Configuration 0 000 e eee eee eee 215 Configuring of Interface Parameters 00 000 e eee eee 217 Redistribution of Reachability I
182. be forwarded over all ports of the VLAN snooping IP based IGMP snooping will be supported proxy Reduces IGMP network traffic by supporting proxy functionality Provider necessary see 19 3 IGMP Provider igmp iu gpon SLOT inactive vlan switching snooping Config Configures IGMP operation mode of specified IU GPON SLOT IU slot number inactive Disabled forwarding IGMP MC traffic over the GPON ports vlan switching MC traffic will be forwarded over all GPON ports of the VLAN snooping IP based IGMP snooping will be supported igmp iu SLOT inactive vlan switching snooping Config Configures IGMP the operation mode of this IU SLOT IU slot number inactive Disabled forwarding IGMP MC traffic over the GPON ports vlan switching MC traffic will be forwarded over all GPON ports of the VLAN snooping IP based IGMP snooping will be supported To verify the IGMP status use the following commands Command Mode Function show igmp cxu Config Displays IGMP status on CXU show igmp snooping table cxu Config Displays the CXU snooping table show igmp iu Config Shows all IUs with regard to IGMP show igmp snooping table iu USLOT Config Displays the IU snooping table IUSLOT slot show igmp joined ports list 1 16 1 512 Config Displays list of joined ports 1 16 IU slot 1 512 group index The following command sets the IGMP operation mode
183. ble Shows learned reply entries of ARP table show arp reply fixed table Shows fixed entries of ARP table 18 10 Deleting an Entry Learned by DHCP ARP Use the following commands to delete an entry of kernel s IP table learned by DHCP Command Mode Function no ip dhcp learned table A B C D XX XX XX XX XX XX Config Deletes an entry from DHCP learned table in kernel A B C D XX XX XX XX XX XX A B C D entrie s IP address XX XX XX XX XX XX entrie s MAC address ip dhcp learned table delete A B C D XX XX XX XX XX XX A B C D XX XX XX XX XX XX Use the following commands to delete an entry of kernel s IP table learned by ARP Command Mode Function no arp reply learned table A B C D Config Deletes an entry from ARP learned table in kernel A B C D entrie s IP address arp reply learned table delete A B C D Id 0900d8058025c93a 183 IGMP Operation Manual CLI 19 IGMP IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol is a host to router protocol used to announce multicast MC group membership by interested subscriber hosts IGMP supports an MC distribution service where only one data stream from the source is replicated in the OLT to serve a large number of receivers on behalf of its requests A router serving a multicast VLAN sends only IGMP query message in request of ports receiving multicast packets If a subscriber port sends the join m
184. cal index of ONT card lock unlock deactivates activates performance monitoring admin state 15 min lock unlock deactivates activates performance monitoring admin state 24 h 0 96 history size 15 min number of history entries for the PM object and the interval type 0 1 history size 24 h number of history entries for the PM object and the interval type 1 16 pointer to the threshold object Modifies SIP agent performance monitoring Deletes object table for SIP agent performance monitoring 147 Voice over IP Operation Manual CLI Checking the SIP Agent PM Tables To show VoIP SIP performance objects use the following commands Command Mode Function show voip performance sip agent pm object table Exec Displays object table for SIP agent performance monitoring show voip performance sip call init pm object table Config Displays object table for SIP call init monitoring show voip performance sip agent pm threshold table Displays threshold table for SIP agent performance monitoring show voip performance sip call init pm threshold table Displays threshold table for SIP call init monitoring Updating and Verifying SIP Agent PM Data To update VolP SIP performance data use the following command Command Mode Function update voip performance sip agent pm current data Config Updates the SIP agent PM current data table INDEX INDEX object index
185. card errors software failures and when the uplink line fails The shelf can be optionally equipped with a second CXU acting in standby mode until a failure condition of the active CXU or the operator trigger a switch over In all cases the active CXU is responsible for the synchronization of the standby one Measures of CXU board redundancy always implement also the possibility to establish uplink line redun dancy for the 10 Gbps line and with reservations up to 4 x 1 Gbps lines The board redundancy needs following requirements Both CXU cards must be of the same type Incase of upgrading an OLT a primary CXU with SW older than release 2 02 must first be upgraded before the second standby board can be plugged in Following redundancy aspects are supported Switching is initiated autonomously by the CXU hardware in case of a watch dog event SW error on the currently active CXU Switching can be initiated by the SW as result of a hardware state monitoring or on request of the management system fi Note that the standby CXU card must be first created in the slot 10 see 7 1 Creating a new Card for further information fi A plug out of the currently active CXU board with the objective of initiating a switch over could result in an interruption of IU s control Therefore it must not be per formed At first execute a switchover command 8 1 Checking Redundancy States To check the redundancy states and software consisten
186. cast in clear ip bgp lt 1 65535 gt vpnv4 unicast out clear ip bgp lt 1 65535 gt vpnv4 unicast soft clear ip bgp lt 1 65535 gt vpnv4 unicast soft in Press the key to skip to the next list Calling Command History By using command history the last executed commands can be displayed Press the arrow key lt T gt repeated to display the commands in LIFO order one after another The following is an example of calling the command history after using the command sequence show clock configure terminal interface 1 exit SWITCH config exit SWITCH show clock Mon 5 Jan 1970 23 50 12 GMT 0000 SWITCH configure terminal SWITCH config interface 1 SWITCH SWITCH config exit SWITCH press the arrow key 7 config if exit SWITCH exit arrow key T vv SWITCH interface 1 arrow key 1 v SWITCH configure terminal arrow key T v SWITCH show clock arrow key T Using Abbreviation Almost commands can be used also with abbreviated form The following table shows some examples of abbreviated commands Command Abbreviation clock clo exit exi list lis configure terminal cont Press the key after entering the first letters of the command to complete it e g con key will be completed to configure Using Privileged Mode Command By using the do command Exec mode commands can also run in another as the Exec mode
187. ce between of the equipped CXU cards use the following commands Command Mode Function show redundancy states Config Displays the redundancy states of all plug in units show table shelf SLOT Shows slot usage and slot configuration of the running system SLOT slot number to show information for 8 2 Resetting a CXU i See following sections for further reset commands e Reset of Interface Unit Cards e Restarting the System Use the following command to initiate a reset of a CXU Be careful choosing the slot number reset card SLOT Command Mode Function Config Reset of the specified CXU SLOT slot number 64 Id 0900d8058024353a Operation Manual CLI CXU Board and Line Redundancy 8 3 Initiating a Switchover The following commands initiate a manual switch over This may be done e g in the case of hardware maintenance purposes Command Mode Function switchover SLOT Config Switchover to the standby CXU if the standby unit has no error SLOT slot number of the active CXU switchover forced SLOT Switchover to the standby CXU is forced also when it is in inferior state than the active one 8 4 Uplink Line Redundancy Uplink line redundancy measures are supported for 10 GE lines and 1 GE lines Using uplink line redundancy requires an LAG LACP configuration on the OLT see 24 3 Configuring LACP and the aggregation switch es Note
188. cessible no snmp community ro rw COMMUNITY Deletes specified community i To access the NE up to three SNMP communities for both reading right and writing right may be configured in the system To check configured communities use the following command Id 0900d8058025b404 253 SNMP Operation Manual CLI Command Mode Function show snmp community Privileged Displays the communities Config Example The following example configures two communities the first one with the password public and the access policy read write and the other one as private with the access policy read only SWITCH config snmp community rw public SWITCH config snmp community ro private SWITCH config show snmp community Community List Community Source OID community rw public community ro private SWITCH config 28 2 Configuring the Security of SNMP Community SNMP v2c authorizes the host to access the SNMP agent identified by both its IP address and the community name The following command maps the identity of host and the community name to a security name This mapping is needed to apply some access control settings also to the SNMP v1 v2 request with the specified community The host IP address settings allows the SNMP agent to respond only to hosts with spec ified IP addresses If the SNMP v1 v2c access support is needed
189. cides the queue scheduling mode for interfaces downstream upstream sp wrr uplink_card all uplink card interfaces downlink_card all downlink card interfaces all all interface will get the following mode at once downstream mode operates downstream traffic flow upstream mode operates upstream traffic flow The mode of the selected interface sp strict priority based queuing wrr Weighted Round Robin queuing i Strict priority is the default setting of the hiX 5750 R2 0 If WRR is selected the weight size per queue can be determined by using the following commands Weight in 96 is the value of time the queue is set to get service For example if queue 3 has double weight than the other ones it will be served like 3 3 2 1 0 3 3 2 1 0 etc A unlimited weight sets strict priority for the queue The other queues which have been given a percent value follow the common WRR scheme Command Mode Function qos weight lt 0 7 gt lt 1 100 gt unlimited Config Sets the weight values 0 7 queue number 1 100 weight value in defines the value of time the queue is set to get service unlimited strict priority queuing 174 Id 0900d8058025faf9 Operation Manual CLI Quality of Service QoS 17 3 Checking the QoS Configuration Commands Mode Function show qos map scheduling mode weight all Privileged Displays a configuration of QoS Con
190. cked both frequency bands blocked lowPassed only low frequency band passed bothPassed both frequency bands passed Id 0900d80580257cd9 89 Ports Operation Manual CLI 10 8 Checking Port Configuration Command Mode Function show catv ani if table Config Shows ANI interface table show catv uni if table Config Shows UNI interface table Command Mode Function show port PORTS all Privileged Shows configured state of port Config PORTS port number OLT slot OLT port Bridge all shows all ports show port PORTS description Shows port specific description max number of char acters is 100 show port gpon I eth I pots e1ds111 I xdsl catv ces PORTS Shows port specific description description gpon GPON port eth Ethernet port pots POTS port eids1ll E1DS1 leased line port xdsl xDSL port catv CATV port ces CES port show port link discovery PORTS Shows configured link state of port show e1ds1 if table local OLT SLOT OLT_PORT Config Shows table of configured local E1DS1 interfaces F OLT_SLOT OLT slot of the IU_GPON optional show e1ds1 if table2 local OLT_SLOT OLT_PORT OLT_PORT OLT port for E1DS1 interface optional show e1ds1 if table remote OLT SLOT GPON PORT Shows table of configured remote E1DS1interfaces ONU ID ONT SLOT ONT PORT 11 OLT SLOT OLT slot of the IU GPON optional GPON PORT GPON port f the I PON show e1
191. ckets are separated by vertical bars Select one item from the list Example bridgeport PORTS mode ipoa ipoe Table 1 Command Notation of CLI fi Do not enter brackets braces or vertical bars as part of the command 1 4 Related Documents In addition other related documents are available describing the AccessIntegrator Element Manager EM PX R2 0 software and the hiX 5750 R2 0 system These docu ments are described in Table 2 Title Part number Topics covered AccesslIntegrator Element Manager EM PX A50010 X3 G200 76K5 Installation of Element Manager EM PX R2 0 software and its R2 0 supporting software components IMN Backup and restore of Accessintegrator data configuration of domain and permission ADMN Operation and configuration of hiX 5750 network element using the Element Manager EM PX R2 0 OGL SURPASS hiX 5750 R2 0 A50010 X3 G201 76K5 SURPASS hiX 5750 R2 0 functions and hardware descrip tions SYD Instructions for the commissioning of a hiX 5750 R2 0 Installation and Test Manual ITMN Commands for configuring the hiX 5750 R2 0 via console or telnet Command Line Interface CLI Table 2 Related Documentation 1 5 GPL LGPL Warranty and Liability Exclusion The product SURPASS hiX5750 contains both proprietary software and Open Source Software The Open Source Software is licensed to you at no charge under the GNU General Public License GPL and the GNU Lesser Gener
192. collide established Router Specifies including a neighbor already in an established state for conflict resolution when a TCP connection collision is detected The asso ciated functionality is automatically enabled when neighbor is configured for BGP restart neighbor A B C D WORD ebgp multihop 1 255 Router Allows BGP connections to external peers on indirectly connected networks 1 255 maximum hop count If not set the hop count is 255 Use the no parameter with this command to return to the default Operation Manual CLI IP Routing Command Mode Function neighbor A B C D WORD enforce multihop Router Enforces eBGP neighbors to perform multihop Use the no parameter with this command to turn off this feature neighbor A B C D WORD transparent as Router Configures not appending your AS number even when peer is an eBGP neighbor A B C D WORD transparent nexthop Router Configures not changing nexthop even if the peer is eBGP Command Mode Function neighbor A B C D WORD advertisement interval lt 0 600 gt Router Sets minimum interval between sending BGP routing updates 0 600 advertise interval value in seconds Use the no parameter with this command to set the interval time to default neighbor A B C D WORD allowas in 1 10 Router Configures PE routers to allow re advertisement of all pr
193. config data Configuring Shaping and Policing on Bridge Port Traffic shaping and policing permit to define sustained and peak data rates for a customer bridge port For this there are two steps necessary 1 Configuring of Creating of Traffic Descriptor Profiles 2 Assigning of the profile s to the desired bridgeport Two profiles are provided one for upstream traffic shaping and another for downstream traffic policing Command Mode Function bridgeport PORTS policing 1 64 Bridge Ingress traffic policing Specifies for this bridgeport an downstream traffic profile PORTS port number slot port ONU_ID ONU slot ONU port 1 64 bridgeport inbound traffic descriptor ID no bridgeport PORTS policing Disables policing feature for specified bridgeport bridgeport PORTS shaping 1 64 Bridge Egress traffic shaping Specifies for this bridgeport an upstream traffic profile PORTS port number slot port ONU_ID ONU slot ONU port 1 64 bridgeport outbound traffic descriptor ID no bridgeport PORTS shaping Disables shaping feature for specified bridgeport 14 3 Port Mirroring To enable disable an IU 1x10G mirror monitor port use the following command Command Mode Function mirror monitor PORT Bridge Enables the monitoring port PORT select uplink port number Use the no parameter with this command to delete the monitor port show mirror monitor Bridge Shows t
194. configuration mode SWITCH config router route map NAME permit lt 1 65535 gt NAME WORD Route map tag Sequence to insert to delete from existing route map entry PPPoE configuration mode Route map configuration mode SWITCH pppoe provider SWITCH config route map Figure 1 Overview of Configuration Modes 20 d 0900d8058024303c Operation Manual CLI Using CLI 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 3 Entering a Command Mode User Exec Mode When a user logs in successfully the command mode is on User exec mode This is a read only mode provided to all users accessing to the GPON The prompt is displayed as SWITCH gt by default In User exec mode it is possible to check the system configuration Command Function show running config Shows running system information Privileged Exec Mode In order to get the right to configure the system enter to Privileged exec mode by using the enable command After this the command prompt changes from SWITCH gt to SWITCH Command Mode Function enable User Changes from User exec mode into Privileged Exec mode To enhance the security it is possible to assign a password to the Privileged exec mode The commands of Privileged exec mode shown in the below table are used to display the changes of terminal configuration network status and system information Command Function clock Inputs time and date in system
195. configure terminal Enters into Configuration mode telnet Connects to another device through telnet terminal line Configures the number of lines to be displayed in screen traceroute Traces transmission path of packet where Finds users accessed to system through telnet Table 3 Main Commands of Privileged Exec Mode Configuration Mode In order to enter into Configuration mode execute the command configure terminal on Privileged exec mode The system prompt changes from SWITCH to SWITCH config Command Mode Function configure terminal Privileged Enters from Privileged exec mode into Configuration mode Configuration mode is used to configure functions for general system management and SNMP In addition a user can enter into Bridge Interface configuration mode from that level Id 0900d8058024303c 21 Using CLI Operation Manual CLI Table 4 shows a couple of important main commands of Configuration mode Command Function access list Configures policy to limit routing information on the standard of AS arp Registers IP address and MAC address in ARP table bridge Enters into Bridge configuration mode clear Reset functions hostname Changes hostname of system prompt exec timeout Configures auto logout function interface Enters into Interface configuration mode passwd Changes the password qos Configures QoS restore factory defaults
196. counter value to ZERO modify payload counter get all ADDRESS 0 1 Config Gets all counter values from specified GPON link modify payload counter reset all ADDRESS Resets all current counter values from GPON link to ZERO 104 10 11 2 2 Examples Get counter 4 of group 2 without reset SWITCH config modify payload counter get single 2 1 2 4 0 SWITCH config show payload counter counter single single PAYLOAD COUNTER ponlink 2 1 counter group 2 nsn 2 counter 4 time of request 2008 06 09 11 10 30 upstream 0 downstream 0 Reset counter 4 of group 2 SWITCH config modify payload counter reset single 2 1 2 4 Reset of all counter on GPON link 2 1 SWITCH config modify payload counter reset all 2 1 Displaying the Counter Values After executing the last get command use the following commands to display the counter information fi Note the following remarks e Not assigned counter groups are marked as UNUSED e Counters without assigned VLAN are not displayed e For each used counter group the total is displayed d 0900d80580257cd9 Operation Manual CLI Ports Command Mode Function show payload counter counter ponlink 1 64 1 64 show payload counter counter single Config Shows information for all or specified counter groups from last get all request 1 64 counter group start index
197. cts lsilselsees else 93 10 103 Configuring of PM Objects cae rv EE HERPITCSETETREARGORESRDUPIDISs 95 10 10 4 Displaying the PM Dala uci chro dede tp te dtr ee starat Rowe aad 95 10 11 Payload Counters ca 2 2212 egeo pue Ere px db Rx dE QE Ee Eia 96 10 11 1 Configuring of Payload Counter lllslllselsllllllelsels 96 10 13 31 4 Loading the Configultatiom s s ogiri eme arde Rr Ead eR E RE 96 10 11 1 2 Naming of Counter Groups 222 d perc Ch pee e Eden 98 10 11 1 3Assigning the User Ports to Counter Group llli elles 98 10 11 1 4Assigning of Multicast Broadcast Traffic to Counter Group 100 10 11 1 5Mappitig VLAN to COUME i aui tete mis dane ne eS qute ere puis 101 10 11 1 6Activating the Configuration with Payload Counters 102 10 11 17 Checking the Configuration eis 22e eR Reb ERE EE RP EIE 103 10 11 2 Checking the Payload Counter Values 0 0000 cece eee 103 10 11 2 1 Getting and Resetting the Payload Counter Values 104 10 11 2 2Displaying the Counter Values llle ellen 104 11 ADS sett add a es dat beta aged pd E E 107 11 1 Eine FeS uo rrr tO EHE POLOS Write DRE ead he es 107 11 1 1 Creating Deleting a Profile llle llle 107 1141 2 Configuration zio t ERES RR EREE e ERR ERDLuO RE dens 108 Tas Checking orPrFofllesz s3u oo bane put oo tilt acer d eret e que dus qoa 115 11 2 Channel Prole 22 2 bd esdicadeddaaned dd de oh P RUSSE IERI
198. d Mode Function option82 0 3 remote id circuit id all DHCP no option82 Configures DHCP provider s option82 flags 0 3 sets option82 suboption flags by number remote id enables using remote ID suboption circuit id enables using circuit ID suboption all enables flags for using all suboptions Disables DHCP provider s option82 flags option105 4 7 remote id circuit id all PPPOE no option105 Configures PPPoE provider s option105 flags 4 7 sets option105 suboption flags by number remote id enables using remote ID suboption circuit id enables using circuit ID suboption all enables flags for all suboptions Disables using suboptions at all Id 0900d8058025c93a 179 DHCP and PPPoE Operation Manual CLI 18 4 2 Configuring the Remote ID fi By default the system s MAC address is the remote ID To configure DHCP option82 sub option remote ID use the following commands Command Mode Function ip dhcp option82 remote id A B C D XX XX XX XX XX XX Config Configures option82 remote ID of the system A B C D remote ID address in IP style XX XX remote ID address in MAC style ip dhcp option82 remote id hex HEXSTRING Configures remote ID of the system ascii TEXT circuitid HEXSTRING remote ID of hex type TEXT remote ID of ascii type circuitid the circuit ID will be used as remote ID
199. d Shows all routes that are permitted by the community list Config WORD enter the name of the list show ip bgp community info Privileged Displays all information of BGP community Config show ip bgp filter list WORD Privileged Shows routes that are matched by the specified autonomous Config system route in access list enter the name of the list show ip bgp regexp L NE Privileged Shows routes that match the specified regular expression Config entered on the command line enter a regular expression for LINE show ip bgp attribute info Privileged Shows all information of BGP attributes Config show ip bgp neighbors ip address Privileged Shows detail information on TCP and BGP connections to Config individual neighbors show ip bgp neighbors ip address advertised routes Privileged Shows information about the TCP and BGP connections to received routes routes Config neighbors The advertised routes option displays all the routes the router has advertised to the neighbor The received routes option displays all received routes both accepted and rejected from the specified neighbor The routes option displays all routes that are received and accepted show ip bgp paths Privileged Shows all BGP routes in database Config show ip bgp summary Privileged Shows all BGP connections Config 21 3 RIP Routing RIP Routing Information Protocol calculates the best path route with the lowest metric value to
200. d e Changing the Admin State of Card Reset of Interface Unit Cards e Deleting an Existing Card Converting of IU GPON Cards e Checking the MAC Table of Interface Unit Card Selecting Alarm Severity Profiles of Cards Rack amp Self e Configuring External Alarms e Checking the Physical Tables 7 1 Creating a new Card The creation of an OLT card is possible without the necessity that the card has to be equipped into shelf s slot If this card is plugged in later the system will be check whether the equipped card type is matching the configured one or not When the card s type is valid the admin state changes automatically to unlocked Command Mode Function slot card create SLOTNUM m iugpon 2512 el m iugpon 2512 alm iugpon 2512 Il el m iuiOge 1o elm iutge 100 elm cxuvr 10 4e el m cxuf4 1o 4e ej planned locked Config Creates a new card SLOTNUM number of the slot iugpon 2512 e IU with 4 port GPON 2 5 1 2G class B with 8x E1 unstructured front access iugpon 2512 a IU with 4 port GPON 2 5 1 2G class B with 8x DS1 unstructured rear access m iugpon 2512 I e IU with 4 ports GPON 2 5G 1 2G Class B front access iufOge 10 e IU with 10x1G optical Ethernet interface 1x10G uplink iu lge 100 e IU with 1x10G optical Ethernet interface m cxuf4 10 4e e central unit with 4x1 GigE uplinks 150G switching capacity 1x 10G uplink m cxuvr 1o 4e e central unit with 4x1 GigE
201. d for the created user account use the following command passwd NAME Command Mode Function Config Configures the user s password NAME user name Example SWITCH config passwd GPON Changing password for GPON Enter the new password minimum of 5 maximum of 8 characters Please use a combination of upper and lower case letters and numbers Enter new password Re enter new password Password changed SWITCH config Deleting a User After adding the user it is impossible to change user s information such as ID pass word and description Thus if there is a need to change one of this parameters delete the user and add it again with new properties Command Mode Function user del NAME Config Deletes a user NAME user name 3 8 Example of deleting the user GPON SWITCH config user del GPON SWITCH config Limiting the Number of Management Sessions To designate the number of open management sessions enter the following command Id 0900d8058025feb5 37 System Access Operation Manual CLI fi The counter will be incremented by Telnet sessions as well as a serial connection over console port Command Mode Function login connect COUNT Config Limits the number of sessions accessing to the NE COUNT number of sessions 1 to 8 default 3 9 Checking the Management Sessions Use the following command
202. ddress WORD Name of an existing peer group 1 199 IP access list number 1300 2699 IP access list number expanded range WORD name of IP access list in filters incoming updates out filters outgoing updates Use the no parameter with this command to remove an entry 21 2 9 Prefix List A IP prefix list provides a sequential collection of permit and deny conditions that apply to IP addresses in order to achive a powerful prefix based filtering mechanism In addition to access list functionality prefix list has prefix length range specification the number of bits applied to the base to determine the network prefix and sequential number specification The BGP router switches IP addresses one by one against the Id 0900d80580212815 203 IP Routing Operation Manual CLI conditions in a prefix list The first match determines whether the router accepts or rejects the address Using a prefix list is preferred to an access list because of following reasons e time saving when searching and applying data in large filter lists unlimited registration in filter lists easy usage To configure a IP prefix list the operator has to assign a sequential number to each policy registered in the list Filtering by an IP prefix list processes routing information with more detail rules as follows Allows all network information if there is no policy defined in prefix list Rejects specified network informat
203. deletes a syslog message after restart non volatile reserves a syslog message A B C D remote log host IP address Use the no parameter with this command to disable specified syslog output Use the following command to specify an IP address that is attached to the syslog message for its identity Command Mode Function syslog bind address A B C D no syslog bind address Config Specifies IP address for a syslog message identity A B C D IP address Deletes a specified binding IP address 29 3 Setting the local Facility Code Setting a facility code makes a generated syslog message distinguished from others so that a network administrator can efficiently handle various syslog messages To set a facility code use the following command Id 0900d80580221 7ed 261 System Logger Syslog Operation Manual CLI Command Mode Function syslog local code lt 0 7 gt Config Sets local facility code for system use 0 7 from 0 LOG_LOCALO to 7 LOG_LOCAL 7 no syslog local code Deletes a specified facility code 29 4 Verifying and Clearing the local Syslog File To check and delete the messages that are saved in the system memory use the fol lowing commands Command Mode Function show syslog local volatile NUM Exec Shows a received syslog message Config volatile memory to remove a syslog message after restart NUM latest lines number cl
204. der Pool 4 177 Ghecking a Provider Pool recess ogee px bee sed 178 DHCP Relay Agent edax ee Re ERU eY eue tee xs 178 1d 0900d80580251467 Operation Manual CLI 18 3 1 18 3 2 18 3 3 18 4 18 4 1 18 4 2 18 4 3 18 4 4 18 4 5 18 5 18 6 18 7 18 8 18 9 18 10 19 19 1 19 2 19 3 19 4 19 5 19 6 19 7 19 8 20 20 1 20 2 20 3 21 21 1 21 2 2121 21 2 2 21 2 3 21 2 4 21 2 5 21 2 6 224 21 2 8 21 2 9 21 2 10 21 2 11 21 212 21 3 21 3 1 21 3 2 Enabling the DHCP Relay Agent 0000 cece eee eee 178 Registering the DHCP Server 00 cee eee eee eee 178 Checking the Configuration of DHCP Relay 04 179 DHCP Option 82 PPPoE Option 105 ids eee me 179 Enabling the Option 82 Option 105 0 000 eee eee 179 Configuring the Remote ID 00 0c cece ee 180 Setting the Circuit ID Format see nicer Reb eer ere RV 180 VLAN Handling depending on CircuitID 202000000 180 Configuring the DHCP Packet Policy 0 000ee ee eee 181 Configuring Subnet Default Gateway liliis 181 Verifying the DHCP Configuration illie 181 Checking and Clearing the DHCP Statistics liliis 182 Configuring of ARP Floodllg 229595 9T e regedan id testas is 182 Showing Entries of DHCP ARP Table 00 00020 cee aee 183 Deleting an Entry Learned by DHCP ARP 0000000 eee 183 IGMP uod
205. der to assign a DHCP PPPoE provider to the specified VLAN For detailed information see also 18 2 DHCP PPPoE Provider Command Mode Function PROVIDER vian provider dhcp pppoe VLANS none Bridge Configures VLAN provider dhcp configure DHCP provider pppoe configure PPPoE provider VLANS select VLAN IDs e g 101 148 1000 none delete provider from VLAN PROVIDER configure provider index 16 5 Assigning the VLAN to Default Gateway A default gateway is only needed for a subscriber VLAN PVID for a bridge port if the corresponding bridge port uses the IPoA mode In this case a default gateway is required in order to activate the IPoA mode To configure the default gateway use the following command Command Mode Function vian default gateway VLANS DEFGATEWAY none Bridge no vian default gateway VLANS Configures default gateway VLANS select VLAN IDs e g 101 148 1000 DEFGATEWAY IPv4 address of default gateway e g 10 0 0 1 Deletes specified default gateway 16 6 Enabling of Multicast Permission for the VLAN Executing the following command the VLAN will transmit only multicast traffic or IGMP requests Command Mode Function vian multicast permission VLANS disable enable Bridge Configures multicast permission VLANS select VLAN IDs e g 101 148 1000 disable enable multicast permission 16 7 Checking
206. dge Command Mode Function bridgebase onu ONU switching mode Bridge Configures bridgebase ONU switching mode independent vian learning shared vlan learning vlan switching ONU ONU address IU slot GPON link ONU ID vlan switching no learning of MAC addresses all frames are flooded in their VLANs switch key VLAN independent vlan learning bridge learns MAC addresses MAC addresses must be unique for all VLANs switch key MAC VLAN shared vlan learning bridge learns MAC addresses and all existing VLANs MAC addresses must be unique in one VLAN switch key MAC bridgebase onu ONU residential mode on off Bridge Configures bridgebase ONT residential mode ONU ONU address IU slot GPON link ONU ID on no traffic between GPON links possible off traffic between GPON links possible show bridgebase onu ONU Privileged Displays bridge base for ONU Config ONU address IU slot GPON link ONU ID Bridge 158 Id 0900d8058025fb9e Operation Manual CLI Bridges 14 2 14 2 1 Configuring of Bridge Ports Tagging Rules Tagging rules are defined for upstream direction Each table entry represents a tagging rule consisting of a filtering part and a treatment part The filtering part must be unique There are three categories of rules zero tag single tag and double tag rules Logically these categories are separate and apply to their respective incoming frame types Single tag rules have a
207. dge Sets the maximum amount of time a dynamically learned MAC address remains in the MAC table 10 4080 aging time in seconds default value is 300 s show mac aging time Bridge Shows the aging time Clearing dynamically Addresses A dynamic address can also be deleted manually from MAC table when it is unneces sary Command Mode Function clear mac Bridge Deletes the specified dynamically address es from MAC table clear mac NAME NAME enter the bridge name clear mac NAME PORT PORT enter the port number XX XX enter the MAC address clear mac NAME PORT XX XX XX XX XX XX 13 5 2 Static Addresses From Bridge configuration mode use the following command to manage static address entries of a MAC table Command Mode Function mac NAME PORT XX XX XX XX XX XX Bridge Registers static address in MAC table NAME enter the bridge name PORT enter the port number XX XX enter the MAC address Example of registering the MAC address 00 01 02 9a 61 17 in port 12 of MAC table for VLAN 1 SWITCH bridge mac 1 12 00 01 02 9a 61 17 SWITCH bridge Unnecessary static MAC addresses will not be removed regardless after the cycle of MAC aging time They have to be removed manually In another case if an static MAC address needs to be assigned to a new port this MAC address must first be deleted from the MAC address table in order to assign it afterwards to
208. ding the Configuration 2 Modifying the configuration as described in the sections e Assigning the User Ports to Counter Group e Assigning of Multicast Broadcast Traffic to Counter Group Mapping VLAN to Counter 3 Activating the Configuration with Payload Counters 10 11 1 1 Loading the Configuration Before a command that configure the payload counters for a particular traffic flow through the GPON link can be executed the configuration needs to be loaded from CXU s persistent memory When the configuration is loaded for the first time the groups of counters are not assigned default Consecutively the last activated configuration is available 96 d 0900d80580257cd9 Operation Manual CLI Ports Command Mode Function modify payload counter ADDRESS config load Config Loads the configuration from background Necessary before all further payload counter configurations ADDRESS IU GPON port OLT slot GPON port Example SWITCH config modify payload counter 2 1 config load SWITCH config show payload counter config config for pon link 2 1 PAYLOAD COUNTER VLAN TA counter ANA UO FWN ES PAYLOAD COUNTER MULTI is available BLE counter group vlan mapping bit CAST CONFIGURATION none invalid PAYLOAD COUNTER UNI ethernet ethernet ethernet ethernet VoIP VoIP VoIP ethernet ethernet ethernet ethernet
209. ds1 if table2 remote OLT SLOT GPON PORT iind Bertipormnier Hen ONU ID T ONT SLOT ONT PORT ONU ID the ONU ID optional ONT SLOT the ONT slot optional ONT PORT ONT port of E1DS1 interface optional show traffic desc prof table Config Shows traffic description profile table Example Showing the state of Ethernet ports SWITCH bridge show port 9 1 9 4 DUPLEX SPEED FLOWCTRL SFP 9 1 ETHO1 Up 9 2 ETHO2 Upl 9 3 ETHO3 Upl 9 4 ETHO4 Upl SWITCH bridge Wn ON ONON Up Up Up Up Auto Full Up Up Auto Full Up Up Down Ful Down Ful Full 10 10 Dis Dis No E1 Full 1000 10 Dis Dis No E1 l Full 100 10 Dis Dis No E1 1 Full 10 10 Dis Dis No E1 The information provided in Table 20 can be verified using the show port command Parameter TYPE Shows type of port Description Table 20 90 d 0900d80580257cd9 Information displayed by Show Port Command Operation Manual CLI Ports Parameter Description PVID Shows port VLAN ID STATUS Shows status of port ADMIN is up down status by user s configuration and OPER is the real connection status of the GPON MODE Shows the status for the rate of the port Duplex mode auto nego NEGO Shows the auto negotiation configuration of the port DUP Shows the transmit rate
210. e 00 0c eee eee 152 Id 0900d8058025f467 7 Operation Manual CLI 13 4 3 13 4 4 13 4 5 13 5 13 5 1 13 5 2 13 5 3 14 14 1 14 1 1 14 1 2 14 1 3 14 1 4 14 2 14 2 1 14 2 2 14 2 3 14 2 4 14 2 5 14 3 15 15 1 15 2 15 3 15 4 16 16 1 16 2 16 3 16 4 16 5 16 6 16 7 17 17 1 172 17 3 18 18 1 18 2 18 2 1 18 2 2 18 2 3 18 2 4 18 3 Disabling the Enhanced MAC Mode of VLAN 00055 153 Checking VLAN Mapping Information s aaaea anaana 153 Modifying the MAC Mode of VLAN 000 naaa 153 MAC Table ded E hum euer per bed aE dtt E Ea 154 Dynamic Addresses z o SRG easy Sens MUR DRE URS EN RES 154 Static Addresses sicco ep Ded w E pe PR RI RUN eee ES 155 Showing MAC Table Information liliis 155 sio re meas ee aes 157 Configuring the Bridge Base 00 0c eee ee 157 Common Bridge Base Commands 000 cece eee eee 157 CXU zyp lc EET 157 Bridge of Interface Unit uico Pe REEE ER bedu benpeve doe gea 158 ONU BIGOG CREE 158 Configuring of Bridge Ports xs eedem miad dare tps 159 Tagging RUIBS seas ees sa oes oos beraten uade Scand E c p 159 Enhanced Tagging Proille 22 sgikrm REIS REGECEERZSPSSTO TERNARA 161 DSCP to Dot1p Mapping Profile liliis 162 Bridge Port Parameters sus seme ERREUR RR a ERa ERR RR sued 162 Trafic Eirnitetion uds ERE RES eee REI VERRORCEP PDAS E ES 164 POUM cc et cca
211. e Besides a free running profile index an enhanced tagging profile can be also created through a specific index NAME name of profile ITPID inner TPID value for operations on the input filtering side of the profile OTIPD outer TPID for operations on the output tag ging side of the profile Typical values for ITPID ans OTIPD include 0x8a88 and 0x9100 0 1 downstream mode 0 downstream operation is performed as described above 1 no operation is performed in the downstream direction RULELIST index of tagging rule table 1 255 1 65535 index of enhanced tagging profile Modifies parameters of specified enhanced tagging profile Deletes the specified enhanced tagging profile Use the following command to verify the enhanced tagging profiles Id 0900d8058025fb9e 161 Bridges Operation Manual CLI Command Mode Function show enhtagprofile table Bridge Displays information of enhanced tagging profiles 14 2 3 DSCP to Dot1p Mapping Profile A DSCP to 1p mapping profile is necessary dependent on the configured tagging mode of the bridge port see 14 2 4 Bridge Port Parameters as follows If ingress packets are already tagged tagging mode is tagged and the port priority is DSCP the profile will be used to filter frames with allowed 1p priority bits If the tagging mode is set untagged or transparent and the port priority is DSCP a tag will
212. e VLAN fulfills the requirements for the new MAC mode 2 Change the GPON MAC mode The existing VID mapping entries will be deleted automatically 3 Create default VID mapping entries Example The following commands set the MAC in enhanced mode and assign the MAC mode 2 to VLAN 100 SWITCH bridge gpon mac mode enhanced mac SWITCH bridge show base settings SWITCH bridge macmode 100 2 SWITCH bridge sShow macmode 100 MAC Table There are two hardware address types that are registered in a MAC table dynamic MAC addresses and static MAC addresses A static MAC address can be configured by the operator and remains unaffected even after the system was rebooted Dynamic MAC address entries of this table are formed during a learning process in upstream direction Dynamic Addresses Enabling of Address Learning Dynamic addresses are automatically added to the MAC table and dropped from it when they are not in use Command Mode Function mac learning uplink enable disable Bridge MAC learning configuration only uplinks affected enable default disable MAC address learning on uplink ports 154 MAC Aging Time If an NE was not accessed during a specified interval called MAC aging time its reg istered MAC address will be deleted from the table Id 0900d8058023fad7 Operation Manual CLI MAC Command Mode Function mac aging time lt 10 4080 gt Bri
213. e notification off will be sent at the end of the 15 min period since that is when the actual counters are reset to 0 Id 0900d8058023f697 133 Voice over IP Operation Manual CLI Command Mode Function create voip performance callctrl threshold lt 2 16 gt SETFAIL SETTIMER TERMFAIL PORTREL PORTOFFHOCK SEVPTR Config Creates VoIP performance call control threshold object 2 16 table index SETFAIL threshold for call setup failures SETTIMER threshold for call setup timer longest time period of a single call setup TERMFAIL threshold for terminated calls number of calls that were terminated with cause PORTREL threshold for abandon calls number of analog port releases without dialing PORTOFFHOCK Threshold for off hock timer longest time period of a single off hock SEVPTR pointer to alarm severity profile modify voip performance callctrl threshold 1 16 SETFAIL SETTIMER TERMFAIL PORTREL PORTOFFHOCK SEVPTR Modifies VoIP performance threshold table 1 16 table index delete voip performance callctrl threshold 2 16 Deletes VoIP performance threshold table Call Control Objects To configure call control objects use the following commands Command Mode Function create voip performance callctrl object INDEX lock unlock lock I unlock 0 96 0 1 1 16 Config modify voip performance callctrl object NDEX lock unlock
214. e previous protocol on the ports manually To clear the protocol and restart the protocol detected use the following command Command Mode Function stp clear detected protocol PORTS Privileged Clears detected protocol Config PORTS select the port number Bridge 22 4 9 Showing the Configuration To check the xSTP configuration use the following commands Command Mode Function show stp Privileged Shows the configuration of STP RSTP MSTP Config show stp mst ES Shows the configuration when it is configured as MSTP show stp mst MSTID RANGE Shows the configuration of specific Instance MSTID RANGE MST instance number show stp mst MSTID RANGE all PORTS detail Shows the configuration of the specific Instance for the ports all select all ports PORTS select port number detail show detail information as option With show stp command it is possible to check the information about STP RSTP MSTP How to distinguish them is to check which one is marked on the mode If STP or RSTP is configured the MSTID RANGE value should be 0 In case of configured MSTP use the following command Command Mode Function show stp mst config id current pending Privi Shows the MSTP configuration identifier leged current shows the current configuration as it is used to run MST Bridge pending shows the edited configuration Id 0900d80580203028 227
215. e setting the entry time out to config ured value The group entry will be expired when the group membership timer interval is ending fast enables fast leave configures IGMP snooping to stop the transmis sion of a group multicast stream to a port as soon as it receives a Leave message on that port The group entry is expired intermediately No time outs are observed 1 4093 VLAN ID 0 7 multicast priority setting overwrites the current 1p value of the VLAN VLAN tagging operation mode keep keep outer tag unchanged remain remain remain replace replace outer tag by IGMP provider VLAN ID and priority add rewrite rewrite 1 4093 downstream VLAN ID forking 0 7 downstream multicast VLAN priority forking no igmp rfc profile NAME Config Deletes IGMP RFC related profile NAME profile name Example Creating of an IGMP profile with index 4 and name prof1 needed to be used for VLAN forking All downstream MC traffic from the port assigned to this profile will be translated from the first VLAN ID 10 to the second VLAN ID 13 both VLANs have the priority 0 igmp rfc profile 4 profl snooping 2 15 50 normal 10 0 replace 13 0 Assigning prof1 to the ONU port see Assigning of an IGMP Profile igmp onu port rfc profile 2 2 7 4 9 1 profl Verifying of RFC Profiles Command Mode Function show igmp rfc profile NAME Config Shows RFC related profile NAME profile name
216. e with index 1 always exists Command Mode Function gal eth profile create lt 1 65535 gt Bridge Creates GEM adoption layer ethernet profile F 1 65535 payload size create gal eth profile lt 1 65535 gt gal eth profile delete lt 2 16 gt Bridge Deletes GEM adoption layer ethernet profile F 2 16 gal eth profile table index delete gal eth profile lt 2 16 gt gal tdm profile create byte stuffing bit stuffing Bridge Creates GEM adoption layer time division multiplexing profile sync residual timestamp LOF byte stuffing byte stuffing A bit stuffing bit stuffing create gal tdm profile byte stuffing bit stuffing sync residual timestamp synchronous residual time stamp sync residual timestamp LOF LOF duration of the GEM frame loss integration period ms gal tdm profile delete lt 2 16 gt Bridge Deletes GEM adaption layer time division multiplexing profile F 2 16 GAL TDM profile table index delete gal tdm profile lt 2 16 gt Command Mode Function show gal eth prof table Config Displays GEM adaption layer Ethernet profile table Bridge show gal tdm prof table TH Displays GEM adaption layer time division multiplexing profile table 10 2 4 GEM Traffic Description Profiles The traffic descriptor profile of a GEM port can only be modified if such ONTS MDU cards which are using it were set in admin state locked or they are offline The command param
217. eAlarm 59 critical 01 Mon 14 Jul 2008 13 35 51 Interface 201 gponGponLineAlarmOnuMismatch 39 critical 01 Mon 14 Jul 2008 13 36 50 Physical Entity 270497 gponGponOnuNotInstalled All values are decimals SWITCH config show gpon unknown onus address serial registrationID 2 1 1 4349474707021259 pne d 0900d80580257da6 69 ONU Equipment Operation Manual CLI 2 Verifying the Configuration of the Unknown ONU SWITCH config show onu table 2 1 1 OltSlot 2 GponPort 1 OnuId 1 Configured onu type G25A 001 Serialnumber method 1 configured mode Serialnumber ASCII CIGG 9 99 Serialnumber HEX 0x4349474707020000 Password Reg Id ASCII 0 999 90900909 Password Reg Id HEX 0x00000000000000000000 Equipment Id ASCII OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO0O00 Equipment Id HEX 0x0000000000000000000000000000000000000000 Version ASCII OOOOOOOOOOO0O000 Version HEX 0x0000000000000000000000000000 Vendor Id ASCII soe Vendor Id HEX 0x00000000 Vendor product code 0 Pptp index z 201 Physical index 270369 Alarmseverity profile oi Onu is detected 2 2 false Adminstate 3 1 ONU unlocked Operstate 2 ONU disabled Security option 1 SecurityOption unknown Security mode 0 no encryption selected Key length 128 bit Key switching time 5 min BackupOption unknown Backup disabled Battery backup option Battery
218. eam power fixed force to configured rate 0 255 value from 0 to 25 5 dBm in steps of 0 1 dBm default 0 dBm Max nominal PSD Bit Swapping Subcarrier Mask Command Mode Function xdsl line config profile PROFILE Bridge Set max nominal transmit PSD during initialization and showtime down max nom psd up max nom psd PROFILE enter the profile name MAX_NOM_PSD down max nom psd max nominal transmit PSD in downstream direction during initialization and showtime up max nom psd max nominal transmit PSD in upstream direction during initialization and showtime MAX_NOM_PSD Value between 600 300 in 0 1 dBm Hz xdsl line config profile PROFILE Bridge Enables disables downstream upstream bit swapping on xDSL line down bitswap up bitswap enable disable PROFILE enter the profile name Id 0900d80580256ef1 111 XDSL Operation Manual CLI Command Mode Function xdsl line config profile PROFILE Bridge Sets user selection for any of the 512 ADSL bins 1 bit per Bin custom subc mask upstream downstream PROFILE enter the profile name BINSET upstream upstream subcarrier mask downstream downstream subcarrier mask BINSET 128 values like 123456789ABCDEF CR resets mask to 64 x FF only for ADSL Depending on the used standard only a subset of bin s will be used Example G992 1 ADSL AnnexA bin 1 32 related to US and bin 33 256 related to DS direction G9
219. ear syslog local volatile Config Deletes received syslog message from the system memory volatile deletes memory to remove a syslog message after restart 29 5 Checking the Syslog Configuration Use the following command to verify the syslog configuration i The syslog configuration cannot be checked by using a show running config command Command Mode Function show syslog Exec Shows a configuration of the syslog config The following example shows a configuration that an emergency message sends to the console and all messages of level info and higher saves in the volatile file SWITCH config show syslog info local volatile emerg console SWITCH config 29 6 Enabling Disabling of Syslog Function fi It is important that syslog is always running on the system Therefore syslog is enabled after the system start reboot by default Executing the syslog start command is only necessary when the function was manually disabled Use the following commands to enable disable the syslog function Command Mode Function syslog start Config Enables the syslog no syslog Disables the syslog 262 Id 0900d80580221 7ed Operation Manual CLI Remote Monitoring 30 30 1 Remote Monitoring Remote monitoring RMON is a function to observe the communication status of con nected Ethernet devices While SNMP can advertise only information about devices mounted via SNMP ag
220. ecific interface and overrides any the version specified by the version command Command Mode Function ip rip send version 1 Interface Specifies sending of RIPv1 packets out of an interface ip rip send version 2 Specifies sending of RIPv2 packets out of an interface ip rip send version 1 2 Permits sending of both RIPv1 and v2 packets out of an interface ip rip receive version 1 Specifies acceptance of RIPv1 packets on the interface ip rip receive version 2 Specifies acceptance of RIPv2 packets on the interface ip rip receive version 1 2 Specifies acceptance of RIPv1 and v2 packets on the interface 212 G Use the no parameter with the commands above to use the global RIP version control rules Timers Routing protocols use several timers that determine such variables as the frequency of routing updates the length of time before a route becomes invalid and other Id 0900d80580212815 Operation Manual CLI IP Routing parameters You can adjust these timers to tune routing protocol performance to better suit your internet needs Command timers basic update timeout garbage Router Adjusts routing protocol timers Values in seconds Range of the values is 5 Mode Function 2147483647 update routing table update timer default is 30 timeout routing information timeout timer After this interval has elapsed and no updates
221. ecifies the IP address of network being advertised Use the no parameter with this command to remove an entry 21 2 3 Configuring BGP Neighbor Routers A BGP router must completely understand the relationships with its neighbors To configure BGP peers use the following commands Defining Neighbors First the following command must be used before configuring a neighbor Command Mode Function neighbor A B C D WORD remote as lt 1 65535 gt Router Configures an internal or external BGP iBGP or eBGP TCP session with another router A B C D IPv4 address of BGP neighbor WORD name of an existing peer group 1 65535 AS number of neighbor i A peer group support is configured only after creating a specific peer group Example Following tasks are performed Definition of a BGP routing process The number 65001 specifies the AS number of the router Definition of BGP neighbors and establish of a TCP session 1 2 3 4 is the IP address of the neighbor and 65000 is the neighbor s AS number SWITCH configure terminal SWITCH config router BGP 650001 SWITCH config router neighbor 1 2 3 4 remote as 65000 SWITCH config router exit Clearing BGP Neighbor Routes Use the following command to delete all contents of specific cache table and database when some factors are invalid or unreliable Command Mode Function clear ip bgp A B C D as number
222. ecking the Configuration of DHCP Relay Enter the following commands to display the relay information Command Mode Function show dhcp relay Config show ip dhcp relay Shows DHCP relay agent configuration 18 4 DHCP Option 82 PPPoE Option 105 Option 82 is used by the relay agent to insert additional information into the subscriber s DHCP request This information can be used to implement policies intended to improve security and efficiency The DHCP option 82 field is defined by the two sub options Circuit ID and Remote ID The sent circuit ID string contains e g information about the port and the VLAN over which the DHCP request is coming in It will be replaced dynamically when a DHCP request is received with a VLAN depending on the string The remote ID is unique for the system It identifies the relay agent to the DHCP server by information about the system MAC default a free configurable MAC an arbitrary IP address or an config urable string The circuit ID priority is higher than the remote ID priority When the System receives request packets without option 82 information it attached its own infor mation When the remote ID recorded in option 82 is equal to system s MAC address it transmits the packets after removing option 82 via the designated port number 18 4 14 Enabling the Option 82 Option 105 To enable DHCP option82 PPPoE option 105 use the following commands Comman
223. ection The xTUs shall choose the S factor and D depth values such that the actual one way xDSL channel interleave delay is as close as possible to but less than or equal to this parameter PROFILE enter the profile name max interdelay ds Max interleave delay for downstream channel max interdelay us Max interleave delay for upstream channel 0 255 value in milliseconds There are three special values defined 0 indicates no delay bound is being imposed 1 indicates the Fast Latency Path shall be used in the G 992 1 and S and D shall be selected such that S lt 1 and D 1 in ITU T G 992 2 G 992 3 G 992 4 G 992 5 and G 993 2 255 indicates a delay bound of 1 ms in ITU T G 993 2 same as value 1 for other recommendations If the value 1 or 255 is selected then the configured value for channel profile min INPDs should be off 0 xdsl chan config profile PROFILE min inp ds min inp us off halfsymbol l011121314151617181 9110111112113114115116 Bridge Configures minimum Impulse noise protection INP on xDSL line PROFILE enter the profile name off off halfsymbol 0 5 symbol 0 0 symbol off 1 16 1 symbol 16 symbols xdsl chan config profile PROFILE max bit errorrate ds max bit errorrate us 10E 7 I 10E 5 10E 3 Bridge Configures maximum value for allowed bit error rate for the bearer channel PROFILE enter the profile name max bit errorrate ds maxim
224. efined by IANA Default value is UDP 0x11 DIFFSERVFIELD TOS diffserv field of the IPv4 header The contents of this attribute may contain the Type of Service as per RFC 1349 or the DSCP Valid values for DSCP are as defined by IANA Default value is OxO Modifies TCP UDP port parameter VAL value for TOS diffserv field Deletes TCP UDP port 130 1d 0900d8058023f697 Operation Manual CLI Voice over IP Command Mode Function create voip ip host tcp udp port addr ADRESS Config Creates TCP UDP ports PORT_ID PROTOCOL DIFFSERVFIELD ADDRESS slot port ONT ID ONT slot modify voip ip host tcp udp port addr tosdiffser Modifies TCP UDP port parameter ADDRESS PORT ID VAL delete voip ip host tcp udp port addr ADDRESS PORT ID Deletes TCP UDP port address 12 2 3 Checking the Configuration To show configuration data use the following commands Command Mode Function show voip ip host config data table Exec Shows the whole VoIP IP host config data table show voip ip host config data table addr ADDRESS Config Shows the specified VoIP IP host config data table ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port ONT ID ONT slot show voip ip host tcp udp table Exec Shows the whole VoIP IP host TCP UDP table show voip ip host tcp udp table addr ADDRESS Config Shows the specified VoIP IP host TCP UDP table ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port ONT ID ONT slot 12 3 VoIP Conf
225. efixes containing duplicate AS numbers Accept AS path with own AS present in it 1 10 Number of occurrences of AS number Use the no parameter with this command to disable the re advertisement of a PE router s AS number neighbor A B C D WORD capability dynamic Router Enables the dynamic capability for a specific peer to allow a BGP speaker to advertise or withdraw an address family capability to a peer in a non disruptive manner Use the no parameter with this command to disable the dynamic capability neighbor A B C D WORD capability orf prefix list both I receive send Router Configures to advertising prefixlist ORF Outbound Route Filter capability to the peer both the local router can SEND ORF entries to its peer as well as RECEIVE ORF entries from its peer receive Capability to RECEIVE the ORF from specified peer send Capability to SEND the ORF to specified peer i Only an individual router or a peer group but no peer group member can be configured to be in receive or send mode neighbor A B C D WORD capability route refresh Router Configures advertising route refresh capability to the speci fied neighbor neighbor A B C D WORD default originate route map WORD Router Allows a BGP local router to send the default route 0 0 0 0 to a neighbor for use as a default route route map Route map to specify criteria to originate default WORD route map
226. el VLANS PORTS Deletes associated ports from specified VLAN 170 i To assign several ports to a VLAN enter each port separated by a comma without space Use dash mark to arrange port range Example The example shows the following steps Enter the Configuration mode enable a switching process and perform the configura tion tasks Create a VLAN add a untagged port to the VLAN add a PVID to port see 14 2 4 Bridge Port Parameters show VLAN configuration see 16 7 Checking the VLAN Configura tion enable VLAN interface see 15 1 Enabling of an Interface show interface config uration Enter nterface mode Add IP address enable interface exit interface mode show interface configuration SWITCH configure terminal SWITCH config bridge SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH lan create 4 lan add 4 9 1 untagged bridge dv bridge v bridge bridgeport 9 1 pvid 4 bridge exit config host vlan 4 config show vlan config show vlan config show interface br4 1d 0900d80580221ef7 Operation Manual CLI VLAN SWI SWI SWI SWI SWI TCH config interface br4 TCH config if ip address 172 0 0 1 26 TCH config if no shutdown TCH config if exit TCH config show interface br4 16 4 Assigning the VLAN to DHCP PPPoE Provider Use the following commands in or
227. ent RMON allows exchanging network monitoring data for devices overall segments For Ethernet interfaces RMON gathers cumulative statistics and tracks a history of statistics The RMON standard defines objects that are suitable for an effectively management of Ethernet networks Because RMON processes lots of data take care to prevent performance degradation caused by RMON The hiX 5750 R2 0 supports the following RMON groups as described in RFC 1757 Group 1 statistics only for uplink ports Group 2 history Configures Number of RMON History RMON history is periodical sample inquiry of statistical data about each traffic occurred in Ethernet port All ports are pre configured to monitor statistical data in an interval of 30 minute and to archive 50 statistical data It is also possible to change the time interval taking the sample and the number of samples that should be saved The default configuration of history is displayed as result of the following command SWITCH config show rmon history config 1 RMON History configuration history index SE data source 0 1 1 buckets requested 50 buckets granted 50 interval time s 1800 owner none status under create SWITCH config To configure RMON history enter into History configuration mode first The system prompt changes from SWITCH config to SWITCH config rmonhistory n The variable n is the number to be configured to distingu
228. er hae aeu 66 Greatibg am ONU 2 72 3 ccaes tant EE S phate eels PU S ibd 67 Modifying ONU Parameter llsllsleee eee 68 Deleting am ON otio die a dar eei b DUg dob padebErodha ge 68 Getting List of Unknown ONTsS 2000 0 cee ee 69 Replacing an ONU perierint e be cote td dede bere dS bus 69 Setting the Nummbet of Fats io grs unused dace ie Se P ELe dus nib e ge des 72 Synchronizing the ONU Time 200 0c ee a 73 Reser anm oj 5 ciunsnd esee S eet S idc medie see es 73 Performing the ONU Selftest 0 0 0 0 0 cece eee eee 73 Managing the Software Load 02 0c eee eee eens 73 Checking the List of Alarms 0000 c cee ee 73 Checking the Configuration 0 0 600 eee 74 Checking the MAC Table aimed igiene mero ber visa ds 75 MDW hiX 5709 5 eui Rem Reno tatatheee e RU Pe deeeeeem sd 75 Creating of MDW Cards ss np bei s ee iigies tatnregiaa seeded 76 Changing the Admin State ss cse eR ERR E Gd n howe SHE s 76 Setting of Alarm Severities and External Alarms 005 76 Setting the Number of Fans 00 0c c eee eee eee 77 Checking the Configuration Data 0 0 c eee 77 eln E sent E pple esp tid EE E E E Hn 78 General Conflgltratlon e e casee o eee a a E E EEE 78 GPON Port Configuration urb RR RE RP R 3 ER 79 MS OMS renean mi s botutetan nudatus Eb E exu pedum t ces 79 DBA and OverbooOkilig x so crassi RR dawns ceed EEG ERE AE 80 GEM
229. ermit deny 3 LINE Config Creates community list 1 99 standard community list number WORD ip community list 100 199 permit deny LINE Config Creates community list 21 2 12 100 199 expanded community list number A community is notated with a form AA NN as defined in RFC AA is the local AS number and NN is a number of 2 bytes i Use the no parameter with this commands to delete community list entries Determining the State of BGP Specific statistics such as contents of BGP routing table cache and database can be displayed to determine resource utilization and solve network problems Displaying information about node reachability and discover the routing path the packets are taking through the network is also possible To display various routing statistics use following commands Command Mode Function show ip bgp prefix list VAME Privileged Shows peers to which the prefix has been advertised Config 206 d 0900d80580212815 Operation Manual CLI IP Routing Command Mode Function show ip bgp cidr only Privileged Displays all BGP routes including subnetwork and upper Config network show ip bgp community number local AS no advertise Privileged Displays route belonged in specific community Community no export Config Number is formed as AA NN show ip bgp community list WORD exact match Privilege
230. esignated root 2000 080006261d2f root port 0 0 path cost 0 Port id AdminCost Cost Role State Attribute 0 1 2001 0 20000 designated forwarding P2P 0 2 8002 0 20000 backup blocking P2P 0 3 8003 0 20000 designated forwarding P2P 0 4 8004 0 20000 backup blocking P2P 0 5 8005 0 disable disabled 0 6 8006 0 disable disabled SWITCH bridge 22 4 2 Deciding of Path Cost After deciding the root switch there is the need to determine on which route packets has to be forwarded The parameter to do this is the path cost value Generally the path cost depends on the transmission speed of the LAN interface The following table shows path costs according to transmit rate of LAN interface Transmit Rate Path cost 4M 250 10M 100 100M 19 1G 4 10G 2 Table 24 STP Path Cost 224 Id 0900d80580203028 Operation Manual CLI Spanning Tree Transmit Rate Path cost 4M 20 000 000 10M 2 000 000 100M 200 000 1G 20 000 10G 2 000 Table 25 RSTP Path Cost If the route decided by path cost gets overloading another route should be taken Con sidering these situations there is the possibility for the operator to determine a route manually by configuring the path cost of the root port In order to configure path cost use following commands Command Mode Function stp mst path cost MST ID_RANGE PORTS lt 0 200000000 gt Bridge Configures path cost to configure route MS
231. ess of primary DNS server A B C D address of secondary DNS server If values are set they will override any values returned in DHCP Updating Retrieving an IP Host Configuration Table Use the following commands to show the update retrieve the IP host s config data table retrieve voip ip host config data table addr ADDRESS Command Mode Function update voip ip host config data table NDEX Exec Updates VoIP IP host config table Config INDEX Interface index of ONT which provides IP host services update voip ip host config data table addr ADDRESS ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port ONT ID ONT slot retrieve voip ip host config data table NDEX Exec Retrieves VoIP IP host config table Config INDEX Interface index of ONT which provides IP host services ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port ONT ID ONT slot 12 2 2 Configuring the TCP UDP Port Table Use the following commands to configure the TCP UDP port Command Mode Function create voip ip host tcp udp port F_INDEX PORT ID PROTOCOL DIFFSERVFIELD modify voip ip host tcp udp port tosdiffser F NDEX PORT ID VAL delete voip ip host tcp udp port F NDEX PORT ID Config Creates TCP UDP port IF INDEX physical interface index of IP host service primary index of ONT PORT D port ID of TCP UDP port 1 65535 Default value is 2944 for text message formats and 2955 for binary message formats PROTOCOL protocol type available as d
232. essage to the multicast router the router transmits the multicast packet only to that port The hiX 5750 R2 0 provides the following IGMP operation modes IGMP switching mode IGMP snooping mode e IGMP proxy mode In the IGMP switching mode MC traffic is forwarded over all ports of the MC VLAN IGMP snooping is a function to find those ports which send a join message to join in specific MC group to receive MC packets or leave message to get out of the MC group because it does not need packets anymore Only when the OLT is connected to an MC router IGMP snooping can be enabled IGMP proxy acts in a dual mode as IGMP router and IGMP host When interacting with the subscribers the proxy appears as an IGMP router sending queries downstream When interacting with the MC router the proxy appears as an IGMP host sending IGMP membership report and leave group messages on behalf of subscribers IGMP configuration is described in the following chapters Global Settings IGMP RFC Profile GMP Provider e Multicast Package and Group e IGMP Operation Mode e Configuring of Queries Parameters e IGMP Subscriber Port e Assigning of an ONU Port to static Multicast Groups i For information about how to enable MC VLAN see 16 6 Enabling of Multicast Per mission for the VLAN 19 1 Global Settings To disable enable global IGMP and configure the maximum number of subscribers joining a multicast group use the following commands
233. estination IP no lacp aggregator distmode AGGREGETIONS Clears destination MAC address of CXU lacp iu SLOT aggregator distmode AGGREGATIONS Bridge Manages distribution method of IU ports to aggregator srcmac dstmac srcdstmac srcip dstip srcdstip AGGREGATORS aggregator numbers 0 4 SLOT select IU slot number no lacp iu SLOT aggregator distmode AGGREGATIONS Deletes aggregator of IU ports The aggregator ID of an LAG cannot be configured repeatedly Id 0900d8058020266d 235 Link Aggregation Operation Manual CLI 24 3 8 Configuring the Member Ports After configuring the aggregator choose the physical ports that should be member of the LAG port using the following commands in Bridge configuration mode Command Mode Function lacp port PORTS Bridge Configures physical port that is member port of aggregator PORT port number s that should be enabled for LACP slot port slot 0 is CXU slot Use the no parameter with this command to release a member port of aggregator lacp iu SLOT port PORTS Bridge Configures physical port that is member port of aggregator PORT port number s that should be enabled for LACP Slot Port SLOT select IU slot number Use the no parameter with this command to release a member port of aggregator i It is possible to configure several ports by using the delimiter or 24 3 4 Configuring Operating Mode of Member Port After configuring the
234. eter priority ID 1 8 is an internal index to address GEM ports on an interface By default packets with a higher 1p priority will be forwarded over a GEM port with higher or equal priority ID than packets with lower 1p priority Id 0900d80580257cd9 81 Ports Operation Manual CLI Command Mode Function create traffic desc profile 0 150000 lt 0 150000 gt Bridge Creates traffic description profile g 0 150000 SIR sustained information rate kbps traffic desc profile create lt 0 150000 gt lt 0 150000 gt 0 150000 PIR peak information rate kbps gemport eth voip e1ds1ll xdsl GEMPORTS lt 1 8 gt Bridge Configures traffic descriptor profile of GEM port modify traffic desc profile lt 0 16 gt eth Ethernet port 7 voip internal voice over IP interface modify gemport traffic desc profile eth voip etdst1ll I eidsill E1DS1 leased line interface xdsl GEMPORTS 1 8 0 16 xdsl xDSL port modify gemport eth voip e1ds1ll xdsl GEMPORTS GEMPORTS OLT slot GPON port ONU ID ONU slot ONU port 1 8 traffic desc profile 0 16 1 8 priority ID of GEM port 0 16 index of profile table 1 16 0 no profile used traffic desc profile delete 1 16 Bridge Deletes traffic description profile 1 16 index of traffic description profile delete traffic desc profile 1 16 Command Mode Function show traffic desc
235. etworks explain issues which may not be covered by the document Nokia Siemens Networks will correct errors in this documentation as soon as possible IN NO EVENT WILL NOKIA SIEMENS NETWORKS BE LIABLE FOR ERRORS IN THIS DOCUMEN TATION OR FOR ANY DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO SPECIAL DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL OR ANY LOSSES SUCH AS BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF PROFIT REVENUE BUSINESS INTERRUPTION BUSINESS OPPORTUNITY OR DATA THAT MAY ARISE FROM THE USE OF THIS DOCUMENT OR THE INFORMATION IN IT This documentation and the product it describes are considered protected by copyrights and other intellectual property rights according to the applicable laws The wave logo is a trademark of Nokia Siemens Networks Oy Nokia is a registered trademark of Nokia Corporation Siemens is a registered trademark of Siemens AG Other product names mentioned in this document may be trademarks of their respective owners and they are mentioned for identification purposes only Copyright Nokia Siemens Networks 2007 2008 All rights reserved A Important Notice on Product Safety Elevated voltages are inevitably present at specific points in this electrical equipment Some of the parts may also have elevated operating temperatures Non observance of these conditions and the safety instructions can result in personal injury or in property damage Therefore only trained and qualified personnel may install and maintain the system
236. evel by the switch to transmit packets Using the address resolution protocol ARP the switch finds the MAC hardware address that matches to a given IP address Once determined the IP address MAC association is stored in an ARP table for rapid retrieval Referring to the entries in this table a packet which is containing a known IP address is transmitted to the network ARP is enabled by default and cannot be disabled Managing of ARP Table Entries Becauce most of the hosts support dynamic address resolution the contents of the ARP table will be automatically registered when a MAC address corresponding to a gathered IP address is found To install a permanent entry in the ARP table that maps a specific IP address to a MAC address use the following commands Command Mode Function arp A B C D Config Sets a static ARP entry XX XX XX XX XX XX A B C D enter the IP address XX XX XX enter the MAC address arp A B C D IFNAME enter a interface name XX XX XX XX XX XX FNAME Example of static registering IP address 10 1 1 1 and MAC address 00 d0 cb 00 00 01 SWITCH config arp 110 1 1 1 00 d0 cb 00 00 01 Use the following commands to delete a specified IP address and its related MAC address or all the contents from the ARP table Command Mode Function no arp A B C D Config Negates a static ARP entry or sets its entries default A B C D enter the IP address no arp A B C D IFNAME IFNAME enter t
237. ex 201 Physical index 270369 Alarmseverity profile 1 Onu is detected 2 false Adminstate 2 ONU locked Operstate 2 ONU disabled Security option 1 SecurityOption unknown Security mode 0 no encryption selected Key length 128 bit Key switching time 1 5 min Battery backup option 1 BackupOption unknown Battery backup mode 2 Backup disabled Traffic management option 1 cellRateControlled Powerlevel 0 Pvid 0 Number of Fans 0 Distance 0 metre User data 2 1 1 G25 A 4 Unlocking the ONU Unlock the ONU and wait until the discovery method is finished The serial number is filled in and the Serial number method is set to configured There are no further con figuration steps required the OLT ranges the replacement ONU with the original config uration data d 0900d80580257da6 71 ONU Equipment Operation Manual CLI SWITCH config modify onu adminstate 2 1 1 unlock SWITCH config show onu table 2 1 1 OltSlot 2 GponPort 1 OnuId 1 Configured onu type G25A 001 Serialnumber method 1 configured mode Serialnumber ASCII CIGG Y Serialnumber HEX 0x4349474707021259 Password Reg Id ASCII 0007021259 Password Reg Id HEX 0x30303037303231323539 Equipment Id ASCII 00000000109 00120 05 Equipment Id HEX 0x30303030303030303130392D30303132302D3035 Version ASCII 00109 00120 05 Version HEX 0x30303130392D3030313230
238. f Alarms Command Mode Function show alarm list ont addr ADDRESS Config Displays the alarms with a certain ONT address ONT and ONT cards ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port ONU ID Id 0900d80580257da 6 73 ONU Equipment Operation Manual CLI Command Mode Function show alarm list ont card addr ADDRESS Exec Displays the alarms with a certain ONT card address Config ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port ONU ID ONU slot 9 13 Checking the Configuration Command Mode Function show onu type hiX5701 002 hiX5701 003 hiX5701 004 Config Search for the specified ONU type hiX5702 001 hiX5703 001 hiX5703 003 I hiX5705 001 ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port ONU ID hiX5705 003 hix5709 001 hix5709 003 g25a 001 g25a 002 g25a 003 g25c 001 g25e 001 g25e 002 I g50a 001 g50a 002 g80rg 001 ADDRESS show onu adminstate unlocked locked ADDRESS Config Displays ONU IDs with the specified administrative state unlocked show unlocked ONUs locked show locked ONUs ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port ONU ID show onu operstat enabled disabled ADDRESS Config Displays ONU IDs with specified operational state enabled show enabled ONUs disabled show disabled ONUs ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port ONU ID show onu serialnumber SERIAL NUMBER Config Search for the specified serial number of an ONU SERIAL NUMBER Enter the serial number show onu ids used free
239. f command Using command history Ctrl C Aborts command and moves to next line Ctrl L Clears screen and redisplays line Ctrl Z Changes to Privileged Exec mode Table 14 CLI Key Combinations Id 0900d8058024303c 29 Using CLI Operation Manual CLI 30 2 5 Port Indices and Slot Assignments CLI SNMP System Shelf Module Slot for IUs Slot number used in GPON Slotnumberused slot type CXUs and PMs OLT for port entry in ACI 1 2 3 4 5 6 hiX5750 E 101 IU 1 1 101 102 IU 2 2 102 103 IU 3 3 103 104 IU 4 4 104 105 IU 5 5 105 106 IU 6 6 106 107 IU 7 7 107 108 IU 8 8 108 109 CXU 9 9 109 110 CXU 10 10 110 111 IU 11 11 111 112 IU 12 12 112 113 IU 13 13 113 114 IU 14 14 114 115 IU 15 15 115 116 IU 16 16 116 117 PM1 17 not supported 117 118 PM2 18 118 hiX5750 A 101 IU 1 1 101 102 IU 2 2 102 103 IU 3 3 103 104 IU 4 4 104 105 IU 5 5 105 106 IU 6 6 106 107 IU 7 7 107 108 IU 8 8 108 109 CXU 9 9 109 110 CXU 10 10 110 111 IU 11 11 111 112 IU 12 12 112 113 IU 13 13 113 114 IU 14 14 114 115 IU 15 15 115 116 IU 16 16 116 117 PM3 17 no supported 117 Table 15 Port Indices and Slot Assignment d 0900d8058024303c Operation Manual CLI Using CLI Entry of the module and port number The entries for IUs and CXUs are made as x y with x s
240. fied Config show irl ifmap slot SLOT Privileged Displays all IRL mapping information for a specified slot Config together with their profile name SLOT slot number show irl ifmap profile PROFILENAME Privileged Displays all ports of the whole system all slots which are cur Config rently mapped to any given profile PROFILENAME enter the profile name show irl ifmap Privileged Displays IRL mapping information Config 252 d 0900d80580202c91 Operation Manual CLI SNMP 28 28 1 SNMP An SNMP simple network management protocol system consists of three parts SNMP manager managed device and SNMP agent SNMP is an application layer protocol that allows the SNMP manager and agent stations to communicate with each other The SNMP manager and the agent use an SNMP Management Information Base MIB and a relatively small set of commands in order to exchange information The SNMP MIB is organized in a tree structure with individual variables such as point status or description that are represented as leaves on the branches An object identifier OID is used in order to distinguish each variable uniquely in the MIB and in SNMP messages The SNMP configuration on the system determines the relationship between SNMP manager and agent According to the community different rights can be given read only write or both read and write The SNMP trap message allows the agent to sponta neously inform the SNMP ma
241. fig map priority to queue mapping scheduling mode scheduling mode weight queue weights factory defaults default values all all information Id 0900d8058025faf9 175 DHCP and PPPoE Operation Manual CLI 18 DHCP and PPPoE The dynamic host control protocol DHCP enables a DHCP server to manage a pool of available IP addresses and to assign them automatically to devices upon request Depending on its configuration the hiX 5750 R2 0 can work as DHCP relay agent for warding DHCP packets between clients and servers A DHCP relay agent extends the reach of a DHCP server so that it is unnecessary to use several DHCP servers to accommodate several IP subnets PPPoE provides the ability to connect subscribers e g ADSL customers over a simple bridging access to the provider network PPPoE offers a solution for providing high speed broadband Internet access that simplifies user configuration utilizes standard Ethernet devices and provides a familiar user interface The DHCP PPPOE configuration is described in the following sections e Configuring of the DHCP PPPoE Telegram Handling e DHCP PPPOE Provider e DHCP Relay Agent e DHCP Option 82 PPPoE Option 105 e Configuring Subnet Default Gateway e Verifying the DHCP Configuration Checking and Clearing the DHCP Statistics e Configuring of ARP Flooding Showing Entries of DHCP ARP Table Deleting an Entry Learned by DHCP ARP i For information about
242. ftware loads identical run ning stored backup loads i To backup or restore the configuration data use the FTP upload and download commands that are described in the following sections i See 9 11 Managing the Software Load for information about how to manage the software load of an ONU FTP Download Process Use the following commands to download the software load and configuration data from an FTP server towards the remote NE The load file name used in the following commands must have an extension that is composed of up to maximal 5 characters e g gpon r205 cxu_f 0 004 or gpon r205 cxu_f 0 004_1 File names without extension could damage the internal upgrade system 1d 0900d8058023 449 Operation Manual CLI System Basic Configuration Command Mode Function download cxu load config ADDRESS FILE download iu load ADDRESS FILE download iu load alloftype ADDRESS FILE download remote load ADDRESS FTP SERVER FILE ignore operstate download remote load help download remote load stop request FTP Upload Process Config Upgrades OS image or board configuration load software load config configuration data ADDRESS server ID address or hostname FILE source file name according to the selected command load file or configuration file Upgrades IU image or configuration ADDRESS server ID address or host name FILE source file name load file
243. ge SWITCH bridge vlan create vlan id SWITCH bridge vlan add vlan id port tagged SWITCH bridge exit Configure the interface and the default route see Chapters 16 2 Enabling a Host VLAN 15 2 Assigning an IP Address to the Interface and 21 1 Static Routes SWITCH config host vlan vlan id SWITCH config interface br vlan id SWITCH config if ip address lt ip address of the management interface according to the project documentation gt lt mask gt SWITCH config if no shutdown SWITCH config if exit SWITCH config ip route destination network gt lt mask gt default gateway according to the project documentation gt Configure the SNMP trap destination see Chapter 3 2 2 Configuring the Outband Interface The configuration must be stored in the persistent CKU memory see Chapter 3 2 2 Configuring the Outband Interface System Login Access the hiX 5750 R2 0 as follows 1 2 After starting the terminal session the login prompt is displayed SWITCH login Enter the login ID root default and the password siemens7 default to move into the User exec mode SWITCH login root Password entered characters are hidden SWITCH gt From the User exec mode the configuration of the hiX 5750 R2 0 can be only veri fied To configure and manage the system enter into the Privileged exec mode SWITCH gt enable SWITCH Telnet Access fi Before a remote user can acces
244. ggregator number AGGREGATIONS aggregator IDs that should be enabled for LACP valid value from 0 to 1 0 15 admin key value default 0 Release admin key of designated aggregator number no lacp aggregator delay AGGREGATIONS lt 0 65535 gt Bridge Release collector max delay of designated aggregator number AGGREGATIONS aggregator IDs that should be disabled for LACP 0 65535 delay value The aggregator ID of an LAG cannot be configured repeatedly 24 3 2 Configuring Packet Route When packets enter to an LAG port and there is no process to decide the packet route the packets could be gathered on particular member port In this case it is not possible to use the logical port effectively Therefore the hiX 5750 R2 0 is configurable to route packets in order to distribute them on the member ports The route is decided by source IP address destination IP address source MAC address destination MAC address The hiX 5750 R2 0 uses source destination MAC address by default to choose the packet route Command Mode Function lacp aggregator distmode AGGREGETIONS Bridge Manages distribution method of CXU ports to aggregator srcmac dstmacl srcdstmacl srcipl dstipl srcdstip AGGREGATORS select the aggregator ID 0 1 srcmac set source MAC dstmac set destination MAC srcdstmac set source destination MAC default srcip set source IP dstip set destination IP srcdstip set source d
245. gin for rate upshift VTU R downstream 0 310 value from 0 31 dBm in steps of 0 1dBm xdsl line config profile PROFILE vtuc down snr time vtuc up snr time vtur down snr time vtur up snr time lt 0 16383 gt Bridge Sets SNR margin the downshift upshift min time on xDSL line PROFILE enter the profile name vtuc down snr time min time that current margin lt DownshiftSnrMgnbe fore downshift VTU C upstream occurs vtuc up snr time min time that current margin gt UpshiftSnrMgnbefore upshift VTU C upstream occurs vtur down snr time min time that current margin lt DownshiftSnrMgnbe fore downshift VTU R downstream occurs vtur up snr time min time that current margin gt UpshiftSnrMgnbefore upshift VTU R downstream occurs 0 16383 value in seconds xdsl line config profile PROFILE msg min up msg min down lt 4 248 gt Bridge Configures the min rate of message based overhead maintained by the xTU in the upstream downstream direction PROFILE enter the profile name 4 248 value in kbps Power Back off PBO To improve spectral compatibility VDSL systems on short lines need to reduce their transmit PSDs such that the performance of other broadband systems will not be unfairly compromised The process of reducing the PSDs of VDSL according to frequency and electrical loop lengths is known as power back off PBO Downstream PBO 112 1d 0900d80580256ef1
246. group1 for show 1 64 counter group end index group2 for show show only group1 if goup2 is left blank Shows the counter information from last get single request Examples The following examples illustrates the reports for the case that the OLT runs in enhanced MAC mode 1 Displaying of all counter groups which were got and reset SWITCH config modify payload counter get all 2 1 1 SWITCH config show payload counter counter ponlink PAYLOAD COUNTER for ponlink 2 1 time of last request 2008 06 09 11 09 15 group vlan upstream downstream 1 wn UNUSED l 2 nsn 2 1 all 100 0 0 2 300 0 0 3 400 0 0 4 600 0 0 5 800 0 0 l SUM 0 0 TUE UNT ee ee ue 3 nsn 3 UNUSED tenons e 4 name with spaces UNUSED cec esce ose ee 1 62 us UNUSED l 63 nsn63 Id 0900d80580257cd9 105 Ports Operation Manual CLI 1 all 100 0 0 2 300 0 0 3 400 0 0 4 600 0 0 5 800 0 0 SUM 0 0 SSeS e eere Tm 64 nmn UNUSED 2 Displaying of the used payload counters of single counter group 32 SWITCH config show payload counter counter ponlink 32 PAYLOAD COUNTER for ponlink 2 1 time of last request 2008 06 09 11 09 15 gro
247. h profiles Shows one configured notch profile PROFILE enter the profile name Shows one notch config profile and its assigned ports PROFILE enter the profile name Creating Deleting a Profile Shows all notch config profiles and their assigned ports A downstream PSD profile could support up to 32 breakpoints A upstream profile could support up to 16 breakpoints When a new PSD profile is created all breakpoints are zero The table below contains a set of default breakpoints according to the VDSL2 specification G 993 2 Downstream Upsteem Index Subcarrier Level dBm Hz Index Subcarrier Level dBm Hz 65 39 5 32 38 0 256 39 5 63 38 0 376 49 5 882 54 5 Table 22 Default PSD Mask Profile for VDSL2 G 993 2 Id 0900d80580256ef1 119 XDSL Operation Manual CLI Downstream Upsteem 705 52 5 1193 55 5 857 54 0 1984 58 0 1218 55 5 2318 58 5 1959 58 0 2770 59 5 2795 59 5 4083 59 5 Table 22 Default PSD Mask Profile for VDSL2 G 993 2 Cont Command Mode Function xdsl add psd config profile PROFILE downstream Bridge Creates PSD mask profile max number of index is 32 Usage of upstream profile for upstream or downstream direction i This parameter can only be set during profile creation PROFILE enter the profile name xdsl delete psd config profile PROFILE Deletes specified PS
248. he Ethernet interface on ONU Config ONUS ONU address slot port ONU ID Bridge show port onu saved data bs Displays the saved ONU Ethernet configuration show port onu dte dce ONUS Displays the DTE DCE status of Ethernet interfaces on ONU ONUS ONU address OLT slot GPON port ONU ID 9 14 Checking the MAC Table Use the following commands to examine the switch MAC addresses Command show onu ONUINDEX mac table Mode Bridge show onu ONUINDEX mac table vlan VLANID Function Shows ONU specific information about MAC table ONUINDEX OLT slot GPON port ONU ID Shows ONU specific information segmented per port or VLAN ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port ONU ID ONU slot VLANID show only MAC addresses in one VLAN 9 15 MDU hiX 5709 Use the commands described in the following sections to configure the hiX 5709 MDU Creating of MDU Cards Changing the Admin State e Setting of Alarm Severities and External Alarms Setting the Number of Fans Checking the Configuration Data d 0900d80580257da6 75 ONU Equipment Operation Manual CLI 9 15 1 Creating of MDU Cards Command Mode Function mdu card create ADDRESS Config Creates a new MDU m sb 8p4ge elm sb 24p elm sbxdsl 12 el m sbxdsl 16 elm sbxdsl 16p elm sbxasl 16p sl el m ubgpon 2512 elm ubgpon catv ej locked unlocked mdu card create 1 32 GPON PORT ONU D MDU SLOT m sb 8p4ge elm sb 24p el
249. he interface name clear arp Config Deletes all the contents from the ARP table IFNAME enter the interface name clear arp FNAME i Checking the ARP Table The show commands display all the IP and hardware addresses that are directly con nected to an interface on the switch and addresses that have been learned dynamically by the switch Use following commands to examine the contents of the ARP table Command Mode Function show arp Privileged Checks ARP table for specified interface Confi IFNAME enter the interface name br1 br2 show arp IFNAME g i Example of displaying the ARP table Id 0900d805801da7a0 193 ARP Table Operation Manual CLI SWITCH config show arp Address HWaddress Type Interface 10 254 254 105 00 bb cc dd ee 05 DYNAMIC br4094 10 1 1 1 00 00 cd 01 82 d0 DYNAMIC mgmt SWITCH config 20 3 ARP Alias For security reasons the communication between hosts connected to the same switch may be impossible However the hiX 5750 R2 0 can use ARP alias to connect hosts with each other by supporting the response of ARP requests from the host network through the concentrating switch To register a range of IP addresses from the host network in an ARP alias use the following command Command Mode Function arp alias A B C D A B C D Config Registers IP start and end address and MAC address in XX20CXX2OCXX XX ARP
250. he monitor port Id 0900d8058025fb9e 165 Interface Configuration Operation Manual CLI 15 Interface Configuration 15 1 Enabling of an Interface Before an IP address can be assigned to the network interface the interface communi cation must be enabled Use the show running config interface command to verify the interface status i By default the hiX 5750 R2 0 system is set to communicate over the interface mgmt An interface can be enabled on Configuration mode or Interface configuration mode Interface Configuration Mode At first use the following command to change into nterface configuration mode Command Mode Function interface NTERFACENAME Config Choose Interface configuration mode of the specified interface INTERFACENAME interface that has to be configured For the outband management connection choose mgmt After this use the no shutdown command to enable the interface Command Mode no shutdown Interface Function Enables the interface on nterface Configuration mode shutdown Disables the interface on Interface Configuration mode Return to Configuration mode or Privileged exec mode with the following commands Command Mode Function exit Interface Returns to Configuration mode end Returns to Privileged exec mode Example of enabling the interface 1 SWITCH configure terminal SWITCH interface 1 SWITCH c
251. he respective band is realy in use the values will be taken otherwise NE will ignore the settings The simul taneous setting of values of UPBOA 40 dBm Hz and UPBOB 0 dBm Hz for a band shall cause UPBO to be disabled This are the default setting for all band s PROFILE enter the profile name us1 UPBOB for US1 band us2 UPBOB for US2 band us3 UPBOB for US3 band us4 UPBOB for US4 band us5 UPBOA for US5 band 0 4095 Value in 0 01 dBm Hz if 0 up pboa 4000 gt UPBO disabled for this band 114 Power Managment The hiX 5750 R2 0 provides power management saving power at three levels LO L2 L3 The L2 level enables statistical power saving at the xDSL transceiver unit in the central office xTU C by rapidly entering and exiting low power mode based on Internet traffic running over the xDSL connection For example when large files are being downloaded ADSL2 operates in full power mode called LO power mode in order to maximize the download speed When Internet traffic decreases such as when a user is reading a long text page ADSL2 systems can transit into L2 low power mode in which the data rate is significantly decreased and overall power consumption is reduced The L3 power mode enables overall power savings at the xTU C by entering into sleep mode when the connection is not being used for extended periods of time L3 is the sleep mode that enables overall power savings at both the xTU C and the remote xDSL
252. helf slot number on GPON OLT according to Table 15 column 5 y used port of the module Example for hiX 5750 E Entry 1 1 means port 1 of the module pluggend in on shelf slot 101 Entry 9 1 means Ethernet port 1 of the CXU plugged in on shelf port 109 Id 0900d8058024303c 31 System Access Operation Manual CLI 32 3 2 3 2 1 System Access Overview The CLI of hiX 5750 R2 0 can be configured and managed via local terminal connection or a remote session using Telnet or Secure Shell SSH Both Telnet and SSH are enabled on the NE by default The hiX 5750 R2 0 supports three methods to gain access to the NE for management and configuration tasks 1 2 3 Local access to the NE through the RS232 console port on CXU s front panel see 3 2 Login for the First Time on page 32 Dedicated local Telnet SSH connection to the NE by using the FE LCT port on CXU s front panel outband interface Remote access over the provider s Ethernet IP network by using Telnet SSH Therefore an inband management channel i e a specific management VLAN has to be configured Login for the First Time Proceeding Perform the following tasks to login for the first time 1 To access local management on hiX 5750 R2 0 connect a PC workstation directly to the RJ45 console port on CXU Use a straight serial V 24 connecting cable that is wired as shown in Figure 2 There are two reasons that require the access to the hiX 5750 R2
253. how to assign DHCP PPPOE to VLAN see chapter 16 5 Assigning the VLAN to Default Gateway For commands configuring the bridge port see 14 2 4 Bridge Port Parameters 18 1 Configuring of the DHCP PPPoE Telegram Handling When the CXU works in intermediate mode and the DHCP PPPOE relay agent is enabled option 82 option 105 can be inserted or deleted Enter the following commands to configure the DHCP PPPoE mode of CXU Command Mode Function ip dhcp relay snoop bridge Config Sets DHCP mode relay valid telegrams are handled If necessary DHCP option82 will be inserted or deleted DHCP header will be changed e g with configured server and gateway IP address snoop valid telegrams are forwarded invalid telegrams are dropped Invalid telegrams will be dropped bridge all telegrams are forwarded ip pppoe relay snoop bridge Sets PPPoE intermediate agent relay valid telegrams are handled If necessary option105 will be inserted or deleted Invalid telegrams are dropped snoop valid telegrams are forwarded invalid telegrams are dropped bridge all telegrams are forwarded 176 Id 0900d8058025c93a Operation Manual CLI DHCP and PPPoE 18 2 DHCP PPPoE Provider In order to configure a DHCP or PPPoE provider pool use the following commands in the respective configuration mode 18 2 1 Changing into the DHCP PPPoE Configuration Mode Enter the following commands to change into DHCP or PPPoE
254. hresholds 0000 cece eee 59 Configuring the CPU Overload Threshold llle 60 OLT EQquipImielit 53 3 3 4 ee bard Ed CS EHI bene eU acr p RR RUE 61 Creating a new Card 3x deer dune tr reiner Soie hf beo 61 Changing the Admin State of Card llli elles 61 Reset of Interface Unit Cards liiis 62 Deleting afi Existing Gatd i iue mete RR RN EE ean EE 62 Converting of IU GPON Cards lssslelee eA 62 Checking the MAC Table of Interface Unit Card 0 62 Selecting Alarm Severity Profiles of Cards Rack amp Self 62 Configuring External Alarms csere kaanon cee eee ree 63 Checking the Physical Tables liliis 63 1d 0900d8058025f467 Operation Manual CLI 8 1 8 2 8 3 8 4 9 1 9 2 9 3 9 4 9 5 9 6 9 7 9 8 9 9 9 10 9 11 9 12 9 13 9 14 9 15 9 15 1 9 15 2 9 15 3 9 15 4 9 15 5 10 10 1 10 2 10 2 1 10 2 2 10 2 3 10 2 4 10 2 5 10 2 6 10 3 10 3 1 10 3 2 10 3 3 10 4 10 4 1 10 4 2 10 4 3 10 4 4 10 5 10 6 CXU Board and Line Redundancy 200 cee eee eee 64 Checking Redundancy States uaaa 0 0 e eee eee 64 Heselting a CXU auos aet Eqentteteu eucn PEERS DO beREEUST de 64 Initiating SWItChOVer ii oisuese pentes mere ema Exe x es 65 Uplink Line Redundancy 02 0 eee eee ees 65 ONUEQUIDITIBRIE s aes 20 troia ostenta mtl eee eate a ete a GEH ad 66 ONT and MDU Types obere rage eee Shee e Ed
255. ican ceed peepee eaten ca keaw hk wee 165 Interface Configuration 0 0000 eee 166 Enabling ofan Interface o e eR eee inss o reri Mowe bed 166 Assigning an IP Address to the Interface 000000 0 167 Displaying the IP Address of Interface llli eee eee 167 Displaying the Interface Status llle 167 JE E Abe AN eg ee ait adele Ee 169 Configuring a VLAN 2 nerit eger dub Race s Rok dore eee 169 Enabling a Host VIEAIN se ard oboe b eer EE HERE 170 Assigning the VLAN to Bridgeports 4s RR Rx 170 Assigning the VLAN to DHCP PPPoE Provider 05 171 Assigning the VLAN to Default Gateway 000 0c eee 171 Enabling of Multicast Permission for the VLAN 2 085 171 Checking the VLAN Configuration 0 00000 cee eee 171 Ouality ot ServiceOO0S asro rasire at eii Se it x aes Rab denies 173 Configuring the Dot1p Priority to Queue Mapping 174 Configuring the Scheduling Method 20000 eee eaee 174 Checking the QoS Configuration 0 000 c eee eee ee 175 DHCP and PPPOE uero tes atace Ede de nee neste arte RE bacs 176 Configuring of the DHCP PPPoE Telegram Handling 176 DHOBP PPPOE PIOVIIGI naa 9 cc Ens ER UE P RRPDRERES IPIS 177 Changing into the DHCP PPPoE Configuration Mode 177 Configuring the DHCP PPPoE Provider 00000eeeaee 177 Verifying the Consistence of DHCP Provi
256. ication Equipment Distributed Feedback Laser Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Deutsche Industrie Norm German Standard Domain Name System Designated Router Downstream Digital Signal O 64 kbps First Level TDM hierarchy Digital Signal 1 1 544 kbps DiffServe Code Point Digital Subscriber Line DSL Access Multiplexer Dual Tone Multi Frequency Europe First level of TDM hierarchy 2 048 kbps Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory Element Manager Electromagnetic Compatibility 1 Electromagnetic Interference 2 External Machine Interface Id 0900d80580240c85 267 Abbreviations Operation Manual CLI EMS Element Management System EN European Norm ESD Electro Static Discharge ESF Extended Service Frame E SFU Ethernet Single Family Unit ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute FE Fast Ethernet FEC Forward Error Correction FP Febry Perot FSAN Full Service Access Network FTP File Transfer Protocol TFTP Trivial FTP FTTP Fiberto the Premises GAL GEM Adaption Layer GE Gigabit Ethernet GEM GPON Encapsulation Method GPON Gigabit Passive Optical Network GR Generic Requirements GTC GPON Transmission and Convergence HOL Head of Line Blocking I2C Inter Integrated Circuit ICMP Internet Control Message Protocol ID Identifier IEC International Electronical Commission IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IETF Internet Ingeneering Task Force IF Interface IGMP Internet Group Ma
257. ified for shutdown a large number of peering sessions could be ter minated Use the no parameter with this command to re enable a neighbor Id 0900d80580212815 199 IP Routing Operation Manual CLI Command Mode Function neighbor A B C D WORD next hop self Router Configures the router as the next hop for a neighbor or peer group to allow the router to change the nexthop information that is sent to the iBGP peer Use the no parameter with this command to disable this feature neighbor A B C D WORD description LINE Router Associates a description with a neighbor LINE Up to 80 characters describing this neighbor Use the no parameter with this command to remove the description neighbor A B C D WORD update source WORD neighbor A B C D WORD weight lt 0 65535 gt Router Router Allows internal BGP sessions to use any operational inter face for TCP connections WORD name of loopback interface name Use the no parameter with this command to restore the interface assignment to the closest interface Sets default weight for routes from this neighbor 0 65535 weight this command assigns to the route Use the no parameter with this command to remove a weight assignment neighbor A B C D WORD passive Router Sets a BGP neighbor as passive Use the no parameter with this command to disable this function neighbor A B C D WORD
258. iguration 22 2 Activating STP RSTP MSTP To enable disable STP RSTP MSTP in the force version use the following commands Command Mode Function stp mst enable I disable Bridge Enables disables STP RSTP or MSTP function stp mst reset tccount MSTID RANGE Resets bridge topology change counts MSTID RANGE instance number 222 22 3 Even though STP function does not operated loop event does not occur in a NE which belongs to the non dual path LAN environment Adding STP Ports This feature allows the operator to decide if the port can be managed by STP or not To set the port to be managed by STP use the following command Id 0900d80580203028 Operation Manual CLI Spanning Tree Command Mode Function stp port add del PORTS Bridge Sets port to be managed by STP add add port number to port set default all ports are added del delete port number from port set PORTS select slot port number for STP slot number always 0 After deleting a STP port packets can be forwarded over it furthermore without STP function To check the ports managed by STP use the following command Command Mode Function show stp port Privileged Shows the port set list to be managed by STP Config Bridge Example 22 4 22 4 1 SWITCH bridge show stp port addedenabled On addedenabled On addedenabled On addedenabled On
259. iguration Data Table The VoIP configuration data table contains information about VoIP services per gateway There is one table entry per ONT card that is providing VoIP services Table entries are automatically created deleted by the NE 12 3 1 Modifying the VoIP Configuration Data Table To modify entries of configuration data table use the following commands Command Mode Function modify voip voip config data signaling protocol used Config Modifies used signaling protocol PHYS INDEX PROTOCOL PHYS INDEX physical index dif z tiad ianali ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port ONT ID ONT slot modify volp volp config data signaling protocol used addr PROTOCOL type of VoIP signaling protocol used for ONT ADDRESS PROTOCOL Only one type of protocol is allowed Valid values are 0x00 None 0x01 SIP 0x02 H 248 0x03 MGCP modify voip voip config data configures method Config Modifies configured method in config table entry PHYS_INDEX METHOD PHYS INDEX physical index modify voip voip config data configured method addr ADDRESS OL T SONGPONpOVONT ID ONT slot p 7 METHOD method indicates to the ONT which meth ADDRESS METHOD OD method indicates to the ONT which method should be used to configure the VoIP service of the ONT 0x00 the ONT default do not configure indicate use of 0x01 OMCI 0x02 configuration file retrieval 0x03 TR 69 0x04 IETF sipping config framework for VoIP service configuration of the ONT 0x05 O
260. iguration mode execute the router command on Configura tion mode The system prompt changes from SWITCH config to SWITCH config router Command Mode Function router P PROTOCOL Config Changes into Router configuration mode According to the used routing protocol the Router configuration mode is divided into BGP RIP and ISIS Table 10 shows a couple of main commands d 0900d8058024303c Operation Manual CLI Using CLI 2 2 10 2 2 11 Command Function distance Configures distance value to find better route neighbor Configures neighbor router network Configures network to operate each routing protocol redistribute Registers transmitted routing information to another router s table Table 10 Main RIP Commands oft the Router Configuration Mode Route Map Configuration Mode To change into Houte map configuration mode execute the route map command on Configuration mode The system prompt changes from SWITCH config to SWITCH config route map Command Mode Function lt 1 65535 gt route map NAME permit deny Config Changes into Route map configuration mode On Route map configuration mode routing filter can be configured Table 11 shows a couple of important main commands Command Function match Transmits routing information to specified place set Configures router address and distance
261. igures multicast package group MCPKGGPR PORTS port number range of port numbers e g 1 1 1 48 2 20 MCPKGGPR multicast package group e g 1 2 3 means no list For further settings see 19 7 IGMP Subscriber Port To check the port configuration use the follwing command show bridgeport PORTS Command Mode Function Privi Displays bridge port configuration leged PORTS port number range of port numbers e g 1 1 1 1 12 1 0 1 Config Bridge 14 2 5 164 Traffic Limitation The hiX 5750 R2 0 supports traffic bridge port shaping and policing as denoted in Table 23 To set the limitations the following tasks must be performed 1 Creating of Traffic Descriptor Profiles 2 Configuring Shaping and Policing on Bridge Port Type Egress Rate Limiting Ingress Rate Limiting hix 5709 MDU R2 0 Shaping downstream for xDSL Policing downstream for GE and xDSL upstream for xDSL per PVC G 25A SFU Shaping downstream for GE G 25E SFU Table 28 Bridge Port Shaping and Policing Creating of Traffic Descriptor Profiles This profile states the sustained and peak data rate There are different traffic descriptor profiles up to 64 configurable for in bound and out bound traffic The out bound traffic descriptor describes the limitations on traffic rate leaving the MAC bridge traffic shaping towards the UNI upstream the in bound descriptor describes the limitations on t
262. iguring a SIP Agent To configure the SIP agent configuration data table use the following commands Command Mode Function create voip sip agent config data table EXP TIME START TIME UDP_TCP_PTR OPT Config modify voip sip agent config data table profile name INDEX LINE delete voip sip agent config data table NDEX Creates SIP agent configuration table EXP TIME SIP Registration Expiration START TIME time sec prior to time out that SIP agent should start registration process UDP TCP PTR TCP UDP service used for communication service with SIP proxy server OPT parameter for startup configuration only can not be used for normal configuration Modifies the profile name of the agent configuration data table INDEX profile index LINE descriptive name for profile handling Deletes SIP agent configuration table Modifying the SIP Agent Parameters To modify an entry of specified SIP agent profile index use the following commands Command Mode Function modify voip sip agent config data table IF INDEX EXP TIME START TIME Config Modifies the agent configuration data table IF INDEX interface index similar to TCP UDP port EXP TIME SIP Registration Expiration START TIME time sec prior to time out that SIP agent should start registration process Id 0900d8058023f697 143 Voice over IP Operation Manual CLI Command Mode
263. ilter on outer TPID field 4 outer TPID 8100 5 outer TPID input TPID don t care about DE bit 6 outer TPID input TPID DE 0 7 outer TPID input TPID DE 1 0 15 filter inner prio 0 7 the given inner priority value to filter the received frames 8 indicates not to filter on inner priority 14 indicates the default filter when no other one tag rule in this table applies 15 indicates that this entry is the no tag rule 0 4096 filter inner VID 0 4094 4096 indicates not to filter on the inner VID 0 7 filter inner TPID 0 do not filter on inner TPID field 4 inner TPID 8100 5 inner TPID input TPID don t care about DE bit 6 inner TPID input TPID DE O 7 inner TPID input TPID DE 1 0 3 filter EtherType 0 2 indicates that 0 1 or 2 treat tags respectively are to be removed If one tag is specified then it is the outer tag that should be removed 0 15 treat outer prio 0 7 the given priority to insert in the outer VLAN tag 8 the outer priority is to be copied from the inner priority of the received frame 9 the outer priority is to be copied from the outer priority of the received frame 15 do not add an outer tag 0 4097 treat outer VID 0 4094 4096 the outer VID is to be copied from the inner VID of the received frame 4097 the outer VID is to be copied from the outer VID of the received frame 0 7 treat outer TPID 0 TPID and DE if present copied from inner tag of received frame
264. ine Status To show line status data use the following commands Command Mode Function show voip voip line status table Exec Shows the line status table of all or specified port show voip voip line status table addr ADDRESS Config ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port ONT ID port POTS port number 1 max 12 6 12 6 1 Performance Monitoring The following tables contain the completed 15 minute and 24 hours interval perfor mance monitoring data collected with regard to the Call Control channel All the attribute counters are only updated at the end of each period or on request see 12 6 3 Updating the PM Data See 10 10 2 Calculation Algorithms for PM Objects for information on the PM object indexes Configuring of Call Control PM The call control table contains an entry for each call control PM object related to a POTS PPTP supporting VoiP This table contains the current performance monitoring data of the running 15 minute interval collected with regard to the Call Control channel Call Control Thresholds The table entries are thresholds for Call Control performance monitoring Use the follow ing commands to configure the call control thresholds One call control table always exist and cannot be deleted The thresholds are used to send a notification to the man agement system when the actual counter crosses this value The notification on will be sent at the crossing of the threshold by the actual counter th
265. ing domain Command Mode Function default information originate Router Forces the AS boundary router to generate a default route into the RIP routing domain Use the no parameter with this command to disable this feature 21 3 4 Redistributing of Routing Information The system can redistribute routing information from a source route entry into the RIP tables For example you can instruct the router to re advertise connected kernel or static routes as well as routing protocol derived routes This capability applies to all the IP based routing protocols In order to redistribute routing information from a source route entry into the RIP table use one of the following commands Command Mode Function metric 1 16 redistribute kernel connected static ospf bgp isis redistribute kernel connected static ospf bgp isis Router Registers transmitted routing information from another router s RIP table kernel redistribute from kernel routes connected redistribute from connected routes redistribute kernel connected static ospf bgp isis Static redistribute from static routes route map WORD ospf redistribute from OSPF bgp redistribute from BGP isis redistribute from IS IS 1 16 metric value to be used in redistributing information WORD pointer to route map entries Use the no parameter with this command to disable the function Route Map
266. ion bridge Config Changes from Configuration mode into Bridge configuration mode Bridge configuration mode is used to manage MAC addresses and to configure GPON functions of layer 2 such as VLAN mirroring STP Id 0900d8058024303c 23 Using CLI Operation Manual CLI 24 2 2 8 2 2 9 Table 8 shows a couple of main commands of Bridge configuration mode Command Function lacp Configure LACP function mirror Configures mirroring function trunk Configures trunk function vlan Configures VLAN function Table 8 Main Commands of the Bridge Configuration Mode Interface Configuration Mode To change into nterface configuration mode execute the interface command on Con figuration mode The system prompt changes from SWITCH config to SWITCH config if Command Mode Function interface INTERFACE Config Enters from Configuration mode into Interface configuration mode Interface configuration mode is used to assign IP addresses in Ethernet interface and to activate or deactivate interfaces Table 9 shows a couple of main commands of Interface configuration mode Command Function description Makes description of interface ip Assigns IP address shutdown Deactivates interface mtu Set mtu value to interface Table 9 Main Commands of the Interface Configuration Mode Router Configuration Mode To change into Router conf
267. ion show running config mac Privileged Config Shows current MAC information show running config maxhosts show running config port Config Privileged Config Shows current maxhosts information Shows current port information show running config qos Privileged Config Shows current QoS information show running config rmon Privileged Config Shows current RMON information show running config router bgp Config Shows current BGP router information show running config router isis Config Shows current IS IS router information show running config router rip Config Shows current RIP router information show running config rule Privileged Config Shows current Rule information show running config snmp Privileged Config Shows current SNMP information show running config stp Privileged Config Shows current STP information show running config switch Privileged Config Shows current switch information show running config syslog Privileged Config Shows current system log information show running config time out Privileged Config Shows current time out information show running config time zone Privileged Config Shows current time zone information 48 1d 0900d8058023 449 Operation Manual CLI System Basic Configuration Command Mode Function show running config trunk Privileged Config Shows current
268. ion 1 64 select an instance ID number VLAN RANGE enter a number of the VLANs to be mapped to the spec ified instance no stp mst config id map lt 1 32 gt VLAN RANGE Deletes entire VLAN map or part of it no stp mst config id map lt 1 32 gt stp mst config id revision lt 0 65535 gt Bridge Configures the switches in the same MST boundary as same number 0 65535 set the MST configuration revision number no stp mst config id revision Deletes the configured revision number fi In case of STP or RSTP the config ID must not be set otherwise an error message will be displayed To delete the configuration ID use following command Command Mode Function no stp mst config id Bridge Delete all of the configured configuration ID 22 4 5 Applying the STP Configuration i After setting changing or deleting the configuration ID the configuration must be applied to be injected To commit the configuration use the following command Command Mode Function stp mst config id commit Bridge Commits the configuration of the region 22 4 6 Configuring a Point to Point MAC The internal sublayer service makes available a pair of parameters that permit inspec tion of and control over the administrative and operational state of the point to point status of the MAC entity by the MAC relay entity To configure the point to point status use the fol
269. ion unless the policy applied to network is defined in prefix list e Distinguishes each policy with the assigned number and applies policy which has the lowest number in network In order to view assigned number to policy use the show ip prefix list command Policies configured by operator will be automatically assigned to a sequential number However that assignment is also possible manually by executing the ip prefix list seq command Creating a Prefix List le 0 32 Command Mode Function ip prefix list WORD deny permit A B C D M ge 0 32 Config Creates a IP prefix list WORD list name ip prefix list WORD deny permit A B C D M le 0 32 ge 0 32 deny denies matching IP address permit permits maching IP address A B C D M specifies the network ip prefix list WORD deny permit 0 32 ge parameter specifies prefix length The prefix list will A B C D M I any be applied if the prefix length is greater than or equal to the ge prefix length 0 32 le paramter specifies prefix length The prefix list will be applied if the prefix length is less than or equal to the le prefix length ip prefix list WORD description L NE Makes additional description to prefix list LINE description 204 The following example creates a prefix list plist1 that permits routes with a prefix length up to 24 in the 151 0 0 0 8 network SWITCH config ip prefix l
270. ip fac codes table Exec Shows the feature access codes table Config Dial Plan Profile A dial plan profile may be referenced by a SIP user data entry To configure a dial plan profile table use the following commands Command Mode Function create voip sip dial plan profile table entry Config Creates a dial plan profile table 0 65535 0 655355 0 3 0 65535 critical dial time out common value default in OMCI is 4000 ms 0 65535 partial dial time out common value default in OMCI is 16000 ms 0 3 dial plan format 0 not defined 1 H248 2 NSC 3 venor specific format modify voip sip dial plan profile table entry NDEX Modifies a dial plan profile table entry lt 0 65535 gt 0 65535 0 3 INDEX entry index modify voip sip dial plan profile table entry profile name Modifies a dial plan profile name INDEX LINE LINE descriptive name for profile handling delete voip sip dial plan profile table entry NDEX Deletes a dial plan profile table To modify a dial plan profile token use the following command Command Mode Function modify voip sip dial plan profile table entry dialplan token Config Modifies a dial plan profile table entry dialplan token INDEX LINE INDEX entry index LINE new dial plan token see Dial Plan Token Format To show the dial plan profile profile table use the following command
271. ipate in a dynamic LAG fi Uplink ports which should be configured by LACP must be member of the same VLAN The aggregated port is automatically added to the appropriate VLAN The following sections explain how to configure dynamic LAG Enabling Disabling LACP e Configuring Packet Route e Configuring the Member Ports Configuring Operating Mode of Member Port e Configuring LACP Priority e Deciding Member State of LACP Port e Configuring LACPDU Transmission Rate Configuring Admin Key of Member Port and Aggregator e Configuring Port Priority Checking LACP Configuration 24 3 1 Enabling Disabling LACP To enable disable the LACP function use the following commands 234 Id 0900d8058020266d Operation Manual CLI Link Aggregation Command Mode Function lacp aggregator AGGREGATIONS Bridge Enables LACP for CXU of designated Aggregator number AGGREGATIONS aggregator ID that should be enabled for LACP valid value from 0 to 1 Use the no parameter with this command to release LACP for CXU for designated aggregator number lacp iu SLOT aggregator AGGREGATIONS Bridge Enables LACP for IU SLOT IU Slot number AGGREGATIONS aggregator IDs that should be enabled for LACP 0 4 Use the no parameter with this command to disables LACP for IU lacp aggregator admin key AGGREGATIONS lt 1 15 gt no lacp aggregator admin key AGGREGATIONS Bridge Enables admin key of designated a
272. is feature ip rip authentication mode text md5 Interface Specifies the type of authentication mode used for RIP v2 packets text clear text or simple password authentication md5 uses the keyed MD5 authentication algorithm Use the no parameter with this command to restore clear text authentication 21 3 9 Checking of Router and Protocol Information Display specific router statistics such as the contents of IP routing tables and databases to determine resource utilization and solve network problems You can also discover the routing path your router s packets are taking through the network Id 0900d80580212815 213 IP Routing Operation Manual CLI Command Mode Function show ip rip Privileged The command displays all RIP routes For routes that are received through RIP this Config command will display the time the packet was sent and the tag information This command will also display this information for routes redistributed into RIP show ip protocols Displays current RIP status It includes RIP timer filtering version RIP enabled inter face and RIP peer information 214 21 4 IS IS Routing IS IS Intermediate System to Intermediate System routing can be used inside the routing domain to form adjacencies between all Layer 3 nodes of the same domain The implementation of IS IS routing is dedicated to IP routing Integrated IS IS according to RFC 1142
273. ish each different history Command Mode Function rmon history lt 1 65535 gt Config Configures a number to distinguish RMON History enter the index number 30 2 Example of entering into History configuration mode to configure history 5 SWITCH config rmon history 5 SWITCH config rmonhistory 5 Assigning Source Port of statistical Data To investigate statistical data from a specified port as sample inquiry a source port has to be assigned by using the following command Id 0900d8058024f4b8 263 Remote Monitoring Operation Manual CLI Command Mode Function data source PORT RMON Assigns a source port of statistical CXU uplink port PORT uplink port number ex slot port for uplink port slot port vcc for data port 30 3 Example of assigning CXU uplink port 1 as source port SWITCH config rmonhistory 5 data source 9 1 SWITCH config rmonhistory 5 Identifying Subject of RMON History To identify subject using the history enter the following command Command Mode Function owner NAME RMON Configures History and identifies subject using related data enter the name max 127 char acters 30 4 Example of configuring a subject of history as nokia SWITCH config rmonhistory 5 owner nokia SWITCH config rmonhistory 5 Configuring Number of Sample Data Configure the number of sample da
274. ist plistl permit 151 0 0 0 8 le 24 Creating the Prefix List Policy Use the following command in order to add or delete prefix based filters to arbitrary points of prefix list using sequential number specification Id 0900d80580212815 Operation Manual CLI IP Routing Command Mode Function ip prefix list NAME seq lt 1 4294967295 gt deny permit A B C D M I any ip prefix list NAME seq lt 1 4294967295 gt deny permit A B C D M ge lt 0 32 gt le lt 0 32 gt Config ip prefix list NAME seq lt 1 4294967295 gt deny permit A B C D M le lt 0 32 gt ge lt 0 32 gt Configures policy of prefix list and assigns number to the policy NAME list name deny denies matching IP address permit permits maching IP address A B C D M specifies the network 1 4294967295 specifies the position of each entry in the prefix list 0 32 ge parameter specifies prefix length The prefix list will be applied if the prefix length is greater than or equal to the ge prefix length 0 32 le paramter specifies prefix length The prefix list will be applied if the prefix length is less than or equal to the le prefix length The parameter ge and le may be used optionally if there are more than one network con figured Using neither ge nor le network range can be more clearly configured Checking the Prefix List Policies show ip prefix list detail summary WORD
275. ity 5 1 8 select index of GEM port for 1p priority 6 1 8 select index of GEM port for 1p priority 7 0 drop Command Mode Function show base settings Config Displays GPON MAC mode and prio map range Bridge show priomapper table list ADDRESS show priomapper iftype eth voip etds1ll xdsl ADDRESS Displays 1p priority mapper table table with configuration data list list with configuration data ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port ONU ID ONU slot Displays 1p priority mapper for one specified interface eth Ethernet interface voip internal voice over IP interface eids1ll E1 or DS1 leased line interface xdsl XDSL port ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port ONU ID ONU slot ONU port 10 3 2 Queuing An upstream priority queue is referenced by GEM ports Command Mode Function show queue table list ADDRESS Config Displays priority queue upstream table list with config data Bridge ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port ONU ID 84 d 0900d80580257cd9 Operation Manual CLI Ports Command Mode Function queue ADDRESS NUMBER modify lt 0 65535 gt lt 0 255 gt enabled disabled TIME lt 0 65535 gt lt 0 65535 gt modify queue ADDRESS NUMBER lt 0 65535 gt lt 0 255 gt enabled disabled TIME lt 0 65535 gt lt 0 65535 gt Bridge Modifies priority queue upstream ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port ONU ID NUMBER queue on
276. ity across the network execute the traceroute command If the waiting time to response has expired an asterisk will be printed on the screen Command Mode Function traceroute ip WORD Privileged Traces packet routes through the network ip destination IP address WORD hostname 4 3 3 Example Tracing packet route sent to 10 2 2 20 SWITCH traceroute 10 2 2 20 traceroute to 10 2 2 20 10 2 2 20 30 hops max 38 byte packets 1 10 2 2 20 10 2 2 20 0 598 ms 0 418 ms 0 301 ms SWITCH Checking Telnet User Command Mode Function where Privileged Checks accessed Telnet user from remote place Config SWITCH where Example root at ttypO0 from 10 150 229 85 34260 via telnet for 12 minutes 8 38 seconds SWITCH Id 0900d8058023f449 51 System Basic Configuration Operation Manual CLI 4 3 4 Displaying Hosts Accessing the System The following commands show brief information about the number of hosts accessing the system Command Mode Function show tmn connect Privileged Shows whether a TMN e g EM ACI E is connected to the network element NE or not show Ict connect Confi g Shows whether an LCT is connected to the NE or not show cli connect Shows whether and how many CLI consoles are connected to the NEor not 4 4 Operation Environment 4 4 4 Setting the Output Condition of Terminal Screen By default setti
277. l line config profile PROFILE dpbo epsd Bridge Deletes one entry pair subcarrier level by index on xDSL line delete index lt 1 16 gt PROFILE enter the profile name 1 16 EPSD mask index xdsl line config profile PROFILE dpbo epsd delete Bridge Deletes one entry pair subcarrier level by subcarrier on xDSL line subcarrier PROFILE enter the profile name lt 1 4095 gt 1 4095 EPSD subcarrier index xdsl line config profile PROFILE down pbo escmal Bridge Configures cabel model parameter on xDSL line in terms of three scalars down pbo escmb down pbo escmc lt 0 640 gt DPBOESCMA DPBOESCMB and DPBOESCMC that are used to estimate the frequency dependent loss of E side cables calculated from the DPBOESEL parameter using the formula ESCM f DPBOESCMA DPBOESCMB sqrt f DPBOESCMC f DPBOESCL where ESCM is expressed in dB and f is expressed in MHz PROFILE enter the profile name down pbo escma cabel model parameter A fixed part of ESCM f equation Default ESCMa 270 gt 0 0546875 down pbo escmb cabel model parameter B linear part of ESCM f equation Default ESCMb 490 gt 0 9140625 down pbo escmc cabel model parameter C square root part of ESCM f equation Default ESCMc 264 gt 0 03125 0 640 value in multiples of 2E 8 the effective range for ESCMx is 1 coded as 0 1 5 coded as 640 with stepping 2E 8 Upstream PBO Id 0900d80580256ef1 113 XDSL Operation
278. lan although the empty dial plan can be stored in ONT when the ONT reboots the default dial plan will take effect e In addition in the three dial plan profiles Critical dial timeout and Partial dial timeout are different from each other In such condition the last one takes effect Application Service Profile This table defines attributes of calling features used in conjunction with a VoIP line service An entry may be referenced by one or more entries of the SIP user data table One default profile always exists To configure the application service profile table use the following commands Id 0900d8058023f697 141 Voice over IP Operation Manual CLI Command Mode Function create voip sip appl service profile table entry lt 0 63 gt 0 63 0 255 0 15 0 3 LINE modify voip sip appl service profile table entry 0 63 0 63 0 255 0 15 0 3 modify voip sip appl service profile table entry profile name NDEX LINE delete voip sip appl service profile table entry NDEX Config Creates application service profile table Bit clear is disabled and bit set is enabled 0 63 CID features a bitmap of caller ID features the bit position values are 0x01 Calling Number 0x02 Calling Name 0x04 CID blocking both number and name 0x08 CID number Permanent presentation status for number 0 Public 1 Private 0x10 CID name Permanent presentation
279. le index BUFFOVER SEVPTR delete voip performance rtpmon threshold 2 16 Config Deletes VoIP performance RTP monitoring threshold object Verifying RTP Configuration To verify the RTP configuration use the following commands Command Mode Function show voip performance rtpmon object table Exec Shows the whole RTP monitoring object table Config show voip performance rtpmon threshold table Shows the whole RTP monitoring threshold table 12 6 3 Updating the PM Data Use the following commands to update the PM data Command Mode Function update voip performance callctrl current data INDEX update voip performance rtpmon current data NDEX Id 0900d8058023f697 Config Updates VoIP performance call control object INDEX physical index of the ONU card Updates VoIP performance RTP monitoring object 135 Voice over IP Operation Manual CLI 12 6 4 Checking the Current and History PM Data Use the following commands to verify the PM data Command Mode Function show voip performance callctrl current data table Exec Shows the whole call control current data table show voip performance callctrl history data table NDEX Config Shows the whole call control history data table INDEX interface index of POTS port show voip performance rtpmon current data table Exec Shows the whole RTP monitoring curre
280. les Command Mode Function show xdsl alarm config profile Privileged Show all configured alarm profiles Config show xdsl alarm config profile PROFILE Eidos Show one configured alarm profile show xdsl alarm config info show xdsl alarm config info PROFILE PROFILE enter the profile name Show all alarm config profiles and their assigned ports Show one alarm config profile and its assigned ports PROFILE enter the profile name 11 5 4 Verifying the Running XDSL Profiles Use the following commands to examine the currently on system running xDSL profiles Command Mode Function show running config xdsl all profiles Config Shows all current xDSL profiles show running config xdsl line profile chan profile Exec Shows specified current xDSL profile alarm profile notch profile psd profile Config Id 0900d80580256ef1 121 XDSL Operation Manual CLI 11 6 Configuring of LRE Port The VDSL technologies base on Ethernet in the Fist Mile EFM to end users so called Long Reach Ethernet LRE to provide a complete suite of IP based services Therefore the access network can be simplified into an end to end Ethernet access architecture that provides the preconditions of features such as VLAN per service and DHCP authentication using Option 82 11 6 1 Assigning xDSL Profiles to Port EFM fi Note the following requirements before changing the used DSL Standard
281. letes a threshold profile 2 16 profile index 10 10 2 Calculation Algorithms for PM Objects The algorithms to calculate valid PM objects are the following GAL Ethernet Index slot 0x08000000 port 0x00800000 onuld 0x00008000 onuSlot 0x00000400 onuPort 0x00000008 gemPortPrio ID GEM Port Index slot 0x08000000 port 0x00800000 onuld 0x00008000 onuSlot 0x00000400 onuPort 0x00000008 gemPortPrio ID T CONT Index slot 0x80000 Id 0900d80580257cd9 93 Ports Operation Manual CLI 94 port 0x08000 onuld 0x00080 serviceClass Service classes are 0 tdm1 voip3 data be4 data nrt5 data rt PON PPTP Index slot 100 port Interface Index Iflndex OltSlot 1 10240000 OltPort 1 2560000 Onuld 1 10000 OntSlot 100 OntPort Physical Index MDU Service Board SB Left shelf side SB CARD Slot 2417 Port 2413 Onuld 245 OnuCard 2 1 Right shelf side SB CARD Slot 2 2417 Port 2413 Onuld 2 5 OnuCard 2 1 ONU Physical Port Left shelf side ONU Slot 2417 Port 2413 Onuld 245 1 MDU Slot 2417 Port 2413 Onuld 245 Right shelf side ONU Slot 2 2417 Port 2413 Onuld 245 1 MDU Slot 2 2417 Port 2413 Onuld 245 d 0900d80580257cd9 Operation Manual CLI Ports 10 10 3 Configuring of PM Objects Command Mode Function
282. letes specified multicast package igmp add group to package 1 512 1 100 Config Adds IGMP multicast group to package 1 512 index multicast group 1 100 multicast package index no igmp add group to package 1 512 1 100 Deletes multicast group from package 188 Example Creating of package 123 and group 123 and assigning of this group to the package igmp multicast package package 123 1 igmp multicast group 2 224 1 1 1 group 123 1 igmp add group to package 1 1 Id 0900d80580214302 Operation Manual CLI IGMP Verifying the Multicast Groups and Packages To check IGMP package of multicast group use the following commands Command Mode Function show igmp multicast package Config Displays a list of created package of multicast group show igmp multicast group Config Displays a list of created multicast groups show igmp group ports lt 1 512 gt Config Displays assigned subscribers per multicast group 1 512 group index show igmp supplied cards lt 1 512 gt Config Displays index of supplied cards physical entity 1 512 group index 19 5 IGMP Operation Mode To configure the operation mode of OLT units use the following commands Command Mode Function igmp cxu inactive vlan switching snooping proxy Config Configures IGMP operation mode of CXU inactive switching mode is off vlan switching MC traffic will
283. lock unlock 0 96 0 1 lt 1 16 gt delete voip performance rtpmon object INDEX Config Creates VoIP performance RTP monitoring threshold table INDEX object index lock unlock deactivates activates performance monitoring admin state 15min 24hrs 0 96 number of history entries configured for the PM object and the 15min interval 0 1 number of history entries configured for the PM object and the 24hrs interval 1 16 pointer to threshold object Modifies VoIP performance RTP monitoring object table Deletes VoIP performance RTP monitoring threshold table RTP Thresholds The table entries are thresholds for Call Control performance monitoring To configure RTP thresholds use the following commands Command Mode Function create voip performance rtpmon threshold 2 16 Config Creates VoIP performance RTP monitoring threshold object RTPERRORS LOSS JITTER RTCPTIME BUFFUNDER 2 16 table index BUFFOVER SEVPTR RTPERRORS threshold for RTP errors LOSS threshold for fraction of Loss from total packets JITTER threshold for max jitter RTCPTIME threshold for time between RTCP packets BUFFERUNDER threshold for buffer underflow BUFFEROVER threshold for buffer overflow SEVPTR pointer to alarm severity profile modify voip performance rtpmon threshold 1 16 Modifies VoIP performance RTP monitoring threshold object RTPERRORS LOSS JITTER RTCPTIME BUFFUNDER 1 16 tab
284. lowing command Command Mode Function stp point to point mac PORTS auto force true force false Bridge Sets point to point MAC PORTS select the port number auto auto detect force true force to point to point MAC force false force to shared MAC not point to point MAC no stp point to point mac PORTS Deletes point to point MAC configuration True means the MAC is connected to a point to point LAN i e there is at most one other system attached to the LAN False means the MAC is connected to a non point to point LAN i e there can be more than one other system attached to the LAN 226 Id 0900d80580203028 Operation Manual CLI Spanning Tree 22 4 7 Configuring of Edge Ports Edge ports are used to connect end devices There are no switches or spanning tree bridges after the edge port To configure edge port mode use the following command Command Mode Function stp edge port PORTS Bridge Sets port edge mode PORTS select the port number no stp edge port PORTS Deletes port edge mode 22 4 8 Changing the STP Operation Mode MSTP is backward compatible with STP and RSTP If some other switches in the network send BDPUs of version STP or RSTP a switch using MSTP will automatically change to the STP mode However the switch cannot change the STP mode to MSTP automatically If the operator wants to change the network topology to MSTP mode he has to clear th
285. lways required For example if the SNMP manager is trap host then enter the IP address of SNMP manager Command Mode Function snmp trap host A B C D COMMUNITY Config Configures SNMP v1 trap host A B C D host IP address COMMUNITY community name no snmp trap host A B C D Deletes configured SNMP v1 trap host snmp trap2 host A B C D COMMUNITY Config Configures SNMP v2 trap host no snmp trap2 host A B C D Deletes configured SNMP v 2 trap host snmp inform trap host A B C D COMMUNITY Config Configures SNMP inform trap host no snmp inform trap host A B C D Deletes configured inform trap host Example An example of configuring the IP addresses 10 1 1 3 20 1 1 5 and 30 1 1 2 as SNMP trap host SWITCH config snmp trap host 10 1 1 3 SWITCH snmp trap host 20 1 1 5 SWITCH config snmp trap host 30 1 1 2 SWITCH config config Id 0900d8058025b404 257 SNMP Operation Manual CLI An example of checking the above trap host configuration SWITCH config show snmp trap Trap Host List HostCommunity trap host 30 1 1 2 trap host 20 1 1 5 trap host 10 1 1 3 trap host 210 SWITCH config 28 7 2 Displaying the SNMP Trap Configuration To show SNMP trap configuration use the following command Command Mode Function show snmp trap Privileged Shows SNMP trap configuration Config 28 7 3 Displaying and Resetting the SNMP Trap Counter Use
286. mapped port It will be automatically unloaded if the Id 0900d80580202c91 251 IRL Input Rate Limitation Operation Manual CLI last port of this IU that is mapped to this profile is being unmapped That means unused not referenced profiles are not loaded on a IU in order to save profile memory on IUs 4 This restriction 10 different profiles per IU means that all IRL ports of one IU can be mapped to at most 10 different profiles The NE rejects a port mapping command irl create ifmap for a further profile In this case an existing profile that fulfills the requirements as nearest as possible should be loaded 5 The NE automatically deletes the port mapping if the concerned port is deleted and unloads the profile 27 6 Checking the IRL Configuration The system provides several ways to display IRL profiles IRL port mapping or both together To check an IRL profile and or port mapping use the following commands Commands Mode Function show irl profile info Privileged Displays profile information of all existing profiles regardless Config used or unused show irl profile info PROFILENAME Privileged Displays profile values for a specified profile Config PROFILENAME enter the profile name show irl ifmap port PORT Privileged Displays IRL mapping information for a specified port Config PORT port number show irl profile editor Privileged Displays information of profile being created or modi
287. mission Rate 0 000000 237 Configuring Admin Key of Member Port and Aggregator 238 Configuring Pom PHONY s2 40c60 ditate aar se v ede ob ER 238 Checking LAGP GConfIgUratlOl a a uu ate nen waren cem mn one ace 238 QUI rCPpLcEEUUIUEITTTTT 240 Creating a RII ird RE LE EE ep edes E 240 setting of the Rule Type ases tree perc ab e metre ata 240 Setting of the Tagging Mode 00 0 240 Setting of MOM co drano teera anae marine eed bares ras nid and 241 Configuring of Matches and Actions liliis iles 241 visiten EET 241 ACUONS eaa kept Pau SUE SOR d ERAT GOD RC Ra aoe eee nde ees an 243 Saving a Rule s i2covcu2eebaea pr tE ena a REA ERE XAR 246 Displaying the Rules Configuration llle 246 Deleting R le clamet Rape uer eee a 247 Broadcast Storm Control suessuk e Sere tbe eevee ER ares 248 IRL Input Rate Limitation lsleeselleeelleelne 249 Creating a IRE BrOTI e uus ecdesiae os eta RR RU 250 Modifying of IRL Profiles xx maee Ree mee eem sisia 250 Savibig adBEJBEIOIB ai Srnec cas stein e 8 Rx oed get e TA 250 Deleting a IRE Profile 2 oue eset emeret inna 251 Mapping a Subscriber Port to IRL Profile 00 0000 251 Checking the IRL Configuration lille 252 SNMP deei plat 253 Configuring an SNMP Community 060000 cee eee 253 Configuring the Security of SNMP Community 254
288. modify gemport eth voip e1ds1ll xdsl GEMPORTS lt 1 xdsl xDSL port 8 gt loopstate loopback no loopback GEMPORTS interface address OLT slot GPON port ONU ID ONU slot ONU port 1 8 priority ID of GEM port loopback loopback enabled no loopback loopback disabled Command Mode Function show gemport table list ADDRESS Config Displays GEM port Bridge table table with config data list list with config data ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port ONU ID ONU slot show gemport iftype eth voip e1ds1lI xdsl ADDRESS Contig Displays GEM port table of one specified interface lt 1 8 gt Bridge eth Ethernet interface voip voice over Internet protocol eids1ll E1DS1 Leased Line interface xdsl xDSL interface ADDRESS OLT slot OLT port ONU ID ONU slot ONU port 1 8 priority ID of GEM port 10 2 6 Forward Error Correction FEC Forward Error Correction is supported for both upstream and downstream transmission When FEC is enabled this results in a SNR coding gain of about 2 6 dB but the overhead of transmission is increased about 7 Command Mode Function gpon fecmode ADDRESS enable disable Config Enable disable FEC for downstream transmission If enabled non FEC supporting ONUs operate without FEC simultaneously with FEC supporting ONUs ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port gpon fecmode ont ADDRESS enable disable Enable disable FEC for upstream transmission
289. mote remote interface ADDRESS local OLT slot OLT port or remote OLT slot GPON port ONU ID ONU slot ONU port normal line type normal crc line type CRC unframed line type unframed fixed set hdb3 line coding HDB3 fixed set ami line coding AMI no loopback config not in loopback state payload loopback config loop through the device line loopback config only looped back out none signal mode no bits are reserved bit signal mode channel associated signaling message signal mode common channel signaling loop transmit clock source recovered receive clock is used local transmit clock source local clock source is used trough transmit clock source uncovered receive clock from another interface disabled channelization is disabled enabled channelization is enabled Modifies DS1 interface configuration local local interface remote remote interface ADDRESS local OLT slot OLT port or remote OLT slot GPON port ONU ID ONU slot ONU port esf line type extended super frame d4 line type AT amp T D4 format jbzs line coding jammed bit zero suppression b8zs eight zero bits zbtsi zero byte time slot interchange no loopback config not in loopback state payload loopback config loop through the device line loopback config only looped back out none signal mode no bits are reserved robbed signal mode channel associated signaling message signal mode common channel signaling loop transmit clock so
290. mp provider vlan lt 1 16 gt Disconnects IGMP provider from a VLAN The following command can be used to check VLANs with MC permission Command Mode Function show igmp vlan Config Displays a list of VLANs with multicast permission Example Creating of an IGMP provider with index 1 and name prov 123 and assigning it to VLAN ID 123 igmp provider 1 192 168 151 15 prov 123 igmp provider vlan 1 123 19 4 Multicast Package and Group A mulicast group is a MC stream that clients can join Groups have IP addresses in the 224 0 0 0 24 network class D There are some permanent MC group addresses such as 224 0 0 1 IGMP queries 224 0 0 2 all routers on the subnet 224 0 0 5 6 OSPF routers 224 0 0 9 RIPv2 routers which should be not used Creating of Multicast Groups and Packages To configure IGMP multicast group and packages use the following command Command Mode Function igmp multicast group 1 16 A B C D NAME 1 512 Config Creates an IGMP multicast group 1 16 provider index default 1 A B C D multicast IP address NAME multicast group name 1 512 index of multicast group no igmp multicast group 1 512 NAME Deletes specified multicast group igmp multicast package NAME 1 100 Config Creates a multicast package NAME multicast package name 1 100 index of multicast package no igmp multicast package 1 100 NAME De
291. n config profile PROFILE datarate min ds datarate min us datarate min res ds datarate min res us datarate max ds datarate max us datarate min low pwr ds lt 32 103980 gt Mode Bridge Function Configures the maximum and minimum data rate of downtream upstream channel PROFILE enter the profile name datarate min ds Min data rate of downstream channel datarate min us Min data rate of upstream channel datarate min res ds Min reserved data rate of downstream channel only used in dynamic RA mode datarate min res us Min reserved data rate of upstream channel only used in dynamic RA mode datarate max ds Max data rate of downstream channel datarate max us Max data rate of upstream channel datarate min low pwr ds Min data rate of downstream channel in low power state 32 103980 data rate in kbps i Be aware that for an ADSL ADSL2 ADSL2 profile the definied maximum values for datarates could not be used For lines using an ADSL standard the maximum datarate value in downstream direction is limited to 32736 kbps in upstream direction to 3520 kbps 116 1d 0900d80580256ef1 Operation Manual CLI XDSL Command Mode Function xdsl chan config profile PROFILE max interdelay ds max interdelay us 0 255 Bridge Configures maximum interleave delay in milliseconds on downstream upstream direction introduced by the PMS TC on downstream upstream dir
292. nagement Protocol IP Internet Protocol IP DSLAM IP Digital Subscriber Line Multiplexer IPoA IP over ATM IPoE IP over Ethernet IPTV Internet Protocol Television 268 d 0900d80580240c85 Operation Manual CLI Abbreviations IRL ISDN ISO ISP IST ITU ITU T IU IU_GPON LACP LAG LAN LCT LOF LOS LRE LSA LSP MAC MAN MC MDU MGC MIB MSTP MTU NBMA NE NEBS NMS NNI Input Rate Limiting Intermediate System Integrated Services Digital Network International Organization for Standardisation Internet Service Provider Internal Spanning Tree International Telecommunication Union International Telecommunication Union Telecommunication Standardisation Sector Interface Unit Interface Unit with GPON Interfaces Link Aggregation Control Protocol Link Aggregation Group Local Area Network Local Craft Terminal Loss of Frame Loss of Signal Long Reach Ethernet Link State Advertisments Link State Packet Medium Access Control Metro Area Network Multicast Multi Dwelling Unit Multi Gateway Controller Management Information Base Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Multi Tenant Unit nonbroadcast Multi access Network Element Network Equipment Business Systems Network Management System Network to Network Interface Id 0900d80580240c85 269 Abbreviations Operation Manual CLI NTR ODN OLT OMCI ONT ONU OS OSPF PC PCM PID PIM PIM DM PIM SM PIM SSM PLL PLOAM PM PON
293. nager about an important event and to alert the network status It informs also about an improper user authentication a reboot the connection status activate or deactivate and closing of TCP connection to disconnect the neigh boring system Following sections describe the SNMP configuration e Configuring an SNMP Community e Configuring the SNMP Agentt Configuring an SNMP Group Configuring the SNMP MIB View e Configuring the Access Policy for Group Configuring an SNMP Trap Host Checking the SNMP Configuration Disable SNMP Configuring an SNMP Community According to the community the access rights can be specified A user is only autho rized to access the SNMP agent of the system if a community has been configured for him That means that the community name is usually the password to perform the iden tification for the remote SNMP management system However it is sent in clear text in the SNMP messages As long as a community is configured the NE is accessible full via SNMP v2c To configure a community in SNMP use the following command Command Mode Function snmp community ro rw COMMUNITY A B C D OID Config Creates a community and sets permission rights to allow authorized users the NE access over SNMP ro read only right to the MIB objects of NE rw read write right to the MIB objects of NE COMMUNITY community name A B C D SNMP agent s IP address OID only specified OID will be ac
294. nd to disable this function neighbor A B C D WORD remove private as Router Remove private AS number from outbound updates Use with external BGP peers only The router removes the AS numbers only if the update includes private AS numbers 64512 65535 Use the no parameter with this command to revert to default neighbor A B C D WORD route reflector client neighbor A B C D WORD route server client neighbor A B C D WORD send community both extended standard Router Router Router Configures the router as a BGP route reflector and configure the specified neighbor as its client By route reflection the number of iBGP peers within an AS is reduced An AS can have more than one route reflector One route reflector treats the other route reflector as another iBGP speaker Use the no parameter with this command to indicate that the neighbor is not a client Configure a neighbor as route server client Use the no parameter with this command to disable this function Send community attribute to this neighbor both send standard and extended community attributes extended send extended community attributes standard send standard community attributes By default on receiving the communities attribute the router reannounces them to the neighbor Only when the no parameter is used with this command the community attributes are not reannounced to the neighbor neighbor A B C D
295. nds in order to get information about the values stored in xDSL databases Command Mode Function show xdsldb line tbl name table phys tbl chan tbl Exec Shows information about a specified xDSL database table band tbl vcc tbl alm tbl xdsl port tbl operstate Config line tbl line table db checksum Bridge name table profile name table phys tbl physical table chan tbl channel table band tbl line band table vcc tbl VCC table alm tbl alarm table xdsl port tbl port table operstate card operstate db checksum checksum show liudb version Exec Shows version of the line interface unit Config Bridge 124 1d 0900d80580256ef1 Operation Manual CLI XDSL Command Mode Function show xdsldb xdsiIMode PROFILEINDEX Exec Shows information about the xDSL mode Config PROFILEINDEX profile name index from line profile Bridge 11 8 DELT Configuration DELT Dual Ended Line Test allows to test a single line on xTU C xTU R side Result data are requested from the xDSL interface where DELT was running before show Ire PORT ADDRESS xdsl delt gain allocation downstream upstream 1 4096 lt 1 4096 gt show Ire PORT ADDRESS xdsl delt snr allocation downstream upstream lt 1 4096 gt lt 1 4096 gt show Ire PORT ADDRESS xdsl delt qIn allocation downstream upstream 1 4096 lt 1 4096 gt show
296. nformation llle 220 Checking the Configuration 29 2 3r p RIGRE Rote Seeder bene 220 SPANNING Tree d dur e uertice x me E Aedes had bon bos 222 Configuring the STP Operation Mode llsllselsels sense 222 Activating STP RSTP MSTP susp saRRIREQe SE REID RR OS PRESS 222 Adding STP PONS siae dh da t mna papese hed epi 222 Coniguringithe ST P iaceat sop RU dscns RU RR AER RAT E ES 223 Deciding the Root Switch 0 000 cece ee 223 Deciding of Path Cost secoteesiecihesecioutarcouwseaehvapeuee 224 Deciding the Port Priority 12s Ren nee a beeen hoes 225 Deciding the MST R8giOfi 1 221 gk bees eee eee attad 225 Applying the STP Contiguration 2x ear ceis cinaran eo Eas 226 Configuring a Point to Point MAC 0 00 00 e eee eee ee 226 Configuring of Edge PONS o s ecivrses cede EIER rotte PNIS 227 Changing the STP Operation Mode isslselsslselsssse 227 Showing the Comiquration 2 2 25 rite eder cereo euge t 227 BPDU Configuration 23 nias ab ehaadds RR RR T AN GENE ees 229 Hello TMO cuo eee DOR ERRORES MEEIADER RID eee RI 229 Forward Delay 25255352 peLr amp ma c CERRULRNOLEDPIQEGGG ERR 229 Max AGG acie exisse mb dee ead reed kare RR RH P GER RTL EUER 230 BPDDIEIOD c x32 Sacacg E E Pie ce ene ek ees ed dees cues 230 Checking the BPDU Configuration liliis 230 Self Loop Detectioli sa ces node Rota RR RE Peres Per dde i 230 Sample of MSTP Configuration 0 0
297. ng the hiX 5750 R2 0 is configured to display 24 lines each with 80 characters on console screen With the length command the number of displayed lines can be changed Command Mode Function terminal length lt 0 512 gt terminal no length Privileged Configures the number of displayed lines on terminal screen 0 512 line value Disables the configuration for the number of displayed lines Example Sets the number of displayed lines on terminal screen as 20 lines SWITCH terminal length 20 SWITCH 4 4 2 Configuring a Login Banner Command Mode Function banner Config Register message before login the system Use the no parameter with this command to remove the banner banner login Register message when successfully log in the system Use the no parameter with this command to remove the banner banner login fail Register message when failing to login the system Use the no parameter with this command to remove the banner Command Mode Function show banner Privileged Displays login banner Config 52 Example 1d 0900d8058023 449 Operation Manual CLI System Basic Configuration 1 Execute the banner login command When you press Ctrl D key you can exit to system prompt 2 Write the message e g do not change the contiguration and then press Ctrl D key two times When you press Ctrl D key two times after writi
298. ng a message vou can exit to WITCH config s system prompt 3 The banner will be displayed after user s log in SWITCH login root Password do not change the configuration SWITCH Id 0900d8058023f449 53 System Properties Operation Manual CLI 5 System Properties This chapter describes the following configuration steps e Setting the Host Name e Configuring of System Date and Time e Synchronizing the Clock e Configuring the Time Zone 5 1 Setting the Host Name The host name displayed on prompt is necessary to distinguish each hiX 5750 R2 0 system that is connected to the network Command Mode Function hostname NAME Config Creates host name of the system NAME enter the name Host name distinguishes upper case and lower case no hostname NAME Deletes all configured host names or the specified host name i The default host name is SWITCH Example Changing the host name to AN GPON SWITCH config hostname AN GPON AN_GPON config 5 2 Configuring of System Date and Time Command Mode Function clock DATETIME Privileged Configures the system time and date show clock Config Displays the system date and time Available formats of DATETIME are examples 10 20 Jul 04 2007 or 04 Jul 2007 10 20 pm or 04 Jul 2007 10 20 AN_GPON clock 20070604 10 20 AN_GPON show clock Mon 4 Jul 2007 10 20 37
299. ng card m iugpon 2512 1 ej SLOTNUMBER number of the slot m iu gpon 2512 e converts card to IU GPON 2512 E IU with 4 ports GPON 2 5G 1 2G class B with 8 x E1 unstructured front access m iu gpon I e converts card to IU GPON 2512 L E IU with 4 ports GPON 2 5G 1 2G class B front access 7 6 Checking the MAC Table of Interface Unit Card Command Mode Function show iu ADRESS mac table Bridge Displays information of IU s MAC table segmented per specified GPON link or certain ONU ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port ONU ID show iu ADDRESS mac table vlan VLANID Displays information of IU s MAC table for specified GPON link or certain ONU that may be also segmented per VLAN ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port ONU ID VLANID show only MAC addresses in specified VLAN 7 7 Selecting Alarm Severity Profiles of Cards Rack amp Self Command Mode Function card alarm severity profile SLOTNUM 1 10 Config Changes alarm severity profile SLOTNUM number of the slot 1 10 index of the profile rack alarm severity profile 1 10 Changes rack alarm severity profile shelf alarm severity profile 1 10 Changes shelf alarm severity profile 62 Id 0900d8058023f600 Operation Manual CLI OLT Equipment 7 8 Configuring External Alarms Command Mode Function shelf ext alarm output 1 3 LINE shelf ext alarm input 1 8 0 1
300. ng the Network Enabling RIP Process on the Router Enabling RIP Process on the Router Change to Router configuration mode and enable a RIP routing process Command Mode Function router rip Config Enables RIP routing process and enters router configuration mode Use the no parameter with this command to disable the RIP routing process Specifying the Network Once the router is enabled specify which network it should be routing for Command Mode Function network A B C D M WORD Router Specifies networks to which routing updates will be sent and received A B C D M IP address prefix and length of this IP network WORD interface name Use the no parameter with this command to remove the specified network as one that runs RIP network A B C D M route map WORD Router Configures networks to operate as RIP using a route map A B C D M IP address prefix and length of this IP network WORD specifies route map 21 3 2 i To verify that the protocol is up and ready to go enter a show ip protocols command This would generally show details of all running IP routing protocols Allowing Unicast Updates for RIP RIP is a broadcast protocol When a neighbor does not understand multicast the following command is used to specify a router as a RIP neighbor by establishing a point to point link between the routers Command Mode Function neighbor A
301. ng to the ONU type when it creates the T CONTs Smallest bandwidth unit is always 510000 bps an entered bandwidth value is rounded down to the next multiple of 510000 Required bandwidth for one interface e 1 interface 2040000 bps e DS1 interface 1530000 bps e POTS VoIP interface 113600 bps e OMCI channel per ONU requires 38400 bps Type Fixed BW Assured BW Max BW CoS 1 X TDM VoIP 2 Data rt 3 Data hp 4 Data BE Table 19 T CONT Bandwidth Types d 0900d80580257cd9 79 Ports Operation Manual CLI Command Mode Function modify t cont bandwidth tdm voip data be data hp Bridge Configures bandwidth of T CONT depending on its type Note data rt TCONTS lt 0 1099560000 gt lt 0 1099560000 gt that there are some bandwidth values will be ignored and set to lt 0 1099560000 gt ZERO tdm time division multiplexing 1 t cont tdm voip data be data hp data rt TCONTS voip voice over internet protocol 1 modify bandwidth lt 0 1099560000 gt lt 0 1099560000 gt data rt data real time 2 lt 0 1099560000 gt data hp data high priority 3 modify t cont tdm voip data be data hp data rt data be data best effort 4 TCONTS bandwidth lt 0 1099560000 gt lt 0 1099560000 gt TCONTS assigned ONU address slot port ONU ID lt 0 1099560000 gt Use multiple of 510000 to configure the following bandwidth values 0 1099560000 fi
302. nly valid on broadcast inter Interface face 0 65535 CSNP interval in seconds level 1 Specify interval for level 1 CSNPs only level 2 Specify interval for level 2 CSNPs only The no paramater sets the default value 10 Sec for the interval to both level 1 and level 2 isis Isp interval lt 1 4294967295 gt Config Sets LSP transmission interval Interface 1 4294967295 LSP interval in milliseconds The no parameter sets the default value 33 ms for the interval 218 Id 0900d80580212815 Operation Manual CLI IP Routing Command Mode Function isis retransmit interval lt 0 65535 gt Config Sets per LSP retransmission interval Interface 0 65535 Interval between retransmissions of the same LSP in seconds The no paramater sets the default value 5 Sec for the interval Metrics Running integrated IS IS a default IP route will automatically be installed in the level 1 routers pointing toward the nearest L1 L2 router that originally set the attached bit in its level 1 LSP If there are multiple level 2 capable routers in the area the closest L1 L2 router is selected based on the cost The cost metric narrow metric is used by default measuring the cost of the complete link The interface default metric is put into IP reachability information TLVs and IS reachability information TLVs in LSPs The default metric for the circuit can be set with the command isis
303. not longer the corre sponding community settings have to be deleted Command Mode Function snmp com2sec SECURITY NAME A B C D A B C D M Config Specifies the mapping from the identity of the host and com COMMUNITY munity name to security name SECURITY NAME security name A B C D host IP address A B C D M host IP network COMMUNITY community name no snmp com2sec SECURITY NAME Deletes the registered security name To check registered security name use the following command Command Mode Function show snmp com2sec Privileged Displays the registered security name Config 254 An example of configuring com2sec and checking it SWITCH config snmp com2sec switch 100 1 1 1 public SWITCH config show snmp com2sec Com2Sec List SecName Source Community Id 0900d8058025b404 Operation Manual CLI SNMP 28 3 com2sec switch 100 1 1 1 public SWITCH config Configuring the SNMP Agent The SNMP agent and the MIB which stores the information on system and network reside on the NE The SNMP agent uses MIB variables to reply on requests from SNMP administrator The SNMP administrator can obtain data from the SNMP agent and on the other hand he can also save data in the SNMP agent Use the following commands to configure the identity of the agent accessing the NE over SNMP This configuration is saved in the SNMP configuration file Command Mode Function snmp
304. nt data table show voip performance rtpmon history data table Contig Shows the whole RTP monitoring history data table 12 7 Megaco H 248 Protocol 12 7 1 MGC Configuration Data Table To configure the H 248 MGC configuration data table use the following commands Command Mode Function create voip mgc config data table entry Config Creates MGC config data table entries UDP_TCP_PTR PROTOCOL_VERSION MESSAGE_FORMAT UDP_TCP_PTR pointer to the TCP UDP config data table MAX_RETRY_ATTEMPTS lt 2 16 gt Default value is 2944 for text message formats and 2955 for binary message formats PROTOCOL_VERSION protocol version of Megaco Protocol being used MESSAGE FORMAT 0 text long default 1 text short 2 binary MAX_RETRY_ATTEMPTS max number of times a message is retransmitted to the MGC default 0 2 16 table entry index or CR for automatically generated index modify voip mgc config data table entry lt 1 16 gt Modifies MGC config data table entries UDP_TCP_PTRPROTOCOL_VERSION MESSAGE_FORMAT 1 16 table entry index MAX_RETRY_TIME MAX_RETRY_ATTEMPTS max number of times a message MAX_RETRY_ATTEMPTS SERVICE_CHANGE_DELAY is retransmitted to the MGC SERVICE_CHANGE_DELAY service change delay delete voip mgc config data table entry lt 2 16 gt Deletes MGC config data table entry modify voip mgc config data table profile name lt 1 16 gt Config Modifies config data table profile name LINE 1
305. nterface index olt endpoint of PM object is the OLT ont endpoint of PM object is ONT no no endpoint 1 96 history entry size 1 16 index of threshold profile Deletes a PM object 1 1024 index of the PM object Modifies a PM object 1 1024 index of the PM object 112 interval type 15 min 24 h 1 96 history entry size 1 16 index of threshold profile change adminstate pm object lt 1 1024 gt 112 ADMIN_STATE Config Used to activate and deactivate performance monitoring for both interval types of the PM object 1 1024 index of the PM object 112 interval type 15 min 24 h ADMIN STATE 0 locked 1 active 10 10 4 Displaying the PM Data Command Mode Function show gpon pm table Config Shows the whole GPON PM table show gpon pm table list Exec Shows the whole GPON PM table in list format Overview Config show gpon pm remaining history entries Config Shows the number of remaining history entries d 0900d80580257cd9 95 Ports Operation Manual CLI Command Mode Function show tcont pm data lt 1 1024 gt Config Shows list of PM data for TCONT Bridge 1 1024 PM object index show tcont pm object list Displays all T CONT PM objects show gemport pm data lt 1 1024 gt Config Shows GPON encapsulation method port Bridge pm data list PM data for gemport 1 1024 PM object index show gemport pm object li
306. nterval default 10 s fi The query response interval value must be set in steps of 0 1 s Startup Query Interval is the startup frequency at which IGMP host query packets downstream are transmitted on the interface Startup Query Count is the number of queries sent out on startup separated by the startup query interval Last Member Query Interval is the max response time inserted into group specific queries sent in response to leave group messages and is also the amount of time between group specific query messages This value may be tuned to modify the leave latency of the network A reduced value results in reduced time to detect the loss of the last member of a group Last Member Query Count is the number of group specific queries sent before the router assumes there are no local members Unsolicited Report Interval is the time between repetitions of a host s initial report of membership in a group upstream Unsolicited Report Count indicates the number of times unsolicited report has been sent Such reports are sent after every unsolicited report interval Version1 Router Timeout is how long a host must wait after hearing a version 1 query before it may send any IGMPv2 messages The time until the local router will assume that there are no longer any IGMPv1 members on the IP subnet attached to this interface Upon hearing any IGMPv1 membership report this value is loaded to a timer While the timer is running the local router igno
307. nvolved with electrical cir cuitry and be familiar with standard practices for preventing accidents by making quick guide based on this guide Typographical Conventions Command Notation This document uses the following conventions when presenting the syntax of a command Id 0900d8058020cb15 17 Introduction Operation Manual CLI Notation Description Bold style lowercase term Indicates keywords that must be typed exactly as shown in the command description For better readability keywords are structured with hyphen Example show system version Italic style uppercase term Indicates a user supplied parameter that may be either required or optional For better readability parameters are structured with underscore Examples NAME PROFILE SEVERITY TABLE INDEX Braces indicate a group of required keywords or variables One and only one item inside the braces must be entered Nesting is also possible Example internal external 112 means internal or external 1 or external 2 Square brackets indicate optional parameters Choose none or select one or more of the listed keywords or variables Nesting is also possible Example show bridgeport PORTS Angle brackets indicate the valid range of numbers endpoints inclusive Example qos watermark lt 0 7 gt lt 0 100 gt lt 0 100 gt A vertical bar indicates a choice of parameters e g keywords placed within bra
308. o EFM the classical ATM transport can be used The hiX 5750 R2 0 supports ATM networks with virtual channel VC A VC can be configured by virtual circuit iden tifier VCI and virtual path identifier VPI 122 1d 0900d80580256ef1 Operation Manual CLI XDSL Configuring of Virtual Channel Command Mode Function Ire PORTS xdsl atm vc create vpi lt 0 255 gt vci lt 32 65535 gt Bridge Ire PORTS xdsl atm vc delete vpi 0 255 vci lt 32 65535 gt Ire PORTS xdsl atm vec 1 8 vpi 0 255 vci lt 32 65535 gt Ire PORTS xdsl atm vcc 1 8 encap llc vc mux Ire PORTS xdsl atm vcc 1 8 alarmseverity 1 10 Creates a VC by VCI and VPI on specified port PORTS enter slot port ONU ID ONT slot 0 255 range VPI values default is 1 32 65535 range VCI values default is 32 Deletes a VC specified by VCI and VPI PORTS enter slot port ONU ID ONT slot 0 255 VPI values 32 65535 VCI values Configures VCC TP on specified port PORTS enter slot port ONU ID ONT slot 1 8 index VCC 0 255 VPI values 32 65535 VCI values Sets the used encapsulation over ATM adaption layer 5 AAL5 to LLC or VC MUX PORTS enter slot port ONU ID ONT slot 1 8 index VCC Sets alarm severity value for specified VCC PORTS enter slot port ONU ID ONT slot 1 8 index VCC 1 10 index alarm severity Checking of VC Configuration Command show
309. o another debug Debugging functions see also undebug enable Turn on privileged mode command exit End current mode and down to previous mode help Description of the interactive help system no Negate a command or set its defaults ping Send echo messages show Show running system information telnet Open a telnet connection terminal Set terminal line parameters traceroute Trace route to destination where List active user connections write Write running configuration to memory network or terminal SWITCH i The question mark is not displayed and there is no need to press ENTER key in order to display the list d 0900d8058024303c Operation Manual CLI Using CLI In case of installed command shell commands can be found out starting with specific alphabet Enter the first letter and a question mark without space The following is an example of finding out the commands starting with s in Privileged exec mode SWITCH s show Show running system information SWITCH s To view required and possible parameters of a command enter the command and a question mark delimited by one space The following is an example of viewing the vari ables of write command SWITCH write file Write to the file memory Write to NV memory terminal Write to termina SWITCH write Use the show list command to find out a detailed list of available commands with its parameters in each mode press the arrow key to dis
310. o bridgeport PORTS srcmacaddr Deletes source for MAC address for IPoA bridgeport PORTS ethertype Bridge Configures ethertype based tagging disable enable PoE VLAN IPoE Prio ARP VLAN ARP Prio PPPoE VLAN PPPoE Prio Id 0900d8058025fb9e PORTS port number range of port numbers e g 1 1 1 48 2 20 disable disables ethertype based tagging enable enables ethertype based tagging IPoE ARP PPPoE IPoE VLAN TCl s VLAN value for upstream tagging of IPoE frames IPoE Prio TCI s priority value for upstream tagging of IPoE frames ARP VLAN TCI s VLAN value for upstream tagging of ARP frames ARP Prio TCI s priority value for upstream VLAN tagging of ARP frames PPPoE VLAN TCI s VLAN value for upstream tagging of PPPoE frames PPPoE Prio TCI s priority value for upstream tagging of PPPoE frames 163 Bridges Operation Manual CLI Command Mode Function bridgeport PORTS antispoofing enable disable Bridge Bridge port IP anti spoofing configuration PORTS port number range of port numbers e g 1 1 1 48 2 20 enable enables IP anti spoofing disable disables IP anti spoofing For further settings see 23 IP Anti Spoofing bridgeport PORTS mode vcc aggr enable disable Bridge Enables disables VCC aggregator PORTS port number range of port numbers e g 1 1 1 48 2 20 no bridgeport PORTS mode vcc aggr Deletes VCC aggregator bridgeport PORTS multicast packagegroup Bridge Conf
311. o transfer DHCP messages between the DHCP clients and associated servers when they do not reside on the same IP network or subnet In the hiX 5750 R2 0 a DHCP relay agent is available to manage a wide DHCP subnet by forwarding IP addresses which are requested from the DHCP clients A DHCP relay agent also extends the reach of a DHCP server so that it is not necessary to use multiple DHCP servers to accommodate multiple IP subnets 18 3 1 Enabling the DHCP Relay Agent Use the following commands to enable disable the DHCP relay agent Command Mode Function dhcp relay A B C D Config Enables DHCP relay agent for the mgmt interface A B C D IP address of DHCP server no dhcp relay Disables DHCP relay agent for the mgmt interface ip address A B C D A B C D MI netmask A B C DI 1 31 DHCP Configures DHCP relay IP address and netmask no ip dhcp relay Disables DHCP relay 18 3 2 Registering the DHCP Server After configuring the relay agent enter the following command to register the DHCP server s 178 d 0900d8058025c93a Operation Manual CLI DHCP and PPPoE Command Mode Function server A B C D A B C D A B C D no server A B C D all DHCP Configures new DHCP server IP address es Enter first second or third DHCP server s address Deletes DHCP server IP address es Enter IP address value or all default 18 3 3 Ch
312. of Ethernet port SPEED shows the full duplex mode of the port FLOWCTRL Shows flow control of port ROLE Shows the configured role of the port Table 20 Information displayed by Show Port Command Cont Command Mode Function show ponpptp olt table list ADDRESS Config Displays information of PON interface on OLT table table with config data list list ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port show ponpptp ont table list ADDRESS Config Displays information of PON interface on ONT ONU table table with config data list list ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port ONU ID 10 9 Port Statistics 10 9 1 Checking Port Statistics In order to display traffic average of each port or interface MIB use the following commands Command Mode Function show port statistics avg pkt PORTS all Bridge Shows average packets statistic counters of specified port PORTS port number OLT slot OLT port all show all ports show port statistics interface PORTS rcu Privileged Shows MIB data of specified port Config PORTS port number OLT slot OLT port Bridge rcu redundant central unit show port statistics ethernet PORTS show port statistics dot3 PORTS all show port state mirror PORTS show port gpon eth I pots e1ds111 I voip xdsl catv ces PORTS statistics interface Shows Ethernet statistic counters of specified port Shows DOTS statistic counters of specified port Sh
313. of port numbers e g 1 1 1 48 2 20 none no host protocol dhcp DHCP host protocol pppoe PPPoE host protocol dhcp pppoe DHCP and PPPoE host protocol See 18 DHCP and PPPoE for more information bridgeport PORTS circuitid C RCUITID Bridge Configures DHCP circuit ID needed for special Options in DHCP or PPPoE PORTS port number range of port numbers e g 1 1 1 1 72 1 0 1 CIRCUITID DHCP circuit ID means no circuit ID See 18 4 DHCP Option 82 PPPoE Option 105 for more information bridgeport PORTS maxhosts MAXHOST Bridge Configures maximum number of usable MAC addresses per sub scriber port PORTS port number range of port numbers e g 1 1 1 48 2 20 MAXHOSTS max value for learned MAC per port no bridgeport PORTS maxhosts Deletes max hosts bridgeport PORTS mode ipoa ipoe vcc aggr Bridge Configures mode of this bridgeport IPoE or IPoA The activation of enable disable mode IPoA is only possible if a default gateway in the corresponding VLAN table entry PVID is configured PORTS port number range of port numbers e g 1 1 1 48 2 20 ipoa IPoA mode ipoe IPOE mode vec aggr VCC aggregator can be enabled disabled bridgeport PORTS srcmacaddr Bridge Configures source for MAC address if this port is running in IPoA auto SRCMACADR mode PORTS port number range of port numbers e g 1 1 1 48 2 20 auto no source MAC address configuration for IPoA SRCMACADR source MAC address e g 00 11 22 33 44 55 n
314. of the line i e which channel type s are sup no channel fast only interleaved only fast or interleaved fast and interleaved ported PROFILE enter the profile name no channel no channels exist fast only only fast channel exists interleaved only only interleaved channel exists fast or interleaved either fast or interleaved channel exists only one at a time fast and interleaved both fast and interleaved channels exist Rate Mode RX Power Max Aggregate Power Command Mode Function xdsl line config profile PROFILE Bridge Configures rate mode on xDSL line down rate mode up rate mode PROFILE enter the profile name fixed adapt at init adapt at runtime down rate mode rate selection behaviour downstream up rate mode rate selection behaviour upstream fixed force to configured rate adapt at init adapt to line quality adapt to runtime seamless rate adapts during runtime based upon line quality xdsl line config profile PROFILE max up rx pwr Bridge Configures max Rx power upstream on xDSL line MAX RCV POWER PROFILE enter the profile name MAX RCV POWER value from 0 to 25 5 dBm in steps of 0 1 dBm default 25 5 dBm xdsl line config profile PROFILE Bridge Configures max aggregate power on xDSL line down max pwr up max pwr 0 255 PROFILE enter the profile name down max pwr max aggregate downstream power up max pwr max aggregate upstr
315. ofile table ALARM ID alarm ID value PROFILE INDEX index of the severity profile in severity profile table SEVERITY new severity of the alarm 1 to 5 update alarm list Updates the alarm list after changing the severity Example SWITCH config modify alarm severity 6 3 2 Alarm ID 06 Severity Profile 3 Old Severity eG New Severity 2 SWITCH config update alarm listAlarm list is now up to date 6 2 Checking the Alarm Severity Configuration In order to identify ID and name of alarms that can occur in system use the following command See the maintenance manual for more information about a particular alarm Command Mode Function show alarm id Privileged Displays assignment alarm and alarm ID Config 56 Example SWITCH show alarm id Id 0900d8058025ae9c Operation Manual CLI Alarms Assignment Alarm and Alarm ID 08 gponPhysFanAlarm5 09 gponPhysShe 10 gponPhysSh 11 gponPhysSh 12 gponPhysSh 13 gponPhysSh 14 gponPhysSh 15 gponPhysSh 16 gponPhysSh T7 gponPhysSh 18 gponPhysShe e e e e e e e e lfMupStatel1 lfMupState lfExternalAlarm01 lfExternalAlarm02 lfExternalAlarm03 lfExternalAlarm04 lfExternalAlarm05 lfExternalAlarm06 lfExternalAlarm07 lfExternalAlarm08 19 gponPhysCardTypeMismatch 20 gponPhysCardFailure More SWI
316. ommand to disable this function 21 2 7 Routing Map By default all routing protocols place their routes into a routing table Only the routes that pass the route map are sent or accepted in updates On both inbound and outbound updates the hiX 5750 R2 0 supports matches based on AS path community and network number AS path matching requires the as path access list command com munity based matching requires the community list command and network based matching requires the access list command To configure routing policy use the following command Command Mode Function neighbor A B C D WORD route map WORD in out Router Applies a route map to filter updates and modify attributes WORD name of the route map in access list applies to incoming advertisements out access list applies to outgoing advertisements Use the no parameter with this command to a route map 21 2 8 Distribution List To restrict the routing information BGP routing updates can be filtered from or to particular neighbors To do this define an access list and apply it to the updates Distribute list filters are applied to network numbers and not autonomous system paths Use the following command to configure BGP route filtering Command Mode Function neighbor A B C D WORD distribute list 1 199 Router Filters BGP updates to from this neighbor lt 1300 2699 gt WORD in out A B C D Neighbor IPv4 a
317. on Mode 23 Table 7 Main Commands of the RMON Configuration Mode 23 Table 8 Main Commands of the Bridge Configuration Mode 24 Table 9 Main Commands of the Interface Configuration Mode 24 Table 10 Main RIP Commands oft the Router Configuration Mode 25 Table 11 Main Commands of the Route Map Configuration Mode 25 Table 12 Retura COMMANGS cx io detis S pco Diog ai cex d Eran aug ribs a uL dd 26 Table 13 Privileged Exec Mode Command 0 0c cece ene eee 29 Table 14 GCLIKey Gombinallons 2 nn aba ows daca ERA wl gia dae 29 Table 15 Port Indices and Slot Assignment 2 000 0c eee eee 30 Table 16 World Time Zones iere eae indeed ene eked doetald eae 54 Table 17 Clock Source Indexes terciera neaei tte 55 Table 18 ONT MDU Types 0000 e eects 66 Table 19 T CONT Bandwidth Types 000 e eee eee eee 79 Table 20 Information displayed by Show Port Command 90 Table 21 RFN VBS SpectiUmMi seest etki geet age bed ee Rees aha 118 Table 22 Default PSD Mask Profile for VDSL2 G 993 2 119 Table 23 Bridge Port Shaping and Policing 0 0c eae ane 164 Table2a 3STPIPatOOSE sicac swe a oacety pete LESE cos oai 224 Table 25 ASIP Path COSE aso cidactdevne shear esed beeen bead dede Sd 225 Table 26 IRG CIC Im 249 1d 0900d8058025 467 Operation Manual CLI Change History
318. on about routes from being advertised by a router out any interface from which that information originated This behavior usually optimizes communications among multiple routers particularly when links are broken However with non broadcast networks such as Frame Relay situations can arise for which this behavior is less than ideal For these situations you might want to disable split horizon If an interface is configured with secondary IP addresses and split horizon is enabled updates might not be sourced by every secondary address One routing update is sourced per network number unless split horizon is disabled In order to activate or deactivate or disable split horizon perform the following tasks in interface configuration mode Command Mode Function ip split horizon Interface Performs the split horizon action on the interface The default is split horizon poisoned Use the no parameter with this command to disable this function Command RIP Version G RIP version is used globally by the router The router of the hiX 5750 R2 0 basically supports only RIP version 2 However it is possible to configure the router to receive only version 1 type packet or only version 2 type packet Mode Function version lt 1 2 gt Router Configures the version of RIP processing Default is RIP v2 Use the no parameter with this command to restore the default version The following commands apply to a sp
319. on and assignment 118 otherwise the configuration will be rejected used notches 1d 0900d80580256ef1 Inside of one notch profile the NE will not accept a subcarrier overlapping Be aware that the NE can handle only 16 notches per line at time RFI band s Operation Manual CLI XDSL e A modification of an existing notch profile is not allowed if this profile is already in use that means this profile is assigned directly to a XDSL line Command Mode Function xdsl notch config profile PROFILE add notch Bridge Add one Notch to the table up to 16 Notches lt 1 4095 gt lt 2 4095 gt possible PROFILE enter the profile name 1 4095 start index of subcarrier for Notch 2 4095 stop index of subcarrier for Notch xdsl notch config profile PROFILE delete notch Bridge Delete one Notch from the Notch profile table 1 16 PROFILE enter the profile name 1 16 Notch index 11 3 3 Checking of Profiles Command show xdsl notch config profile show xdsl notch config profile PROFILE show xdsl notch config info show xdsl notch config info PROFILE Mode Privileged Config Bridge Privileged Config Bridge Privileged Config Bridge Privileged Config Bridge 11 4 PSD Mask Profiles To provide coexistence with other services PSD masks can be configured for VDSL2 regional bandplan annexes 11 4 1 Function Shows all configured notc
320. one 126 1d 0900d80580256ef1 Operation Manual CLI Voice over IP 12 Voice over IP 12 1 12 1 1 Depending on the ONT MDU type it is possible to provide VoIP service via SIP or Megaco H 248 The protocol version is valid for a whole ONT ONT card MDU service board Figure 4 illustrates the relations between the configuration modules SS 2 SS SS 4 i Application MG User Dial Plan SIP User Data Mapping Data Service Profile eu MGC MGC Config Dial Plan SIP Agent ccess PM Data Data Profile Config Data Codes Profile SIP PM Data Figure 4 VoIP Configuration Structure VoIP Profiles RTP Real Time Transport Protocol Profile To configure the RTP profile use the following commands Id 0900d8058023f697 127 Voice over IP Operation Manual CLI Command Mode Function create voip voip rtp profile table entry lt 1 16 gt LOCPORTMIN LOCPORTMAX lt 0 255 gt 011 011 011 011 LINE Config Creates RTP profile table entries 1 16 table entry index LOCPORTMIN base RTP port used for voice traffic 0 65535 default 50000 LOCPORTMAx top end range RTP port used for voice traffic must be greater than base RTP port 0 255 diffserv code point to be used for outgoing RTP packets default expedited forwarding 46 Events according to RFC 2833 disable 0 or enable 1 0 1 piggyback events 01 1 tone events 011 DTMF events 01
321. onfig modify payload counter 2 1 config activate SWITCH config show payload counter config config for pon link 2 1 is available PAYLOAD COUNTER VLAN TA counter vlan o 10 Ui FP WN FP Ox Ce e PAYLOAD COUNTER MULTI counter group vlan mapping bit BLE CAST CONFIGURATION 23 valid PAYLOAD COUNTER UNI CAST CONFIGURATION d 0900d80580257cd9 Operation Manual CLI Ports ethernet ethernet ethernet ethernet VoIP VoIP VoIP ethernet ethernet ethernet ethernet VoIP interface counter vlan address group mapping 20 1 1 63 invalid 20 1 2 63 invalid 20 1 3 63 invalid 20 1 4 63 invalid 20 1 63 invalid 1 20 5 1 63 invalid 1 24 2 1 2 valid 1 24 4 1 none invalid 1 24 4 2 none invalid 1 24 4 3 12 valid 1 24 4 4 none invalid 1 24 4 1 none invalid PAYLOAD COUNTER NAMES 1 unu 2 nsn 2 63 nsn63 64 um 10 11 1 7 Checking the Configuration Use the following command to verify the payload counters of loaded configuration Command Mode Function show payload counter config names ponlink Config Shows specified of all payload counter information vlan mc uc ADDRESS flags names names of counter groups ponlink currently loaded GPON link vlan assignment of VLANs to the counter of groups mc counter gro
322. onfig if no shutdown SWITCH config if Configuration Mode Execute the following command to enable disable an interface on Configuration mode Command Mode Function interface shutdown noshutdown INTERFACENAME _ Config Disables enables the interface on Configuration mode INTERFACENAME interface that should be deactivated activated fi To manage multiple interfaces use the delimiter 166 ce oo or Id 0900d80580257621 Operation Manual CLI Interface Configuration 15 2 Assigning an IP Address to the Interface After enabling the network interface assign an IP address and subnet mask to this interface by using the ip address commands in the nterface mode Command Mode Function ip address ADDRESS M ip address ADDRESS M scope host link ip address ADDRESS M secondary Interface Sets IP address of an Interface ADDRESS M specifies the IP address prefix and length of this IP Use the no parameter with this command to clear designated IP address Sets link host IP address ADDRESS M specifies the IP address prefix and length of this IP host IP address for the appropriate equipment link IP address for the appropriate network Sets secondary IP address of an Interface ADDRESS M specifies the IP address prefix and length of this IP Use the no parameter with this command to clear secondary IP address
323. onfiguration use the following commands Command Mode Function show running config router isis Exec Shows current IS IS router information Config 220 Id 0900d80580212815 Operation Manual CLI IP Routing Command Mode Function show isis WORD topology 11 12 level 1 level 2 Privileged Displays data about IS IS topology Fw 14 L12 fies level Exec WORD routing area tag show isis topology T1 I2 level 1 level 2 I1 level 1 path to all level 1 routers in the area inter area topol ogy I2 level 2 path to all level 2 routers in the domain intra area topology show ip route database isis Privileged Displays IS IS routing table for IPv4 Exec database Link state database show isis WORD database detail verbose Privileged Displays IS IS link state database information 11 12 level 1 level 2 Exec detail detailed information h isis datab detail b IT TI2 Level verbose detailed information show isis database detail verbose 11112 level 1 WORD routing area tag level 2 WORD I1 level 1 for Level 1 only I2 level 2 for Level 2 only show isis interface FNAME Privileged Displays detailed interface information Exec IFNAME enter interface name show memory isis Config Shows consumption ratio of IS IS memory Id 0900d80580212815 221 Spanning Tree Operation Manual CLI 22 22 1 Spanning Tree If multiple p
324. ooded in their VLANs independent vlan learning bridge learns MAC addresses MAC addresses must be unique for all VLANs shared vlan learning bridge learns MAC addresses and all existing VLANs MAC addresses must be unique in one VLAN bridgebase cxu taggingmode single double Bridge Configures the taggingmode of CXU single bridgebase tagging mode single double bridgebase tagging mode double bridgebase cxu residential mode on off Bridge Configures the CXU residential mode on internal routing of frames between subscribers is disabled default setting off internal routing of frames between subscribers is enabled if not separated by VLAN bridgebase cxu outertagging PVID PRIORITY Bridge Sets the outertag defaults PVID default outer PVID PRIORITY default outer tag priority bridgebase cxu outerEtherType ETHERTYPE Bridge Sets QinQ encapsulation configurable outer tag ethertype with without CXU specific scope ETHERTYPE 0x8100 0x88a8 0x9100 or 0x9200 bridgebase cxu dlf filter enable disable Bridge Configures destination lockup failure filter enable destination MAC unknown unicast towards sub scriber ports blocked disable destination MAC unknown unicast towards sub scriber ports allowed Id 0900d8058025fb9e 157 Bridges Operation Manual CLI Command Mode Function show bridgebase cxu Privileged Displays bridge base for CXU Config Bridge 14 1 3 Bridge of Interf
325. ork to configure distance value Command Mode Function distance 1 255 A B C D M WORD Router Sets the administrative distance 1 255 distance value Default value of distance is 120 A B C D M network prefix and length Sets default RIP distance to specified value when the route s source IP address matches the specified prefix WORD access list name Sets default RIP distance to specified value when the route s source IP address matches the specified prefix and the specified access list Use the no parameter with this command to disable this function 21 3 7 Extended RIP Configuration e Blocking an Interface e Split Horizon RIP Version Timers Blocking an Interface On a blocked interface all receiving packets are processed as normal and router does not send either multicast or unicast RIP packets except to RIP neighbors specified with neighbor command Command Mode Function passive interface FNAME Router Blocks RIP broadcast on the interface IFNAME interface name Use the no parameter with this command to disable this function Id 0900d80580212815 211 IP Routing Operation Manual CLI Split Horizon Normally routers that are connected to broadcast type IP networks and that use distance vector routing protocols employ the split horizon mechanism to reduce the possibility of routing loops Split horizon blocks informati
326. orms a detailed plausibility check and rejects the rule if the configuration is incomplete contains bad or unsupported values or conflicts to other rules In this case the system informs about the reason and the operator may correct the values e tcan be that the entered name interferes with the name of an internally managed rule name will not be listed by command show rule In this case the system rejects a rule with the message m A rule having the same NAME already exists Select another name for this rule e g add a prefix e All previously entered values remain valid after successful or unsuccessful execution of command apply If several rules being different only in one value should be created then only the one changed value needs to be entered again 25 7 Displaying the Rules Configuration The following commands can be used to show a certain rule by its name all rules of a certain type or all rules at once sorted by rule type Command Mode Function show rule Rule show rule all show rule cxu Privileged Config Displays all rules sorted by type Displays all rules sorted by type alias to show rule Displays all active user rules and admin rules at CXU in a condensed format show rule name NAME Rule Privileged Config Displays a rule enter a rule name show rule type cxu generic cxu admin iugpon generic iugpon admin Rule Privileged Config Di
327. ow auto backup ftp file table Index File Name Timestamp n ee i i i 1 gpon 080006263ce5 dat Fri Jun 13 11 40 00 2008 GPON_1 config 4 1 3 Auto Upgrading the S APS For an automatic S APS upgrade the S APS configuration file is needed on FTP server This file contains the software load information on all units possible to plug in and also those ONT types that may be connected to the hiX 5750 R2 0 If automatic S APS handling is enabled most of the commands for manual software up and download are blocked Exceptions are commands like upload cxu errorlog upload cxu iu inventory In order to download SAPS use one of the following commands Command Mode Function download sapshandling create sapsserverinfo Config Configures S APS config data for upgrade ADDRESS USER PASSWORD SAPSFILE ADDRESS S APS FTP server IP address USER S APS FTP server user name PASSWORD S APS FTP server password SAPSFILE S APS file on SAPS server with complete file path e g SAPS hiX5750R20 55 hix5750r20 55 012 download sapshandling enable disable Config Configures S APS handling S APS use of S APS data from now on restart reset restart noreset reload enable S APS configuration file will be read from FTP server If it is not possible S APS handling will remain in ON condition but the operstate changes to disable disable S APS handling disabled manual up download possible restart reset S AP
328. ows state information of mirrored port Shows port statistic gpon GPON port eth Ethernet port pots POTS port eids1ll E1DS1 leased line port voip VoIP interface xdsl xDSL port catv CATV port d 0900d80580257cd9 91 Ports Operation Manual CLI Example Viewing interface MIB data SWITCH bridge show port statistics interface 9 1 ifIndex 4 ifDescr Siemens hiX5750 CCXUVR 10 4E ifType 6 ifMtu 1500 ifSpeed 0 ifPhysAddress 08 00 06 26 1a 6d ifAdminStatus UP ifOperStatus I I 3 ifLastChange ifInOctets ifInUcastPkts ifInDiscards iflnErrors iflInUnknownProtos ifOutOctets ifOutUcastPkts ifOutDiscards Co Cy C QU c 0 o Oo c tJ ifOutErrors oO ct o ns ifName iflInMulticastPkts iflInBroadcastPkts ifOutMulticastPkts ifOutBroadcastPkts ifHCInOctets ifHCInUcastPkts ifHCInMulticastPkts ifHCInBroadcastPkts ifHCOutOctets ifHCOutUcastPkts ifHCOutMulticastPkts ifHCOutBroadcastPkts ifLinkUpDownTrapEnable ifHighSpeed ifPromiscuousMode O O O OG OGOGOGOOGOGO GOGG N oO ifConnectorPresent 1 ifAlias ifCounterDiscontinuityTime 0 SWITCH bridge 10 9 2 Clearing Port Statistics Use the following commands to clear all recorded statistics of port 92 d 0900d80580257cd9 Operation Manual CLI Ports Command Mode Function clear port statistics interface PO
329. p stale info SWITCH config A static route for network 0 0 0 0 to default gateway configures a default route The following example shows the configuring of a static route for network 0 0 0 0 to default gateway 10 2 2 1 It can be checked by using the command show ip route SWITCH config ip route 0 0 0 0 0 10 2 2 1 SWITCH config show ip route Codes K kernel C connected S static R RIP 196 Id 0900d80580212815 Operation Manual CLI IP Routing 21 2 21 2 1 B BGP O OSPF IA OSPF inter area N1 OSPF NSSA external type 1 N2 OSPF NSSA external type 2 OSPF external type 1 E2 OSPF external type 2 i IS IS L1 IS IS level 1 L2 IS IS level 2 ia IS IS inter area candidate default Gateway of last resort is 10 2 2 1 to network 0 0 0 0S 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 via 10 2 2 1 mgmtC 10 2 2 0 24 is directly connected mgmtC 10 254 254 96 27 is directly connected br4094 SWITCH config BGP Routing The Border Gateway Protocol BGP is an Autonomous System AS routing protocol designed to provide loop free routing between separate routing domains AS stands for a set of routers under common administration The hiX 5750 R2 0 supports BGP version 4 as defined in RFC 1771 The protocol provides a set of mechanisms for supporting Classless Inter Domain Routing CIDR These mechanisms include the support for ad
330. play more information see the fol lowing example SWITCH show list clear ip bgp clear ip bgp in clear ip bgp in prefix filter clear ip bgp ipv4 unicast multicast in clear ip bgp ipv4 unicast multicast in prefix filter clear ip bgp ipv4 unicast multicast out clear ip bgp ipv4 unicast multicast soft clear ip bgp ipv4 unicast multicast soft in clear ip bgp ipv4 unicast multicast soft out clear ip bgp out clear ip bgp soft clear ip bgp soft in clear ip bgp soft out clear ip bgp vpnv4 unicast in clear ip bgp vpnv4 unicast out clear ip bgp vpnv4 unicast soft clear ip bgp vpnv4 unicast soft in clear ip bgp vpnv4 unicast soft out clear ip bgp lt 1 65535 gt clear ip bgp lt 1 65535 gt in clear ip bgp lt 1 65535 gt in prefix filter clear ip bgp 1 65535 ipv4 unicast multicast in clear ip bgp lt 1 65535 gt ipv4 unicast multicast in prefixfilter clear ip bgp 1 65535 ipv4 unicast multicast out clear ip bgp 1 65535 ipv4 unicast multicast soft clear ip bgp 1 65535 ipv4 unicast multicast soft in clear ip bgp lt 1 65535 gt ipv4 unicast multicast soft out clear ip bgp 1 65535 out clear ip bgp 1 65535 soft clear ip bgp 1 65535 soft in Id 0900d8058024303c 27 Using CLI Operation Manual CLI 28 2 4 2 2 4 3 2 4 4 clear ip bgp lt 1 65535 gt soft out clear ip bgp lt 1 65535 gt vpnv4 uni
331. processing for these traffic flows by the reorganizing of priorities according to the importance of the single traffic flows By favor of QoS the user can predict network performance in advance and manage bandwidth more effectively QoS operates as follow e Class of service Dotip priority mapping to queues These mappings will be applied on all uplink and downlink interfaces within the system Scheduling modes In order to handle overloading of traffic flows differently processing orders are possible through using scheduling algorithms The hiX 5750 R2 0 provides two methods of queue scheduling and the combination of both Strict priority queuing is used to process certain important data more preferen tially than the others Since all data are processed by their priorities data with high priorities can be processed fast but data without low priorities might be delayed and piled up This method has a strong point of providing the distin guished service with a simple way However if the packets having higher priority enter the packets having lower priority are not processed and can drop The processing order in Strict Priority Queuing in case of entering packets having the Queue number as below gt o Figure 5 User defined Setting for CPU Packet The WRR queuing is a scheduling algorithm allowing different priorities depending on the queue weight Queue weight controls the scheduling prece
332. prof table Config Shows traffic description profile Bridge 10 2 5 GEM Ports This section describes the settings of security mode alarm severity and loop state i Enabling AES on GEM port level requires an activation of AES for the ONU see 9 3 Modifying ONU Parameter Related commands are e modify onu securitymode for enabling disabling AES modify onu securityuserdata for setting key update time If encryption is switched off for an ONU the NE itself switches off the encryption for the affected GEM ports This takes place without any notification i The command parameter priority ID 1 8 is an internal index to address GEM ports on an interface By default packets with a higher 1p priority will be forwarded over a GEM port with higher or equal priority ID than packets with lower 1p priority Command Mode Function gemport all of ont ONUADDR modify security mode Bridge Enables disables GPON encryption method for all GEM ports of off on ONT ONUADDR OLT slot GPON port ONU ID modify gemport all of ont ONUADDR security mode off on no encryption encryption off on modify gemport all of ont security mode ONUADDR off on gemport eth voip e1ds1ll xdsl GEMPORTS lt 1 8 gt Bridge Configures encryption for specified GEM ports of ONT modify security mode off on modify gemport security mode eth voip eidstll xdsl GEMPORTS lt 1 8 gt off on modify gemport eth voip e1ds1ll
333. r WORD name of an existing peer group i When this parameters are used the command applies on all peers in the spec ified group Command Mode Function neighbor A B C D interface WORD Router Configures the interface name of a BGP speaking neighbor A B C D Neighbor IPv4 address WORD Interface name Use the no parameter with this command to disable this function neighbor A B C D WORD port lt 0 65535 gt Router Specifies the BGP port of a neighbor 0 65535 TCP port number Use the no parameter with this command to disable this function neighbor A B C D WORD activate Router After the TCP connection is opened with the neighbor this command enables the exchange of the specified AF routes with a neighboring router Use the no parameter with this command to disable exchange of information with a neighbor neighbor A B C D WORD timers lt 0 65535 gt lt 0 65535 gt Router Sets the timers for a specific BGP neighbor 0 65535 holdtime in seconds at which a router sends kee palive messages to its neighbor The default is 60 seconds 0 65535 interval in seconds after which on not receiving a keepalive message the router declares a neighbor dead The default is 180 seconds neighbor A B C D WORD shutdown Router Administratively shut down this neighbor Terminates any active session for a specified neighbor and clears all related routing information In case a peer group is spec
334. r 2 1 set counter name 4 test with spaces SWITCH config show payload counter config names PAYLOAD COUNTER NAMES 1 nmn 2 nsn 2 3 nsn 3 4 name with spaces 5 nmn 63 nsn63 64 nn 10 11 1 3 Assigning the User Ports to Counter Group 98 Use the following set of commands in order to modify the configuration so that counter groups are assigned to unicast traffic flows on the path between IU GPON port and UNI port Each of up to 64 counter groups consist of 8 counters for downstream respectively upstream One counter group may be assigned to one or more UNI ports The number of bytes through the addressed ports is counted in the dedicated group d 0900d80580257cd9 Operation Manual CLI Ports Note the following remarks for the usage of set and clear commands The sequence of entering the commands decides about the operative configu ration This means that the last executed command overwrites settings of the previous one e g uc command after onu command and vice versa Hence in this case there is no necessity to enter a clear command between e All configuration changes caused by these commands are only temporary as long as the activate command is not executed e VLANFLAG has to be considered only if the OLT runs in enhanced MAC mode for VLAN operation see 13 1 Setting the GPON MAC Mode e OLTADDRESS must be the same IU GPON port that was specified in ADDRESS of config load command The clear commands c
335. r config vlan COUNTER VLAN TABLE Ui WNP Clears the assignment of counter to VLANs 100 300 400 600 800 1000 SWITCH config modify payload counter 2 1 clear vlan 7 SWITCH config show payload counter config vlan PAYLOAI D COUNTER VLAN TABLE counter G Id 0900d80580257cd9 101 Ports Operation Manual CLI 5 800 6 none 7 none 8 none 10 11 1 6 Activating the Configuration with Payload Counters When all required set and clear commands were entered there is the necessity to activate the new configuration for following reasons e norder that the modified configuration can be restored after the active CXU or the IU GPON have been rebooted it must be stored back into CXU s persistent memory Otherwise all made changes will be lost e Without activation the counter settings will be overwritten when a new temporary configuration for another GPON link or same as before is loaded from background e If the config load command is executed the next time then the new configuration will be loaded Use the following command to activate the new configuration fi On active IU GPON the counting starts immediately from zero modify payload counter ADDRESS config activate Command Mode Config Function Activates the new configuration The CXU sets the new configura tion on IU GPON ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port 102 Example SWITCH c
336. r cos 0 7 any Rule Classifies a rule matches the inner tag IEEE 801 1p priority 0 7 enter a 1priority value any revoke the 1priority classifier match tos 0 255 any match ip prec 0 7 any match mac XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX M any XX XX XX XX XX XX I XX XX XX XX XX XX M I any Rule Rule Rule Matches a rule 0 255 enter TOS value any revoke the TOS classifier Matches a rule IP TOS precedence 0 7 enter IP TOS precedence value any revoke the IP TOS classifier Matches layer2 address source destination MAC address source destination MAC address with mask any revoke the destination MAC address classifier match ethtype 7YPE NUM arp ip ppp disc ppp sess any Rule Matches the Ethernet type TYPE NUM Ethernet type field hex e g 0800 for IPv4 arp address resolution protocol ip IP protocol ppp disc PPPoE discovery ppp sess PPPoE session any revoke the Ethernet classifier match flow upstream downstream bidirectional default any Rule Matches the packet flow direction upstream only upstream packets downstream only downstream packets bidirectional upstream and downstream packets default set all IU slots to default upstream any revoke packet flow direction classifier match ip A B C D A B C D M any A B C D I A B C D M I any match ip A B C D I A B C D M any
337. r the profile name Id 0900d80580256ef1 115 XDSL Operation Manual CLI Command Mode Function show xdsl line config info Privieged Shows all line config profiles and their assigned ports Global show xdsl line config info PROFILE Bridge Shows one line config profile and its assigned ports PROFILE enter the profile name 11 2 Channel Profile The channel profile provides all settings of data rates interleaving delay performance monitoring and error handling In order to remove errors the hiX 5750 R2 0 provides impulse noise protection INP values up to 16 11 2 1 Creating Deleting a Profile i If the channel profile for channel 2 should be deleted the VCC TP assignment has to be checked and corrected In case of ADSL mode all available VCC TP s has to be moved to channel 1 In case of VDSL2 mode the VCC TP which was assigned to channel 2 has to be deleted first Command Mode Function xdsl add chan config profile PROFILE Bridge Creates a channel profile PROFILE enter the profile name xdsl delete chan config profile PROFILE Deletes the specified channel profile xdsl duplicate chan config profile SOURCE PROFILE Bridge Copies a channel profile NEW PROFILE SOURCE PROFILE name origin channel profile NEW PROFILE name new channel profile 11 2 2 Configuration i The port has to be in locked state before parameters can be modified Command xdsl cha
338. raffic rate entering the MAC bridge policing towards the ANI downstream i Traffic Descriptor Profiles can be only created or deleted but they cannot be modi fied Id 0900d8058025fb9e Operation Manual CLI Bridges Command Mode Function bridgeport traffic desc profile create sust rate peak rate Bridge Creates a bridgeport traffic descriptor profile that specifies a sustained data rate and a peak data rate Rate ranges 0 150 000 KBytes sec sust rate sustained data rate peak rate peak data rate bridgeport traffic desc profile delete profile index Deletes a bridgeport traffic descriptor profile with index profile index specifies the profile bridgeport traffic desc profile create 0 150000 Bridge Creates a traffic descriptor profile 0 150000 NAME 1 64 index of bridgeport traffic desc profile table bridgeport traffic desc profile 1 64 create 0 150000 0 150000 NAME 0 150000 SIR Sustained Information Rate in kByte s 0 150000 PIR Peak Information Rate in kByte s NAME traffic descriptor name bridgeport traffic desc profile delete lt 1 64 gt Deletes specified traffic descriptor profile 1 64 index of bridgeport traffic desc profile table Use the following command to check the traffic descriptor profile table Command show bridgeport traffic desc profile table Mode Function Bridge Shows the table with
339. re PORT ADDRESS xdsl notch config info Privileged Shows LRE port xDSL notch config information Config PORT ADDRESS enter slot port ONU ID ONT slot Bridge show Ire PORTS xdsl psd config info Privileged Shows LRE port xDSL PSD profile information Config PORTS enter slot port ONU ID ONT slot Bridge show Ire PORT ADDRESS xdsl alarm config info Privi Shows the xDSL relation between ports and assigned leged alarm profiles Config PORT ADDRESS enter slot port ONU ID ONT slot Bri show Ire PORT ADDRESS xdsl alarm table ridge Shows xDSL alarm status information PORT ADDRESS enter slot port ONU ID ONT slot show Ire PORT ADDRESS xdsl atm vcctp info Privileged Shows VCC TP information Global PORT ADDRESS enter slot port ONU ID ONT slot Bridge show Ire PORT ADDRESS xdsl atm vcctp overview d Shows VCC TP information PORT ADDRESS enter slot port ONU ID ONT slot show Ire PORTS xdsl phys table detail xtuc xtur Privileged Shows detailed information of xDSL physical status Global PORTS enter slot port ONU ID ONT slot Bridge xtuc VDSL LIU vtuC show Ire PORTS xdsl phys table linerates show Ire PORTS xdsl phys table alarm xtur VDSL modem vtuR Shows xDSL physical status only linerates up down stream PORTS enter slot port ONU ID ONT slot Shows xDSL physical status alarm failure state PORTS enter slot port ONU ID ONT slot 11 7 Verifying of the XDSL Databases Use the following comma
340. recorder tone 3 fast busy 4 voice announcement 255 not applicable on off echo cancellation indication 0 999 PSTN protocol variant controls which variant of POTS signaling must be used on the associated UNIs ISO 3166 country code e g 124 Canada 156 China 276 Germany 414 Kuwait 840 USA LINE descriptive profile name size max 20 the whole line until CR will be pressed spaces included Modifies media profile table entry Modifies media profile name Modifies media profile PSTN protocol variant Valid after reboot or lock unlock of ONT Deletes media profile table 128 1d 0900d8058023f697 Operation Manual CLI Voice over IP 12 1 3 Checking the Media and RTP Profiles To show media and RTP profiles use the following commands Command Mode Function show voip voip media profile table Exec Shows the whole media profile table Config show voip rtp profile data table Exec Shows the whole RTP profile data table Config 12 2 VolP IP Host The following two configuration data tables contain the information about services based on TCP and UDP that are offered from the IP hosts The entries of these tables are unconditionally required for such ONTs which provide TCP UDP IP services Additional the IP host configuration allows further features to support through the ONTs There is usually one entry per ONT card i e only one source TCP UDP port
341. res any IGMPv2 leave messages for this group that it receives on this interface Configuring of RFC Profiles Use the following commands to configure IGMP profiles Id 0900d80580214302 185 IGMP Operation Manual CLI Command Mode Function igmp rfc profile lt 1 30 gt NAME Config Creates an IGMP RFC related profile inactive vlan switching snooping acl 1 30 profile index max 16 lt 1 255 gt default lt 1 65535 gt default NAME profile name 1 255 default normal fast lt 1 4093 gt lt 0 7 gt Switching modes keep replace lt 1 4093 gt 0 7 inactive Disabled forwarding IGMP MC traffic vlan switching MC traffic will be forwarded over all ports of the VLAN snooping supports MAC based IGMP snooping functionality Only subscriber ports which have joined at the MC group will be inscribed on the forwarding table of the MC VLAN Ports that leave the group will be deleted from the table acl snooping with ACL The ACL contains the allocations of the customer subscriber ports to their allowable MC groups Selecting this feature the ONU will be filtered the MC packages according to the determination of the ACL 1 255 robustness default 2 1 65535 set query interval in seconds default 125 1 255 set query response interval 0 1 seconds default 100 Leave modes normal when IGMP snooping sees a Leave message it waits for a membership query message befor
342. rized routers from forming adjacencies or injecting TL Vs Table length value The authentication can only be activeted globally but can be configured independently for L1 and L2 Hello PDUs Protocol Data Unit By default no password is used On point to point interfaces for both L1 and L2 the same password must be config ured Id 0900d80580212815 219 IP Routing Operation Manual CLI Command Mode Function isis password WORD level 1 level 2 Interface Configures the authentication password for interface WORD plain text password excluding spaces level 1 Specify password for level 1 PDUs Intra area level 2 Specify password for level 2 PDUs Domain Use the no parameter to clear the password 21 4 4 Redistribution of Reachability Information e Redistribution of Information from other Routing Protocols e Redistribution of Information between the Levels Redistribution of Information from other Routing Protocols Command Mode Function redistribute kernel connected static rip ospf bgp Router Redistributes reachability information from other routing protocols metric lt 0 4261412864 gt metric type kernel kernel routes internal external level 1 level 1 2 level 2 connected connected routes static static routes rip RIP routes redistribute kernel connected static rip ospf bgp redistribute kernel connected static rip ospf bgp o
343. route The default route is the last route gateway of last resort tried by the router when all other routes fail To configure the default route use the following command in Configuration mode Id 0900d80580212815 195 IP Routing Operation Manual CLI Command Mode Function ip route default A B C D INTERFACE 1 255 Config Configures a default gateway A B C D gateway IP address INTERFACE interface 1 255 administrative distance Use the no parameter with this command to delete the default route from the routing table Use one of the following commands to display the static routes Command Mode Function show ip route A B C D A B C D M summary Privileged Displays the specified routing information Config S T show ip route database bgp connected isis kernel ospf Displays the configured routing information within the IP rip static routing table database Example of viewing static routes SWITCH config show ip route database Codes K Kernel C connected S static R RIP B O BGP OSPF IA OSPF inter area N1 OSPF NSSA external type 1 N2 OSPF NSSA external type 2 OSPF external type 1 E2 OSPF external type 2 1 IS LS L1 IS IS level L2 IS IS level 2 ia IS IS inter area gt selected route FIB route
344. rver as well In order to copy or erase a system configuration file use the following commands Command Mode Description copy running config F LENAME startup config Privileged Copies a running configuration file Config FILENAME configuration file name startup config startup configuration file copy startup config FILENAME Privileged Copies a startup configuration file copy FILENAME startup config Config Copies a specified configuration file to the startup configuration file copy FILENAME1 FILENAME2 Copies a specified configuration file to another configuration file erase FILENAME Config Deletes a specified configuration file Use the following command to display system configuration file Command Mode Description show config list Privileged Displays a list of saved configuration files Config 4 1 2 Auto Backup the Configuration Auto backup ensures that made configuration changes are valid after system reboot also if they were not stored explicitly by operator command This function allows to store configuration data automatically to the CXU s background memory or and to remote FTP server The waiting time before storing the data after last change of configuration can be specified 40 1d 0900d8058023 449 Operation Manual CLI System Basic Configuration Configuring Local Auto Backup Command Mode Function auto backup local enable
345. s ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port ONT ID port number POTS port number 1 max 144 1d 0900d8058023f697 Operation Manual CLI Voice over IP 12 8 3 SIP User Data Table Configuring the SIP User Data Table The table contains the user specific configuration attributes associated with a specific VoIP CTP Table entries are created and deleted by the NE An entry exists for each POTS UNI port using SIP protocol for a VoIP service offering Table index is the inter face index of the POTS PPTP All SIP user data entries related to one ONT must refer the same VoIP SIP agent configuration data table entry see 12 8 2 SIP Agent To modify SIP user data parameters use the following commands Command modify voip sip user data table F NDEX PTR PWD TME A PTR FC PTR REL TMR ROH TMR modify voip sip user data table addr ADDRESS PTR PWD TME A PTR FC PTR RL RMR ROH TMR modify voip sip user data table user part aor INDEX LINE LINE modify voip sip user data table display name NDEX LINE modify voip sip user data table addr user part aor ADDRESS modify voip sip user data table addr display name ADDRESS LINE modify voip sip user data table voice mail server sip uri INDEX LINE modify voip sip user data table addr voice mail server sip uri ADDRESS LINE modify voip sip user data table user name NDEX LINE modify voip sip user data table addr user name ADDRESS LINE
346. s DHCP status packet sent received statistics 18 8 182 Configuring of ARP Flooding ARP Address Resolution Protocol is used to associate IP addresses with MAC addresses Once determined the IP address MAC association is stored in an ARP table for rapid retrieval For handling ARP requests which are L2 broadcasts from the network side there is an ARP relay agent in the hiX 5750 R2 0 In switched VLANs the ARP relay agent responds to ARP requests from GPON clients as well as subtended clients and handles ARP requests from the DHCP relay agent to learn IP addresses of DHCP gateways or DHCP servers In downstream direction the NE should not flood broadcast ARP requests towards the subscriber ports since the MAC to IP mapping is known Use the following command to enable disable ARP flooding Id 0900d8058025c93a Operation Manual CLI DHCP and PPPoE Command Mode Function ip arp reply flood Config Enables flooding of ARP requests Use the no parameter with this command to disable flooding To check information about ARP state use the following command Command Mode Function show ip arp reply flood Exec Shows ARP replies flooding state Config 18 9 Showing Entries of DHCP ARP Table Use the following commands to display the entries of ARP DHCP table Command Mode Function show ip dhcp learned table Config Shows learned entries of DHCP table show arp reply learned ta
347. s Level 1 and Level 2 and the rest are Level 1 Command Mode Function is type level 1 level 1 2 level 2 only Router Sets IS to specified level for the routing process level 1 Act as a area router only level 1 2 Act as both a area router and an domain router level 2 only Act as an domain router only Dynamic Hostname Exchange The following commands configures the Dynamic Hostname Exchange Mechanism RFC2763 and System ID to hostname translation i Using this command to enable Dynamic Hostname Exchange Mechanism and System ID to hostname translation is performed for the result of show isis database and some other CLI commands Command Mode Function dynamic hostname area tag hostname dynamic Router Enables the dynamic hostname exchange mechanism RFC2763 and System ID to hostname translation area tag Routing process tag The no parameter disables the mechanism LSP Parameter Command Mode Function Isp gen interval level 1 level 2 1 120 Router Isp gen interval 1 120 Isp refresh interval lt 1 65535 gt Router Sets minimum interval before regenerating the same LSP level 1 sets interval for Level 1 IS level 2 sets interval for Level 2 IS 1 120 LSP generation interval in seconds The smaller the interval the faster the convergence but it might cause more frequent flooding Use the no parameter with thi
348. s command to set the interval to the default 10 s Sets the LSP refresh interval 1 65535 LSP refresh interval in seconds Use the no parameter to set the interval to the default value of 900 seconds max Isp lifetime lt 1 65535 gt Router Sets the maximum LSP lifetime 1 65535 max LSP lifetime in sec The no paramater sets the default value 1200 Sec for the LSP lifetime ignore Isp errors Router Uses to ignore LSPs checksum error By default LSP checksum is checked on receipt The no parameter to turn off this function 216 Id 0900d80580212815 Operation Manual CLI IP Routing Command Mode Function set overload bit suppress external interlevel external interlevel interlevel external on startup lt 5 86400 gt Sets the overload bit in self LSPs Suppress The router suppresses the redistribution of specified types of reachability information during overload Router state suppress external suppress to redistribute external reach ability suppress interlevel suppress to redistribute interlevel reach ability on startup The router sets overload bit at startup only then clears the bit after specified interval has elapsed 5 86400 interval in seconds after which the overload state is exited The no parameter clears the overload bit from self LSPs Normally the set overload bit command is allowed only when a router run
349. s in bps 0 1099560000 fixed bandwidth allocated for all TDM inter faces of this ONU 0 1099560000 fixed bandwidth allocated for all POTS VoIP interfaces of this ONU 0 1099560000 assured bandwidth allocated for all high priority realtime data interfaces of this ONU 0 1099560000 assured bandwidth allocated for all high priority priority non realtime data interfaces of this ONU 0 1099560000 maximum bandwidth allocated for all high priority non realtime data interfaces of this ONU 0 1099560000 maximum bandwidth allocated for all best effort data interfaces of this ONU LINE user data max 80 characters Example SWITCH enable SWITCH configure terminal SWITCH config create onu g25e 001 3 1 0 configured 4349474707074602 nopassword 3 off 0 45000 45000 45000 45000 45000 28000000 YourString ONU 3 1 0 created successful Id 0900d80580257da 6 67 ONU Equipment Operation Manual CLI 9 3 Modifying ONU Parameter Command Mode Function PASSWD modify onu configuremode ADDRESS SERIAL NUMBER Config Sets the configure mode for the ONU ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port ONU ID SERIAL NUMBER sets the new serial number of the ONU 8 signs if all is ASCII 12 signs if the first 4 are ASCII and the remaining are HEX 16 signs if all is HEX PASSWD optional sets the new password or registration ID as hexadecimal max 20 signs for 10 bytes modify onu discovermode A
350. s into problems Summary Address The summary address command aggregate addresses that are represented in the routing table One summary address can include multiple groups of addresses for a given level Routes learned from other routing protocols also can be summarized Command Mode summary address A B C D M level 1 level 1 2 Config level 2 Router Function Configures summary address to summarize IPv4 reachability information A B C D M specifies the IP address prefix and length of this IP network level 1 Summarize reachability information only for Level 1 level 1 2 Summarize reachability information for both Level 1 and Level 2 level 2 Summarize reachability information only for Level 2 Summary address is applied to Level 2 IS if level parameter is omitted The no parameter with this command is unconfigured the summary Domain Password fi Configuring the domain password to enable authentication when receiving and sending LSP and Sequence Number PDU in Level 2 domain Domain password must be the same in Level 2 domain Command Mode domain password WORD Router Function Sets the authentication password for Level 2 domain WORD routing domain password string excluding spaces 21 4 3 Configuring of Interface Parameters Interface parameters must be consistent across all routers in an attached network Therefore be sure that if you do configure any of these parameters
351. s only in double tagging mode Nevertheless it is possible and allowed to create and apply all rule types in both tagging modes The hiX 5750 R2 0 system internally activates only rules that are fit for the tagging mode running currently Use the show rule profile command to display the configuration 25 1 Creating a Rule From the Rule configuration mode use the following command to create a rule Command Mode Function rule NAME create Config Begins Rule Configuration mode NAME enter an unique rule name After entering the rule create command the prompt changes from SWITCH config to SWITCH config rule name t 240 25 2 Setting of the Rule Type In general the rule type classifies the rule and determines allowed rule matches rule actions and required action parameters Command Mode Function type cxu generic cxu admin iugpon generic Rule Configures rule of a certain rule type iugpon admin iuuplink generic iuuplink admin cxu generic sets generic rule for CXU rule 50 GenericRule cxu admin sets admin access rule for CXU rule 51 AdminRule iugpon generic sets generic rule for IU GPON iuuplink generic sets generic rule for IU UPLINK iuuplink admin sets admin access rule for IU UPLINK 25 3 Setting of the Tagging Mode Only for IU GPON card set this parameter to specify if the rule expects double or single tags Id 0900d80580204604 Operation Manual CLI
352. s the CLI via Telnet connection the management IP interface mgnt must be configured see 15 Interface Configuration Up to eight client systems can be connected at the same time Use the following command to establish a Telnet connection between NE and remote place Command Function telnet DESTINATION tcp port Connects to the system with specified IP address DESTINATION IP address Id 0900d8058025feb5 Operation Manual CLI System Access After applying a command in order to save the configuration over Telnet connection wait for the OK message When the Telnet session is disconnected before all new settings will be deleted 3 5 Modifying the Password of Privileged Exec Mode Use the following commands to configure a password that enhances the security of the Privileged exec mode Command Mode Function passwd enable 8 LINE Config no passwd enable Modifies enabled password parameters 8 specifies a HIDDEN password will follow LINE HIDDEN enable password string Clears the password When it is not encrypted the set password could be displayed with the show running config command To avoid this use the following command Command Mode Function service password encryption no service password encryption Config Encrypts system passwords Disables password encryption Example of configuring the password
353. s the user frame is already tagged with a VLAN ID per service The inner c tag contains the UNI information and the outer s tag contains the service information Therefore the GPON MAC provides two translation tables The first one is used for the translation of the c tag 152 Id 0900d8058023fad7 Operation Manual CLI MAC information into the related s tag information at the NNI The second one is needed to translate the ID part of GEM port which is related to the UNI port into the inner s tag VID at the NNI side Therefore the configuration of 1 1 cross connect CC mode is divided into the two con figuration tasks per GPON port per subscriber port The following commands must be used always in conjunction to configure the enhanced MAC mode 2 Command Mode Function enhanced mode 1to1 CCAddOuterPerC tag VLANID PONPORT OUTERVID PRIOPROFILE Bridge Adds or modifies an entry in the VLAN mapping table MAC mode 2 1 1 cross connect by adding outer tag service tag per c tag VLANID port VID PONPORT slot port OUTERVID service VID PRIOPROFILE index of priority mapping profile enhanced mode 1to1 CCChangelnnerPerPort VLANID all SUBSCRPORT INNERVID COSPROFILE Bridge Adds or modifies an entry in the VLAN mapping table all all VLANs VLANID port VID SUBSCRPORT slot port ONU ID ONU slot ONU port INNERVID inner VLAN ID COSPROFILE CoS profile index 1 64 1
354. ser An added user with read only right can only check for system information but cannot configure the system Command Mode Function user add NAME DESCRIPTION Config Adds a user with read only right NAME user name DESCRIPTION description of the user e g admin Example of adding the user GPON The password is set to siemens7 by default SWITCH config user add GPON admin Changing password for GPON Enter the new password minimum of 5 maximum of 8 characters Please use a combination of upper and lower case letters and numbers Enter new password Re enter new password Password changed successfully SWITCH config fi The entered password is not displayed so be careful to make no mistake Example User GPON logs in SWITCH login GPON Password siemens7 SWITCH gt 36 Id 0900d8058025feb5 Operation Manual CLI System Access Enter a question mark in order to display the executable user commands SWITCH Exec commands debug Debug command clear Reset functions debug Debugging functions see also undebug enable Turn on privileged mode command exit End current mode and down to previous mode help Description of the interactive help system no Negate a command or set its defaults show Show running system information terminal Set terminal line parameters SWITCH gt Configuring a User Password To configure a passwor
355. server Configures the account to access the FTP server USER user name of the FTP account PASSWORD password of the FTP account Configures the time between two backups 1 48 time hours Configures the time of day when the first backup is written 0 1439 time of day minutes Configuration data will be stored on FTP server only if the data in the persistent memory has been changed before Initiating an Auto Backup Command Mode Function auto backup now Config Forces an auto backup immediately Verifying the Auto Backup Configuration Command Mode Function show auto backup ftp file table Config show auto backup Shows informantion about backup files located on FTP server Shows informantion about auto backup configuration Id 0900d8058023f449 41 System Basic Configuration Operation Manual CLI Example Auto backup that stores configuration data of the NE GPON 1 local as well as remote on FTP server 1 Configuration of local auto backup GPON_1 config auto backup loc GPON_1 config auto backup wai al enable ting time 24 2 Configuration of remote auto backup GPON_1 config auto backup ftp config auto backup ftp config auto backup ftp config auto backup now GPON_1 GPON_1 GPON_1 Jun 13 2 51 43 Jun 13 2 51 43 Jun 13 2 51 43 Jun 13 2 51 43 Jun 13 2
356. slot GPON port ONU ID show table onu physical shelf ADDRESS Config Displays SNMP table for a specified ONU ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port ONU ID 74 d 0900d80580257da6 Operation Manual CLI ONU Equipment Command Mode Function show table onu physical card ADDRESS Config Displays SNMP table for a specified ONU ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port ONU ID ONU slot show onu loads ADDRESS Config Shows load versions of MDU cards and ONUs ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port ONU ID ONU slot show onu description ADDRESS LINE Config Displays ONU IDs with the specified user data ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port ONU ID LINE The full matching user data show onu first entry Config Displays the first ONU table entry show linecard table ADDRESS Config Displays the specified linecard entries ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port ONU ID ONU slot show linecard first entry Exec Displays first entry of linecard table Config Bridge show linecard config state Exec Shows the specified linecard entries The linecard table with the not configured running failed finished ADDRESS Config specified configuration state not configured show the not configured cards running show the cards where configuration is running failed show the cards where configuration has failed finished show the cards where configuration has finished ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port ONU ID show port onu ONUS Exec Displays t
357. source destination IP address source destination IP address with mask any source destination IP address tcp TCP udp UDP any revoke the destination IP address classifier Configures the IP protocol source destination IP address source destination IP address with mask any source destination IP address tcp TCP udp UDP 0 65535 TCP UDP source destination port number any revoke the destination port classifier match ip A B C D I A B C D M any A B C D I A B C D M any igmp I pim 0 255 any Rule Configures the IP protocol source destination IP address source destination IP address with mask any source destination IP address igmp IGMP pim PIM 0 255 IP protocol number any revoke the IP protocol classifier 25 5 2 Actions Configure the policy to adjust how to modify properties of transmitted packets Use the no parameter with the command to delete the specified action Configuring of Match Actions Command Mode Function action deny Rule Rule action deny access no action deny action allow permit Rule Rule action permit access no action allow permit action redirect UPORT cpu Rule Redirects to specified egress port PORT port number e g 1 1 no action redirect cpu CXU port action mirror Rule Sends a copy to mirror monitoring port no action mirror action dscp DSCP Rule Changes DiffServ field no action dscp
358. spf OSPF routes metric lt 0 4261412864 gt metric type bgp BGP routes internal external level 1 level 1 2 level 2 0 4261412864 metric value internal internal metric external external metric level 1 redistribute routes into level 1 level 1 2 redistribute routes into level 1 and level 2 level 2 redistribute routes into level 2 If metric is not specified metric 0 If metric type is not specified internal metric type is used If level is not specified routes are redistributed into level 2 Use the no parameter with this command to stop redistribution Redistribution of Information between the Levels The following commands redistributes reachability information from one level to the other level If this commands are not used IS IS redistributes selected L1 routes into L2 Command Mode Function redistribute isis level 1 into level 2 distribute list WORD Router Redistributes reachability information from one level to the other level If an access list name is given with this command for an access list that does not exist the routes are still redistributed Select routes Inter area routes from level 1 Inter area routes into level 2 WORD access list name Use the no parameter with this command to stop redistribution redistribute isis level 2 into level 1 distribute list WORD 21 4 5 Checking the Configuration In order to check the current c
359. splays rules of certain type cxu generic generic rules for CXU rule 50 cxu admin admin access rules for CXU rule 51 iugpon generic generic rules for IU GPON iugpon admin admin access rules for IU GPON show help Rule Displays help information of current rule context show rule profile Rule Displays the profile currently being edited An example for using the show rule command SWITCH config show rule RULE TYPE 04 246 QosVlan vlan cos Id 0900d80580204604 Operation Manual CLI Rules Prio 2 Name Testrule1 Match exact vlan 100 Action Change inner SWITCH config 25 8 Deleting a Rule To cancel an existing rule and remove it from the system use one of the following lp PRIO set iprio cos 4 commands Command Mode Function no rule NAME Config Deletes all or specified rule NAME enter the rule name no rule type cxu generic cxu admin Config Deletes all rules of a certain type iugpon generic iugpon admin cxu generic generic rules for CXU rule 50 GenericRule cxu admin admin access rules for CXU rule 51 AdminRule iugpon generic generic rules for IU GPON iugpon admin admin access rules for IU GPON An example for deleting a rule SWITCH config no rule 1 rule s successfully deleted SWITCH config show rule No rules configured SWITCH config Id 0900d80580204
360. st 1 1024 lt 1 1024 gt Shows GPON encapsulation method port pm object list list PM objects 1 1024 start index for searching shows all if left blank 1 1024 end index for searching shows only the first if left blank show gal eth pm data lt 1 1024 gt Config Shows GPON adaption layer Ethernet Bridge pm data shows PM data for gal eth gemport 1 1024 PM object index show gal eth pm object list lt 1 1024 gt 1 1024 Shows GPON adaption layer Ethernet pm object list list PM objects 1 1024 start index for searching shows all if left blank 1 1024 end index for searching shows only the first if left blank show ponpptp pm data lt 1 1024 gt Config Show PM data for PON PPTP 1 1024 PM object index show ponpptp pm object list Config Show all PON PPTP PM objects show onu pm records lt 1 1024 gt Config Displays the ONU PM record table 1 1024 PM object index 10 11 Payload Counters Payload counters allow the operator to have a differentiated view on the current status of Ethernet traffic on the optical link between IU GPON and ONU in upstream and downstream direction Several counters can be set in the configuration that count the number of payload bytes of a specific traffic flow up to a total of 264 10 11 1 Configuring of Payload Counter In order to prepare payload counters in the configuration the following steps are required 1 Loa
361. st 2 4094 VLAN tag CIRCUITID tag depending string no ip dhcp circuitid2 BRIDGEPORTINDEX all Deletes VLAN depending circuit ID part lt 2 4094 gt ip dhcp circuitid2 token STARTTOKEN TK1 default Config Modifies token for VLAN depending circuit ID part TK21 default STARTTOKEN token start identifier e g TK1 token1 for VLAN replacement e g V default default Token1 for VLAN replacement TK2 token2 for VLAN service replacement e g R default default Token2 for VALNreplacement 18 4 5 Configuring the DHCP Packet Policy The operator can configure how to process packets with DHCP option 82 coming to DHCP server or DHCP relay agent Use the following command to configure the policy for option 82 option 105 packets Command Mode Function ip dhcp option82 policy replace keep drop Config Configures the policy of option82 packets replace relay agent replaces the existing address with option82 information of relay or server keep relay agent transmits packets without changing the received option82 information default drop relay agent drops the option82 packe 18 5 Configuring Subnet Default Gateway A default gateway allows the DHCP server to communicate with unspecified IP addresses Command Mode Function gateway A B C D DHCP Configures DHCP provider s gateway IP A B C D IP address of gateway 18 6 Verifying the D
362. t DLF storm control is enabled and MC storm control is disabled 248 Id 0900d80580201c9b Operation Manual CLI IRL Input Rate Limitation 27 IRL Input Rate Limitation Input rate limiting IRL can be used to control the amount of incoming traffic at the subscriber s side Many subscribers may share the same resources of the system and the network IRL provides mechanisms to manage maximum and committed values of bandwidth kbit sec and burst size bytes IRL bases on profiles which are a kind of traffic policy Each IRL profile determines a set of four values The profile name must be unique Value Unit range cir committed information rate kbps 0 16000 pir peak information rate kbps 0 16000 cbs committed burst size bytes 96 10000 pbs peak burst size bytes 96 15000 Table 26 IRL Values A profile can be used to map one or more subscriber ports to it in order to activate IRL for these ports Such ports can reside on the same or on different interface units IUs One profile can be referenced by any number of ports at the same time Created Profiles Profile D01 cir cbs pir pbs Profile 002 cir chs pir pbs Profile_O0 3 cir cbs pir pbs Profile_004 cir cbs pir pbs up to 200 profiles in total Loaded Profiles ifmap Ports IU 1 1 1 4 Profile 001 2 Profile 003 4 5 up to 10 profiles
363. ta in RMON history Command Mode Function requested buckets lt 1 65535 gt RMON Defines the bucket count for the interval enter the number of buckets 30 5 fi The max number of granted buckets is 100 Example of configuring the number of sample data as 25 in history SWITCH config rmonhistory 5 requested buckets 25 SWITCH config rmonhistory 5 Configuring Interval of Sample Inquiry Command Mode Function interval lt 1 3600 gt 264 RMON Defines the time interval for the history in seconds enter the value fi The interval will be rounded up to a multiple of 30 seconds Example of configuring the interval of sample inquiry as 60 seconds SWITCH config rmonhistory 5 interval 60 SWITCH config rmonhistory 5 Id 0900d8058024f4b8 Operation Manual CLI Remote Monitoring 30 6 Activating the RMON History Finishing all configuration steps above the RMON history must be activeded using the following command Command Mode Function active RMON Activates RMON history Before activating RMON history check if the configuration is correct The configu ration of an activated RMON history cannot be changed If the configuration needs to be changed delete the RMON history and configure it again 30 7 Displaying RMON History Command Mode Function show rmon history config
364. ted to LAN though received BDPU and transmit packets Since it takes certain time to receive BDPU and find the location before transmitting packet switches send packet at regular interval named forward delay The configuration for BPDU is applied as selected in force version The same commands are used for STP RSTP and MSTP 22 5 1 Hello Time Hello time decides an interval time when a switch transmits BPDU To configure hello time use the following command Command Mode Function stp mst hello time lt 1 10 gt Bridge Configures hello time to transmit the message in STP RSTP MSTP 1 10 set the hello time default 2 seconds no stp mst hello time Clears the time configuration that is set up to transmit route message 22 5 2 Forward Delay It is possible to configure forward delay which means time to take port status from lis tening to forwarding To configure forward delay use the following command Command Mode Function stp mst forward delay lt 4 30 gt Bridge Designates Forward delay in STP RSTP or MSTP 4 30 delay time value The default is 15 seconds no stp mst forward delay Clears the configured forward delay d 0900d80580203028 229 Spanning Tree Operation Manual CLI 22 5 3 Max Age Max age shows how long path message is valid To configure max age to delete useless messages use the following command Command Mode F
365. teps from 60 6 dB to 120 12 dB 0 5 maintenance mode O off 1 test tone 2 normal polar ity 3 reversed polarity 4 send metering pulses 5 send ringing pulses 0 2 metering signal type O on 1 silent reversal only 2 frequency only 0 1 feeding 0O ordinary phone 1 pay phone pots getstateinfo PORTS Config POTS port state information PORTS OLT slot GPON port ONU ID ONU slot ONU port 88 d 0900d80580257cd9 Operation Manual CLI Ports Command Mode Function show port pots PORTS table Privi Displays POTS port configuration leged PORTS OLT slot GPON port ONU ID ONU slot ONU port Config Bridge 10 7 CATV Port Configuration For detailed information refer to the current release notes Command Mode Function modify catv ani adminstate ADDRESS lock unlock Config Sets admin state of CATV port ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port ONU ID ONU slot ONU port modify catv ani config ADDRESS off on 0 255 lt 0 5 gt none broadband optical 0 255 AGCSETTINGS Config Configures the ANI of CATV interface ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port ONU ID ONU slot ONU port off alarm reporting allowed immediately on alarm reporting inhibited 0 255 length of time in minutes An interval value of 255 has the special meaning of infinity 0 5 indicates the frequency of the pilot channel receiver The unit is Hz If SignalC
366. ters for CXU IUs and ONUS Command Mode Function igmp cxu query parameter Config Sets query parameters at CXU 1 255 recent default 1 65535 recent default 1 255 Robustness value 1 255 recent default recent does not change robustness default 2 1 65535 Query interval value in seconds recent does not change query interval default 125 1 255 Response interval 0 1 sec recent does not change response interval default 100 igmp iu gpon SLOT query parameter Config Sets the query parameters at IUGPON lt 1 255 gt recent default lt 1 65535 gt recent default SLOT IU slot number lt 1 255 gt recent default igmp iu SLOT query parameter Sets the query parameters at IU card lt 1 255 gt recent default lt 1 65535 gt recent default SLOT IU slot number lt 1 255 gt recent default igmp onu D query parameter Config Sets the query parameters on ONU side lt 1 255 gt recent default lt 1 65535 gt recent default ID ONU slot link id slot lt 1 255 gt recent default 19 7 IGMP Subscriber Port Assigning of Multicast VLAN and Package To assign a subscriber port to MC VLAN and package use the following command 190 Id 0900d80580214302 Operation Manual CLI IGMP Command Mode Function igmp subscriber 1 16 1 72 1 8 BRIDGEP
367. that configura tion steps referring to logical ports must be performed using the default CXU slot 9 In case of the 10 GE port the LAG on the OLT contains only one line The required cabling diagram using 1 GE line redundancy is shown in Figure 3 CXU A is the active one in this case Aggregation Switch Combiner Front Access Cables 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 CXU A CXU B CXU amp Line Redundancy Line Cross Connect Figure 3 CXU and 1 GE Redundancy Example 1d 0900d8058024353a 65 ONU Equipment Operation Manual CLI ONU Equipment In order to configure the ONU equipment use the commands described in the following sections Creating an ONU Modifying ONU Parameter Deleting an ONU Checking the List of Alarms Checking the Configuration fi For further information about how to configure the hiX5709 MDU equipment see chapter 9 15 MDU hiX 5709 9 1 ONT and MDU Types The table below contains ONT MDU types which are provided by the hiX 5750 R2 0 Name Type Ethernet Ethernet POTS xDSL E1 CATV SIP H 248 AES FEC IGMP WiFi USB 10 100bT 10 100 Snoop 1000bT hiX5701 003 E SFU 1 X X hiX5702 001 SFU 1 2 X X X X X hiX5702 002 SFU 1 2 X X X X X hiX5703 001 SFU 2 4 X X X X X hiX5703 003 SFU 2 4 X X X X X hiX5704 001
368. the following commands to get information about number of counted traps Command Mode Function snmp trap counter reset Config Reset the SNMP trap counter show snmp trap counter Privileged Shows the SNMP trap counter Config Example SWITCH config show snmp trap counter snmp trap counter 4662 SWITCH config snmp trap counter reset SWITCH config show snmp trap counter snmp trap counter 1 SWITCH config 28 8 Checking the SNMP Configuration To check SNMP configuration use the following command Command Mode Function show snmp Privileged Shows the configuration of the switch Config 28 9 Disable SNMP SNMP is enabled by default To disable SNMP on the system use the following command 258 Id 0900d8058025b404 Operation Manual CLI SNMP Command Mode Function no snmp Config Disables SNMP A Using the above command all configurations concerned with SNMP will be deleted Id 0900d8058025b404 259 System Logger Syslog Operation Manual CLI 29 System Logger Syslog Syslog is a logging feature that gives administrators a way to centrally log and analyze configuration events and system error messages This chapter describes the syslog configuration divided into the following sections Configuring the Syslog Output Level Binding an IP Address e Setting the local Facility Code e Verifying and Clearing the local
369. to get information about management sessions accessing the NE Command Mode Function show management session Config Shows information about the management sessions Example SWITCH config show management session SNMP Session Aging Time 300 Management Session Information SWITCH config 3 10 Checking Telnet Users Use the where command to examine the users connected over console port or from remote place through Telnet Command Mode Function where Privileged Shows users connected through Telnet Config Example of displaying users connected through Telnet SWITCH where root at from console for 4 days 22 hours 15 minutes 24 88 secondsroot at ttypO from 10 0 1 4 1670 for 4 days 17 hours 53 minutes 28 76 secondsroot at ttypl from 147 54 140 133 49538 for 6 minutes 34 12 seconds 38 Id 0900d8058025feb5 Operation Manual CLI System Basic Configuration 4 1 4 1 1 Command Mode Function System Basic Configuration Software and Configuration Management For information about commands that are needed to operate the system software see the following sections e Saving the Configuration e Auto Backup the Configuration Downloading and Uploading of Software Restarting the System Restoring default Configuration Displaying the System Version and Startup Information Checking the Running System Configuration The following sections
370. tor information of IU SLOT Select IU Slot Number Shows aggregator information of the selected IU aggregator SLOT Select IU Slot Number AGGREGATIONS Select aggregator number s 0 4 Shows the information of IU member ports SLOT Select IU Slot Number Shows the information of appropriated member port of IU SLOT Select IU Slot Number PORT Select port number s Slot Port Id 0900d8058020266d 239 Rules Operation Manual CLI 25 Rules The hiX 5750 R2 0 system provides rules for the traffic management Using rules packets will be operated as the user has configured Rule functions analyze the incoming traffic by classifying dependent on designated policy in order to decide on packets which will be forwarded For each rule the rule type rule priority rule match rule action and action parameter s must be configured The physical port and data fields within a packet such as the 802 1p priority CoS VLAN ID and DSCP can be modified to configure a policy fi Note the following requirements and using hints The rule name must be unique Its size is limited to 63 characters The sequence of entering the configuration commands is arbitrary Rules can be modified inclusive the rule type only as long as the apply command is not executed After that the rule must be deleted and then created again with changed values e Some rule types will operate correctly only in single tagging mode other
371. transceiver unit xTU R when the connection is not being used for extended periods of time 1d 0900d80580256ef1 Operation Manual CLI XDSL Command Mode Function xdsl line config profile PROFILE pwr mgmt lOtime pwr mgmt l2time lt 0 255 gt Bridge Configures the LO L2 time on xDSL line PROFILE enter the profile name pwr mgmt lOtime minimum time between an exit from the L2 state and the next entry into the L2 state pwr mgmt l2time minimum time between an Entry into the L2 state and the first Power Trim in the L2 state and between two consecutive Power Trims in the L2 State 0 255 range in seconds xdsl line config profile PROFILE pwr mgmt I2atpr pwr mgmt lI2atprt 0 312 Bridge Configures the maximum aggregate transmit power reduction PROFILE enter the profile name pwr mgmt I2atpr maximum aggregate transmit power reduction per formed through a single Power Trim pwr mgmt lI2atprt total max aggregate transmit power reduction per formed in L2 state L2 req s Power Trims 0 31 value in dB step 10 dB xdsl line config profile PROFILE pwr mgmt mode disabled I3 enabled I1 I2 enabled I1 12 I3 enabled Bridge Configures the enabled power management state and where the line may autonomously transition to PROFILE enter the profile name disabled none I3 enabled idle state I1 12 enabled low power state I1 12 I3 enabled both idle and low power state
372. trunk information show running config xdsl alarm profile show running config xdsl all profiles Privileged Config Privileged Config Shows current xDSL alarm profile Shows all current xDSL profiles show running config xdsl chan profile Privileged Config Shows current xDSL channel profile show running config xdsl line profile Privileged Config Shows current xDSL line profile show running config xdsl notch profile Privileged Config Shows current xDSL notch profile show running config xdsl psd profile Privileged Config Shows current xDSL PSD profile show running config xdsl vcc Privileged Config Shows xDSL and VCC information 4 2 Checking the Operating Values of System 4 2 1 Displaying the Running Time of System Command Mode Function show uptime Example SWITCH show uptime Privileged Config Displays running time of system after booting 10 41am up 15 days 10 55 0 users load average 0 05 0 07 0 01 SWITCH 4 2 2 Checking the CPU Load Use this command to display the CPU utilization Command Mode Function show cpuload Config Displays the average of CPU utilization in specific time intervals Example SWITCH config show cpuload 5 sec 7 73 0 00 1 min 4 22 0 00 10 min 4 15 0 00 cpuload threshold timer interval 50 60 seconds SWITCH config Id 0900d80580
373. u128 annexb 997 m1c a 7 annexb 997 m1x m 8 annexb 997 m1x m annexb 997 m2x m 8 annexb 997 m2x a annexb 997 m2x m annexb 997 hpe17 m1 nusO annexb 997 hpe30 m1 nusO annexb 997 e17 m2x nusO annexb 997 e30 m2x nusO annexb 998 m1x a annexb 998 m1x b annexb 998 m1x nusO annexb 998 m2x a annexb 998 m2x m annexb 998 m2x b annexb 998 m2x nusO annexb 998 e17 m2x nusO annexb 998 e17 m2x nusO m annexb 998 ade17 m2x nusO m annexb 998 ade1 7 m2x a annexb 998 ade1 7 m2x b annexb 998 e30 m2x nusO annexb 998 e30 m2x nusO m annexb 998 ade30 m2x nusO m annexb 998 ade30 m2x nus0 a annexb 998 ade17 m2x m annexb 998 e1 7 m2x a itu vdsl2 annexc fttcab a itu vdsl2 annexc fttcab m itu vdsl2 annexc fttex a itu vdsl2 annexc fttex m itu vdsl2 annexc o adsl itu vdsl2 annexc o tcmisdn ansi fttcab m1 ansi fttcab m2 ansi fttex m1 ansi fttex m2 etsi fttcab pcab m1 etsi fttcab pcab m2 etsi fttex p1 m1 o isdn etsi fttex p1 m2 o isdn etsi fttex p2 m1 o pots etsi fttex p2 m2 o pots itu vdsl1 annexe e2 pcaba m1 hanaro fttcab anfp calO Bridge Selects the band plan number which should be used for basic parameter configuration PROFILE enter the profile name Enter a supported band plan 110 1d 0900d80580256ef1 Operation Manual CLI XDSL Line Type Command Mode Function xdsl line config profile PROFILE linetype Bridge Configures channelization
374. um value for allowed bit error rate on downstream direction max bit errorrate us maximum value for allowed bit error rate on upstream direction xdsl chan config profile PROFILE thresh downshift ds thresh upshift ds thresh downshift us thresh upshift us 0 1000000 Bridge Configures rate change threshold causing a downshift upshift trap on downstream upstream channel PROFILE enter the profile name thresh downshift ds rate change threshold causing a downshift trap on downstream channel thresh downshift us rate change threshold causing a downshift trap on upstream channel thresh upshift ds rate change threshold causing an upshift trap on downstream channel thresh upshift us rate change threshold causing an upshift trap on upstream channel 0 1000000 rate change threshold in bps 11 2 3 Checking of Profiles Command Mode Function show xdsl chan config profile Privileged Shows all configured channel profiles Config Bridge show xdsl chan config profile PROFILE Privileged Shows one configured channel profile Config PROFILE enter the profile name Bridge show xdsl chan config info Privileged Shows information of xDSL channel config profiles Config Bridge Id 0900d80580256ef1 117 XDSL Operation Manual CLI Command Mode Function show xdsl chan config info PROFILE Privileged Shows information of xDSL channel config profile Config
375. unction stp mst max age 6 40 Bridge Configures max age of route message in STP RSTP or MSTP 6 40 max age time value default 20 sec no stp mst max age Releases max age of configured route message fi It is recommended that max age is configured less than twice of forward delay and more than twice of hello time 22 5 4 BPDU Hop In MSTP it is possible to configure the number of hop in order to prevent BPDU from wandering BPDU passes the switches as the number of hop by this function To con figure the number of hop of BPDU in MSTP use the following command Command Mode Function stp mst max hops lt 1 40 gt Bridge Configures the number of hop for BPDU 1 40 set the number of possible hops in the region no stp mst max hops Deletes the number of hop for BPDU in MSTP 22 5 5 Checking the BPDU Configuration To check the configuration for BPDU use the following command Command Mode Function show stp mst Privileged Shows the configuration for BPDU Config Bridge 22 6 Self Loop Detection Although there is no double path in user s equipment loop can be caused by network environment and cable condition connected to equipment To prevent this the hiX 5750 R2 0 has a self loop detection to perceive that an outgoing packet is got back Through the self loop detection it is possible to prevent packet which comes back because it
376. up vlan upstream downstream 3 2 mn 1 all 100 0 0 2 300 0 0 3 400 0 0 4 600 0 0 5 800 0 0 SUM 0 0 3 Displaying of the payload counter 1 of group 63 SWITCH config modify payload counter get single 2 1 63 1 0 SWITCH config show payload counter counter single single PAYLOAD COUNTER ponlink 2 1 counter group 63 nsn63 counter 1 time of request 2008 06 09 11 11 03 upstream 0 downstream 0 106 d 0900d80580257cd9 Operation Manual CLI XDSL 11 XDSL This chapter contains all needed information for line configuration line supervision and performance data for ADSL2 and VDSL2 interfaces In the hiX 5750 R2 0 xDSL func tionality is provided by the hiX 5709 MDU which supports VDSL2 and ADSL2 stan dards via service boards In order to configure the xDSL services following steps are necessary 1 Configuring of XDSL profiles Line Profiles Channel Profile e Notch Profile e PSD Mask Profiles Alarm Profile 2 Configuring of LRE Port 3 DELT Configuration Note the following hints and conditions of application before starting ADSL configuration 1 1relation between VCC and bridge port e 1to8 VCC bridge ports per physical port e 1 to 2 channels per physical port possible e By default exist 1 channel 1 VCC bridge port per physical port e VCC can be assigned to any channel Additional channel can be created deleted by operator switch between single and dual latency
377. up for multicast broadcast traffic and the VLAN flag uc assignment of counter groups to user ports and the corresponding VLAN ADDRESS limits the shown user ports as specified by slot port ONU ID ONU slot 10 11 2 Checking the Payload Counter Values Perform the following tasks in order to get information about the status of payload counters 1 Getting and Resetting the Payload Counter Values 2 Displaying the Counter Values i payload counter values will be not saved in the history This means e During operation only such data which were released by the last executed get command can be displayed e Rebooting the active CXU causes the loss of counters d 0900d80580257cd9 103 Ports Operation Manual CLI 10 11 2 1 Getting and Resetting the Payload Counter Values Data may get from all counters or from a particular counter with or without resetting the counters by using the following commands fi Note that reset commands are executed without displaying any information Command Mode Function modify payload counter get single ADDRESS 1 64 1 8 0 1 Config Gets the value from ONE counter ADDRESS slot port 1 64 counter group 1 8 counter in group 0 1 flag controls whether counters are reset after the data have been got or not 1 true reset counter 0 false no reset modify payload counter reset single ADDRESS 1 64 1 8 Resets the current
378. uped together and organized into chapters based on their most common usage In many cases usage examples and configuration instructions are given For a detailed system overview refer to the documents itemized in section 1 4 Related Documents i Depending on the software load used in the hiX 5750 R2 0 some features described in this document may not be supported Refer to the current release notes of the hiX 5750 R2 0 to determine the provided features If the information in the release notes differs from the information in this manual follow the release notes Audience This manual is intended for hiX 5750 R2 0 operators and maintenance personnel It assumes knowledge of OLT and ONU configuration In particular users should be familiar with the following e Ethernet technology and standards e Virtual local area networks VLANs e Unicast IP routing concepts and protocols Internet IP protocols and concepts DSL technology and standards Basic knowledge about the personal computer and its applications Document Conventions The following symbols are used in order to boost reader s attention i NOTE This is the symbol for additional information that may be of special impor tance Notes contain also helpful suggestions or references DANGER This warning symbol means danger You are a situation that could causes bodily injury equipment damage or loss of data Before you work on any equipment be aware of the hazards i
379. uplinks 150G switching capacity 1x 10G uplink virtual routing support planned set admin state to planned locked set admin state to locked 7 2 Changing the Admin State of Card Command card admin state SL OTNUM planned locked unlocked Mode Function Config Changes the admin state of a card SLOTNUM number of the slot planned set admin state to planned locked set admin state to locked unlocked set admin state to unlocked Id 0900d8058023f600 61 OLT Equipment Operation Manual CLI 7 3 Reset of Interface Unit Cards Command Mode Function reset type m iugpon 2512 elm iugpon 2512 al Config Resets all modules of the same type m iugopn 2512 el m iutOge 1o elm iutge 100 eJ m iugpon 2512 e IU with 4 port GPON 2 5 1 2G class B with 8x E1 unstructured front access m iugpon 2512 a IU with 4 port GPON 2 5 1 2G class B with 8x DS1 unstructured rear access m iu gpon 2512 I e IU with 4 ports GPON 2 5G 1 2G class B front access m iutfOge 1o e IU with uplink with optical 10G interface m iuilge 100 e IU with 10x 1G interfaces 7 4 Deleting an Existing Card Command Mode Function slot card delete SLOTNUM Config Deletes an existing card SLOTNUM number of the slot 7 5 Converting of IU GPON Cards Command Mode Function slot card convert SLOTNUM m iu gpon 2512 el Config Converts an existi
380. urce recovered receive clock is used local transmit clock source local clock source is used trough transmit clock source covered receive clock from another interface disabled channelization is disabled enabled channelization is enabled Connecting of two E1 DS1 Interfaces Note the following restrictions e Atone GPON link can be connected not more than 8 E1 DS1 ONT interfaces The NE accepts no other connection commands e Atall GPON links of one IU GPON can be connected not more than 8 E1 DS1 ONT interfaces Only the following connections are possible 1 and 2 E1 port of IU GPON 1 GPON port of IU GPON 3 and 4 E1 port of IU GPON 2 GPON port of IU GPON 5 and 6 E1 port of IU GPON 3 GPON port of IU GPON 7 and 8 E1 port of IU GPON 4 GPON port of IU GPON d 0900d80580257cd9 87 Ports Operation Manual CLI Command Mode Function create e1ds1 connection ADDRESSOLT ADDESSSONT Config Creates connection between 2 E1DS1 interfaces of the same type ADDRESSOLT OLT slot OLT port for interface on OLT side ADDRESSONT OLT slot GPON port ONU ID ONT slot ONT port on ONT side delete e1ds1 connection CONNECTIONID Config Deletes connection between 2 E1DS1 interfaces of the same type CONNECTION ID of existing connection Command Mode Function show e1ds1 connections OLT SLOT OLT_PORT Config Displays a table of connections between 2 E1DS1 interfaces OLT SLO
381. ure ct por obi up doti obse eed a E 20 Command Modes Overview llle eres 20 Entering a Command Mode ilullslseslls sellers 21 UserExeo Modes urard s ume SDD DASE danewseae arse cuge aoe 21 Privileged Exec Mode 2 csssso ss o RR km ke d Ra es 21 Configuration Modes vc eese bep EPI besa ots eedee webs ed 21 Rule Configuration Mode sorires eroe wine ado eite as 22 DHCP Configuration MOS 1 23 3 13er er dean tuedeheddaoed gues 23 RMON Configuration Mode isses sere 23 Bridge Configuration Mode 0 0c cece ree 23 interface Configuration Mode sic ddan ae drei zug 24 Router Configuration Mode isissllseee leere 24 Route Map Configuration Mode 000 eee eee eee 25 PPPoE Configuration MOGdG sarei RP S EREA TRI TRR ASNE 25 Exiting a Command Mode oss esee m emm ros 26 BETREUER 26 Listing Available Commands 0000 ce cece eee eee 26 Calling Command History uio acit tee robe ded ebbe Rd poe 28 Using Abbreviation uus cigars a RE RU EEEREN 28 Using Privileged Mode Command 00 cece eee ee eee 28 Using Line Editing Keys sac obe vp Es EP Deui Eee ebbe d eed 29 Port Indices and Slot Assignments llle 30 SVSIGMACCESS to Moki ee LORI RE Rd deed eiit dee tebe oe 32 OVEWICWS s sspe amas orba E Dus a eieedng aces dtu Due tn ERE 32 Login tor ihe First TIME iu dem nere eem meme demens 32 Proceeding ee p EE 32 Configuring the Outband Interface
382. ured member port of CXU in LACP lacp iu SLOT port aggregation PORTS Bridge Designate whether a member port of IU is included in LACP or not no lacp iu SLOT port aggregation PORTS PORT Select port number s Slot Port Default setting is aggregatable SLOT Select port number s Clears the configured member port of IU in LACP A member port is basically configured as aggregatable to LAG After clearing the member state the port returns to default configuration aggregated 24 3 7 Configuring LACPDU Transmission Rate The member port transmits LACPDU bridge protocol data unit with its information Configure the LACPDU transmission rate by using the following commands Command Mode Function lacp port timeout PORTS short long no lacp port timeout PORTS Bridge Configures LACPDU transmission rate for CXU LAG PORTS select the port number short short timeout long long timeout Clears LACPDU transmission rate of configured member port of CXU LAG lacp iu SLOT port timeout PORTS short long no lacp iu SLOT port timeout PORTS Bridge Configures LACPDU transmission rate for IU LAG PORTS Select port number s Slot Port short short timeout long long timeout SLOT select IU slot number Clears LACPDU transmission rate of configured member port of IU LAG LACPDU transmission rate of member port is basically configured as 1ong Id 0900d805802
383. uring of Call Control PM irum neg ede wares ER ER 133 Configuring of FiTIP PM u a aod piapa eo ar e i 134 Updating the PM Data i5 ov rene qp eERRI I eX RYE iners dtaa 135 Checking the Current and History PM Data 20 005 136 Megaco H 246 Protocol s iuis otia rd Ra ter doter ire Ds b edes 136 MGC Configuration Data Table 00000 cee ee 136 MGG User Bataz eiit eb gtu URTE te beget whe eee 136 MGC Performance Monitoring 0 estudi da eee eee 137 Checking the MGC Configuration and User Table 138 Session Initiation Protocol SIP 2 0 0c eee eee 139 SIP ProtileS iui unii oh RR Rp pP a oie Rees IM eet edd 139 SIP ASBRU s oxiadelyed ced hoa estet Drops 6d india poids 143 SIP User Data lables se snas scm m ees tcu E a cans sagas 145 SIP User Dial PlaniMappindacse 3cieabese4 Ghee esha esas ees ue 146 SIP Performance Moitorihg xs scenes ERR REG REF RERIMEG 146 Checking the User Status Information 0000020eeaee 148 Verifying SIP Error Codes lslselleleel eese 149 MAG co aaar id Dees uae aptent pet outa Ge tas mE SR are esa 150 Setting the GPON MAC Mode 20 000s 150 Configuring of Priority Mapping Profiles 002000 150 Configuring of CoS Mapping Profiles llle 151 Configuring of Enhanced MAC Modes slsslseesl eres 152 Ni d Bridge MOGe sad eniro GRECE RUEGIA e ees PRU RUE RODA ER C gc 152 1 1 VLAN Cross Connect Mod
384. urst size lt 96 15000 gt VALUE enter the value i The order of irl set profile commands is arbitrary Modifying of a profile is possible as long as irl apply command is not executed 27 3 Saving a IRL Profile A created or modified profile must be saved and applied to the system with the following command Commands Mode Function irl apply profile Config Saves profile configuration 250 i If the IRL profile is not saved all made settings will be lost Notes 1 The NE manages up to 200 different profiles at the same time 2 The name must be different Otherwise the NE rejects the new profile or the modifi cation d 0900d80580202c91 Operation Manual CLI IRL Input Rate Limitation 3 The NE keeps the values of the last created or modified profile in a temporary memory These values can be reused to create further profiles which only differ in e g the cbs value That means it is not necessary always to enter all four values if they are the same like in the previously created or modified profile 27 4 Deleting a IRL Profile Commands Mode Function irl delete profilePROFILENAME Privileged Deletes an existing IRL profile Config PROFILENAME enter the profile name A currently used profile cannot be deleted If this profile is referenced by one or more ports the show irl ifmap profile command can be used to get a list of all ports which are mapped to it
385. v1 v2c v3 specify security level according to SNMP version SECURITY NAME security name this is the name that is created with the com2sec command Deletes specified SNMP group With the following command the SNMP groups can be verified Command Mode Function show snmp group Privileged Checks the registered group Config 28 5 Configuring the SNMP MIB View Each object of MIB can be accessed by the SNMP manager over its unique ODI Use the following command in order to create an SNMP view record that allows the SNMP agent depending on the object identity OID to limit the user s access to MIB objects Command Mode Function snmp view VIEW included excluded OID MASK Config no snmp view VIEW Configures OID which contains does not contain a sub tree VIEW MIB view record name include includes MIB sub tree exclude excludes MIB sub tree OID OID number MASK mask value e g ff or ff ff Deletes view of the specified name The following command displays the configured SNMP views Command Mode Function show snmp view Privileged Shows configured view Config Example SWITCH config show snmp view View List ViewName Type SubTree Mask SWITCH config 28 6 Configuring the Access Policy for Group To grant an SNMP group to access specific SNMP MIB view records use the following command SNMP
386. vertising a set of destinations as IP prefix and enable the creation of aggregate routes to minimize the size of routing tables Smaller BGP routing tables can reduce the con vergence time of the network and improve network performance Using BGP the hiX 5750 R2 0 is intended to exchange information about AS and the paths reaching between the BGP equipment The BGP basic configuration includes the following tasks Enabling a BGP Routing Process e Announcing the Network to Neighbors Configuring BGP Neighbor Routers Managing BGP Peer Groups Enabling a BGP Routing Process Command Mode Function router bgp lt 1 65535 gt Config Enables a BGP routing process by assigning AS number 1 65535 enter the AS number Use the no parameter with this command to disable a routing process The AS number is used to identify the AS and for detecting whether the BGP connection is internal one or external one The range from 65512 to 65535 contains the private AS numbers which must not be advertised on the network configuration Id 0900d80580212815 197 IP Routing Operation Manual CLI 21 2 2 Announcing the Network to Neighbors For data to be advertised by BGP its routing table must include a route to the specified network The following command specifies the networks to be advertised Command Mode Function network A B C D M Config Adds the announcement network to neighbors A B C D sp
387. via line profile Enabling ADSL2 and VDSL2 standard is not supported inside of one single profile at the same time e fthe subscriber port is of ADSL2 a switch over to a VDSL2 mode is not possi ble Command Mode Function Ire PORTS xdsl line config PROFILE Bridge Ire PORTS xdsl chan config channel channel2 PROFILE Ire PORTS xdsl notch config PROFILE Ire PORTS xdsl psd config up down PROFILE Ire PORTS xdsl alarm config PROFILE Assigns xDSL line config profile to specified port PORTS enter slot port ONU ID ONT slot PROFILE enter line profile name Sets channel profile for channel1 channel2 Channel is always available channel2 only in dual latency mode PORTS enter slot port ONU ID ONT slot PROFILE enter the channel profile name i Profile name for channel 1 must be set profile name for channel2 can be left empty Assigns xDSL Notch profile to specified port PORTS enter slot port ONU ID ONT slot PROFILE enter notch profile name or nothing if profile has to be removed from port Assigns PSD upstream downstream profile to specified port PORTS enter slot port ONU ID ONT slot PROFILE enter PSD profile name or nothing to reassign profile from ports Assigns the alarm profile to specified port PORTS enter slot port ONU ID ONT slot PROFILE enter alarm profile name 11 6 2 ATM Configuration In addition t
388. ware infringes the intellectual property rights of a third party Nokia Siemens Networks provides no technical support for either the software or the Open Source Software contained therein if either has been changed Id 0900d8058020cb15 19 Using CLI Operation Manual CLI 2 Using CLI This chapter describes the CLI command line interface modes in which configuration commands of the hiX 5750 R2 0 must be executed and provides helpful tips for the effective usage of CLI 2 1 Command Modes Overview Serial interface Bits per second 38400 Data bits 8 PuTTY Parity none telnet Stop bits 1 Flow control none Connect Login Password User EXEC mode SWITCH gt enable or en _ end change to Privileged EXEC mode EXEC mode SWITCH configure terminal or cont exit change to previous mode Configuration mode SWITCH config st bridge or br Bridge mode SWITCH bridge st ip dhcp provider NAME NAME Provider name DHCP configuration mode SWITCH dhcp provider st rmon history 1 65535 RMON configuration mode SWITCH config rmonhistory n ip pppoe provider NAME NAME Provider name interface mgmt or in mgmt Interface configuration mode SWITCH config if rule NAME create NAME Rule name Rule configuration mode SWITCH config rule router XXX XXX bgp Border Gateway Protocol BGP isis IS IS Protocol rip Routing Information Protocol RIP Router
389. x LINE new user URL until CR the whole line will be taken as organization name spaces included maximum 256 characters 12 7 3 MGC Performance Monitoring The MGC monitor object table contains an entry for each H 248 agent PM object Index for PM objects is the physical index of the ONT containing the H 248 agent One ONT contains one H 248 agent All MGC user data table entries of one ONT must use the same MGC configuration data entry only one profile per ONT possible Since one MGC configuration data entry can be used for several ONTs MGC configuration data table and MGC monitor object table have different indices See 10 10 2 Calculation Algorithms for PM Objects for information on the PM object indexes Configuring of MGC Objects To configure MGC objects use the following commands Command create voip performance mgcmon object NDEX lock I unlock lock unlock 0 96 0 1 1 16 Mode Config modify voip performance mgcmon object NDEX lock I unlock lock unlock 0 96 0 1 1 16 delete voip performance mgcmon object NDEX Function Creates VoIP performance MGC monitoring object INDEX object index lock unlock deactivates activates performance monitoring admin state 15min 24hrs 0 96 number of history entries configured for the PM object and the 15min interval 0 1 number of history entries configured for the PM object and the 24hrs interval
390. x of ONT card P bi dd ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port ONT ID ONT slot create voip performance sip agent pm object addr lock unlock deactivates activates performance monitoring ADDRESS lock I unlock lock I unlock lt 0 96 gt lt 0 1 gt admin state 15 min alee lock unlock deactivates activates performance monitoring admin state 24 h 0 96 history size 15 min number of history entries for the PM object and the interval type 0 1 history size 24 h number of history entries for the PM object and the interval type 1 16 pointer to the threshold object modify voip performance sip agent pm object INDEX Modifies the SIP agent performance monitoring object table lock I unlock lock I unlock 0 96 0 1 1 16 gt modify voip performance sip agent pm object addr ADDRESS lock unlock lock unlock lt 0 96 gt lt 0 1 gt lt 1 16 gt delete voip performance sip call agent pm object INDEX Deletes object table for SIP agent performance monitoring delete voip performance sip call agent pm object addr ADDRESS create voip performance sip call init pm object NDEX Config Creates SIP agent performance monitoring lock I unlock lock I unlock 0 96 0 1 lt 1 16 gt modify voip performance sip call init pm object INDEX lock I unlock lock I unlock 0 96 0 1 1 16 delete voip performance sip call init pm object NDEX Id 0900d8058023f697 INDEX object index physi
391. xFO are reserved for future use OxF1 OxFF are reserved for proprietary vendor configuration methods modify voip voip config data server address PHYS INDEX Config Modifies server address in config table entry LINE PHYS INDEX physical index ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port ONT ID ONT slot LINE server address to contact using the method indicated in the above attribute The whole line will be taken until CR modify voip voip config data server address addr ADDRESS LINE Id 0900d8058023f697 131 Voice over IP Operation Manual CLI Command Mode Function modify voip voip config data alarm severity PHYS_INDEX Config Modifies alarm severity in config table entry lt 1 10 gt PHYS INDEX physical index ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port ONT ID ONT slot modify voip voip config data alarm severity addr ADDRESS 1 10 alarm severity index 1 10 12 3 2 Checking the VoIP Configuration Data Table To show configuration data use the following commands Command Mode Function show voip voip config data table Exec Shows the VoIP config data table of all or specified ONT Config ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port ONT ID ONT slot show voip voip config data table addr ADDRESS 12 4 Voice CTP Connection Termination Point Table A CTP table entry is automatically created and will be numbered identically with the POTS PPTP 12 4 4 Modifying the Voice CTP Table To modify
392. xed bandwidth bit s only valid for T CONT type 1 Must be set to ZERO for other T CONT types Configurable ranges voip 0 130050000 tdm 0 1099560000 0 1099560000 assured bandwidth bit s only valid for T CONT types 2 and 3 Must be set to ZERO for other T CONT types 0 1099560000 maximum bandwidth bit s only valid for T CONT types 3 and 4 Must be set to ZERO for other T CONT types i The command fails in case of overbooking Command Mode Function show tcont table list ADDRESS tdm voip data be Config Displays transmission container data hp data rt data Bridge table table with config data list list with config data ADDRESS OLT slot GPON port ONU ID tdm time division multiplexing voip voice over Internet protocol data be data best effort data hp data high priority data rt data real time data all data 10 2 2 DBA and Overbooking Dynamic Bandwidth Allocation DBA is a technique for allocating bandwidth based on current traffic requirements If the DBA mechanism is used the OLT can rearrange the upstream bandwidth to provide more resources for those ONTs that are tightly loaded with traffic The OLT monitors the incoming traffic from the ONTs for each single T CONT If the ONT has to send no traffic it transmits GEM idle frames If the OLT observes that a certain ONT is sending at least one user GEM frame it increases the bandwidth allocation for this ON
393. ys joined multicast group list per subscriber BRIDGEPORT bridge port specified by slot port VCC show igmp joined mc addresses ONUPORT Config Displays list of joined MC addresses per port ONUPORT slot link ONU ID slot 19 8 Assigning of an ONU Port to static Multicast Groups A static MC group to port mapping guarantees that a specific MC stream is instantly available on a port without any delay from the joining process Additional it enables to include subscribers that cannot send IGMP membership reports To create or delete IGMP static table entries use the following commands Id 0900d80580214302 191 IGMP Operation Manual CLI Command Mode Function igmp onu port static group PORT A B C D lt 1 4093 gt A B C D lt 1 4093 gt A B C D lt 1 4093 gt Config Creates a static table entry for an ONU port PORT ONU port address slot link ONU ID slot port A B C D IP address of multicast group 1 1 4093 VLAN ID 1 A B C D IP address of multicast group 2 1 4093 VLAN ID 2 A B C D IP address of multicast group 3 1 4093 VLAN ID 3 Use the no parameter with this command to delete a static table entry 192 Id 0900d80580214302 Operation Manual CLI ARP Table 20 20 1 20 2 ARP Table Hosts connected to an IP network have two addresses a physical MAC address and a logical IP network address The 48 bit MAC address is used on Layer 2 l

Download Pdf Manuals

image

Related Search

Related Contents

Carregue aqui para obter o ficheiro  Samsung VC-CN610 User Manual  Traitement de la maladie de parkinson  EasyStaff Application User Manual  Speakman S-3010-BN-E2 Installation Guide  CA120 (Modus 1, Installationsanweisung) - alarmanlagen  Sistema de Vigilância  Elkay ERPBM28K Use and Care Manual  DeLonghi DC500B Coffee Maker    

Copyright © All rights reserved.
Failed to retrieve file